Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with user interface objects correspo

专利摘要:
An electronic device displays a first user interface including a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface. While displaying the first user interface, the device detects a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface. If the first input is directed to a first location corresponding to a first set of application icons: the device moves the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location, where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated once they have been moved to the respective location, to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location, and displays the first user interface object at the first location.
公开号:DK202070636A1
申请号:DKP202070636
申请日:2020-09-24
公开日:2021-10-29
发明作者:M Tyler William；G Stack Caelan；X Dalonzo Christian
申请人:Apple Inc；
IPC主号:

专利说明:

[0001] [0001] This relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces for displaying and interacting with user interface objects corresponding to applications.BACKGROUND
[0002] [0002] The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recent years. Example touch- — sensitive surfaces include touchpads and touch-screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to manipulate user interfaces and objects therein on a display. Example user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics.
[0003] [0003] Example manipulations include adjusting the position and/or size of one or — more user interface objects or activating buttons or opening files/applications represented by user interface objects, as well as associating metadata with one or more user interface objects or otherwise manipulating user interfaces. Example user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, control elements such as buttons and other graphics. A user will, in some circumstances, need to perform such manipulations on user interface objects in a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), an image management application (e.g., Aperture, iPhoto, Photos from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a digital content (e.g., videos and music) management application (e.g., iTunes from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a drawing application, a presentation application (e.g., Keynote from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a word processing application (e.g., Pages from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), or a spreadsheet application (e.g., Numbers from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California).
[0004] [0004] But methods for performing these manipulations are cumbersome and inefficient. For example, using a sequence of mouse based inputs to select one or more user interface objects and perform one or more actions on the selected user interface objects is tedious and creates a significant cognitive burden on a user. In addition, these methods take 1
[0005] [0005] Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces displaying and interacting with user interface objects corresponding to different applications. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery- operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.
[0006] [0006] The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the device is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch). In some embodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch-screen display”). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI primarily through stylus and/or finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, note taking, and/or digital video playing.
[0007] [0007] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device including a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method includes, displaying, via the display generation component, a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface 2
[0008] [0008] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device including a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method 3
[0009] [0009] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device including a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method — includes, displaying a first user interface, including displaying a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface. The method further includes, while displaying the first user interface including the plurality of application icons in accordance with the first layout, detecting a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface. The method — further includes, in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a first location corresponding to a first set of application icons on the first user interface: moving the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that 4
[0010] [0010] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device including a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method includes, at a first time, displaying a first user interface, wherein: the first user interface includes a placement location that is configured to spatially accommodate a respective user interface object of a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications that are associated with the placement location; the plurality of user interface objects includes a first user interface object corresponding to a first application, and a second user interface object corresponding to a second application different from the first application; and at the first time the first user interface object is displayed at the placement location. The method further includes, at a second time, after the first time, displaying the first user interface with the second user interface object displayed at the placement location, wherein the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on a current context of the device at the second time. The method further includes, while the second user interface object is displayed at the placement location, detecting a gesture directed to the placement location. The method further includes, in response to detecting the gesture directed to the placement location, in accordance with a determination that the gesture is a first type of gesture, replacing display of the second user interface object with a different — user interface object from the plurality of user interface objects that are associated with the placement location.
[0011] [0011] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device including a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying a first user interface that includes a first placement location that is associated with a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications, where the plurality of user interface objects includes a first user interface object that includes information from a first application, a second user interface object that includes information from a second application that is different from the first application, and a third user interface object that includes information from a third application that is different from the first application and the second application. The method further includes, after displaying the first user interface object corresponding to the first application at the first placement location in the first user interface, detecting occurrence of a respective condition. The method further 5
[0012] [0012] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device including a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying a first page of a multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode, where respective positions of a first plurality of application icons in the first page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode. The method further includes, while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a first input that corresponds to a request to enter a second reconfiguration mode from the first reconfiguration mode, where the availability of one or more pages in the multipage home screen user interface can be changed in accordance with user inputs in the second reconfiguration mode. The method further includes, in response to detecting the first input, replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the 6
[0013] [0013] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device including a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying a respective page of a home screen user interface, where the respective — page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons in a first predefined arrangement. The method further includes detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to insert, into the respective page of the home screen user interface, a first user interface object containing a plurality of application icons for a plurality of applications that are automatically selected by the computer system. The method further includes, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, concurrently displaying on the respective page of the home screen user interface: two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement, and a second plurality of application icons, different from the first plurality of application icons, where the second plurality of application icons are automatically placed on the respective page of the home screen in — locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface, and the second 7
[0014] [0014] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device including a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the display generation component, a respective page of a home screen user interface, where the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons and a first user interface object containing application content corresponding to a respective application displayed at a first placement location. The method further includes, while displaying the respective page of the home screen user — interface, detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first user interface object containing application content away from the first placement location. The method further includes, in response to detecting the first user input, moving the first user interface object relative to the first placement location in the respective page in accordance with the first user input, and, in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met, moving a first plurality of application icons that are located in a first set of placement locations relative to the first placement location of the first user interface object containing application content to follow a direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content.
[0015] [0015] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic — device including a display generation component and one or more input devices. The method includes displaying, via the display generation component, a first user interface for selecting user interface objects for placement on a home screen user interface of the computer system, where the first user interface includes a first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to a first application. The method further includes, while displaying the first user interface, detecting a first user input that is directed to a respective location in the first user interface. The method further includes, in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface, in accordance with a determination that the respective location n corresponds to a location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application and is preconfigured with one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object, and that the first user input is a first type of input, displaying one or more first controls for changing one or more configuration options for the first user interface 8
[0016] [0016] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display generation component (e.g., a touch-screen, a display, a display of a head mounted device, etc.), a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, one or more processors, and memory storing one or more programs; the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable storage medium has stored therein instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display generation component (e.g., a touch-screen, a display, a display of a head mounted device, etc.), a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform or cause performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, which are updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes: a display generation component (e.g., a touch- screen, a display, a display of a head mounted device, etc.), a touch-sensitive surface, 9 optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more tactile output generators; and means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an information processing apparatus, for use in an electronic device with a display generation component (e.g., a touch-screen, a display, a display of a head mounted device, etc.), a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more tactile output generators, includes means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein.
[0017] [0017] Thus, electronic devices with display generation components, touch-sensitive surfaces, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch- sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, and optionally an audio system, are provided with improved methods and interfaces for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices.BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0018] [0018] For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.
[0019] [0019] Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.
[0020] [0020] Figure 1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
[0021] [0021] Figure 1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module in accordance with some embodiments.
[0022] [0022] Figure 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.
[0023] [0023] Figure 3 is a block diagram of an example multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
[0024] [0024] Figure 4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.
[0025] [0025] Figure 4B illustrates an example user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.
[0026] [0026] Figures 4C-4E illustrate examples of dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments.
[0027] [0027] Figures SA1-5A36 illustrate example user interfaces for displaying and interacting with user interface objects corresponding to different applications, in accordance with some embodiments.
[0028] [0028] Figures 5B1-5B19 illustrate example user interfaces for reconfiguring the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[0029] [0029] Figures 5C1-5C73 illustrate example user interfaces for inserting a user interface object containing application content (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) into a page of a home screen user interface (e.g., a single page or multipage home screen user interface), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0030] [0030] Figures 5D1-5D12 illustrate example user interfaces for selecting for display — and updating user interface objects containing application content (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) that are associated with a placement location in a page of a home screen user interface (e.g., a single page or multipage home screen user interface), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0031] [0031] Figures SE1-5E32 illustrate example user interfaces for interacting with a plurality of user interface objects containing application content that is associated with a common placement location (e.g., a widget or mini application object stack, etc.) (e.g., on a page of a home screen user interface and in a stack-specific configuration user interface, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0032] [0032] Figures 5F1-5F30 illustrate example user interfaces for interacting with multiple pages of a home screen user interface (e.g., in an icon reconfiguration mode, in a 11 page editing mode, and when transitioning between the two modes, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0033] [0033] Figures 5G1-5G31 illustrate example user interfaces for displaying and interacting with a user interface object (e.g., a suggested applications widget, a recommended applications widget, a recent apps widget, etc.) that presents application icons that are automatically selected by a computer system at a user selected location (e.g., a user-selected placement location on a page of a home screen user interface, on a widget screen, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0034] [0034] Figures SH1-5H76 illustrate various ways that existing user interface objects corresponding to different applications (e.g., application icons, widgets, etc. of various sizes) on a page of a home screen user interface are moved and/or rearranged during a reconfiguration mode (e.g., in accordance with repositioning, deletion, addition, passing through, removal, etc. of one or more user interface objects corresponding to different applications), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0035] [0035] Figures 511-5118 illustrate user interfaces for configuring user interface objects containing application content (e.g., widgets, mini application objects, etc.) and adding the same to another user interface (e.g., a page of a home screen), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0036] [0036] Figures 6A-6K are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying an interacting with user interface objects corresponding to different applications, in accordance with some embodiments.
[0037] [0037] Figures 7A-7H are flow diagrams illustrating a method of reconfiguring the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[0038] [0038] Figures 8A-8M are flow diagrams illustrating a method of inserting a user interface object containing application content (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) in a page of a home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[0039] [0039] Figures 9A-9H are flow diagrams illustrating a method of selection for display and updating user interface objects (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) that are associated with a placement location in a page of a home screen user interface, in accordance — with some embodiments.
[0040] [0040] Figures 10A-10H are flow diagrams illustrating a method of interacting with a plurality of user interface objects containing application content that is associated with a common placement location (e.g., a widget or mini application object stack, etc.) (e.g., on a page of a home screen user interface and in a stack-specific configuration user interface, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0041] [0041] Figures 11A-11D are flow diagrams illustrating a method for interacting with multiple pages of a home screen user interface (e.g., in an icon reconfiguration mode, in a page editing mode, and when transitioning between the two modes, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0042] [0042] Figures 12A-12F are flow diagrams illustrating a method for displaying and interacting with a user interface object (e.g., a suggested applications widget, a recommended applications widget, a recent apps widget, etc.) that presents application icons that are automatically selected by a computer system at a user selected location (e.g., a user-selected placement location on a page of a home screen user interface, on a widget screen, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0043] [0043] Figures 13A-13H are flow diagrams illustrating a method of moving and/or rearranging existing user interface objects corresponding to different applications (e.g., application icons, widgets, etc. of various sizes) on a page of a home screen user interface during a reconfiguration mode (e.g., in accordance with repositioning, deletion, addition, — passing through, removal, etc. of one or more user interface objects corresponding to different applications), in accordance with some embodiments.
[0044] [0044] Figures 14A-14G are flow diagrams illustrating a method for configuring user interface objects containing application content (e.g., widgets, mini application objects, etc.) and adding the same to another user interface (e.g., a page of a home screen), in accordance — with some embodiments.DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS
[0045] [0045] Some methods of displaying and interacting with user interface objects corresponding to different applications, in particular, for displaying and interacting with application icons corresponding to different applications, often require multiple separate — inputs for the user to manually arrange the application icons into meaningful categories or folders on a user-defined home screen. The user has to look for the correct application icon 13
[0046] [0046] The embodiments below provide an additional system-arranged page or pages of the home screen user interface that include application icons automatically categorized and arranged in automatically generated groupings. The user can easily navigate to the system- generated page(s) of the home screen and locate the application icon of a desired application based on its characteristics (e.g., app store category, function, when it was installed, etc.) using the same navigation gestures used to navigate between user-arranged pages of the home screen user interface. In some embodiments, recently installed applications, recently accessed applications, and/or contextually relevant applications are automatically identified by the — operating system and included in corresponding categories (e.g., recently installed, recently accessed, and/or contextually suggested categories, etc.) in the system-generated page(s) of the home screen user interface. In some embodiments, the system-generated home screen also includes user interface objects including application content, also referred to as mini- application objects or widgets, that provide a limited subset of functions and/or information available from their corresponding applications without requiring the applications to be launched. In some embodiments, the system-arranged page(s) of the multipage home screen user interface provides a search input area that allows the user to input search criteria (e.g., keywords, filters such as apps with recent notifications, apps that are published by a particular publisher, etc.) and returns applications (e.g., installed applications, and/or available applications from the app store, etc.) corresponding to the search criteria as search results. In some embodiments, the search results include application icons that can be directly interacted with, e.g., to launch the corresponding applications, dragged and dropped onto desired positions in the user-arranged pages of the home screen, and/or deleted from the device, without requiring the user having to find the application icons in their current positions on the user-arranged pages of the home screen user interface. In some embodiments, similar capabilities are provided for the application icons shown on the system-arranged home screen as well. In some embodiments, the system-generated groupings 14
[0047] [0047] Some methods of configuring pages of a multipage home screen user interface involve a user laboriously moving application icons around on different pages of the home screen or onto a new page of a home screen, and manually deleting all application icons on a page to delete the page. There is also no easy way to arrange the different pages of the multipage home screen as a whole, or restore a page or set of application icons after they have been deleted from the multipage home screen user interface. As disclosed herein, a 15
[0048] [0048] On some computer systems, when a user wishes to insert a widget into a home screen user interface, if the desired drop location is already occupied or if there is not sufficient space on the user interface, the insertion will fail or be prevented. The user would have to manually clear some space on the user interface first, e.g., by deleting and/or moving some application icons from the user interface. In some cases, even if insertion is possible, it — causes reflow of existing application icons on the user interface, and sometimes pushing some icons at the bottom of the page onto the next page, which may cause a cascading effect that undesirably change the layout on multipage pages of the home screen user interface. As disclosed herein, a computer system automatically moves the set of application icons and/or widgets that are currently located at a desired placement location selected by the user for the new widget to a preset location (e.g., a new folder on the current page, or a new page of the home screen user interface, etc.) that is created for holding the displayed set of application icons and/or widgets and that does not impact the layout of other portions of the current page 16
[0049] [0049] On some computer system, a widget that is displayed at a placement location is fixed and does not automatically switch to a different widget or widget for a different application. As disclosed herein, a widget stack is implemented such that multiple widgets — share the same placement location and are displayed at different times at the same placement location. In some embodiments, a placement location on a page of a home screen user interface optionally is associated with widgets of multiple different applications, where different subsets of the widgets or mini application objects associated with the placement location are displayed at different times. In some instances, the computer system automatically updates (e.g., without user inputs) the selection of widget(s) for display at the placement location at the current time based on current context. In addition, the computer system also updates which widgets or mini application object(s) are displayed at the 17
[0050] [0050] Some methods of browsing through a listing of applications that have available widgets and selecting a widget from the listing to enter into a fixed location in a widget screen are rigid and cumbersome. It is difficult for the user to discover a useful widget and find easy opportunities to add the widget to a desirable location on the pages of the home — screen user interface. As disclosed herein, a widget stack that includes multiple widgets that are displayed at the same placement location at different times. A stack-specific configuration user interface includes a representation of multiple (e.g., some or all, each, etc.) widget in the widget stack. In addition to providing configuration options and entry points for additional configuration options for the widgets in the stack, the stack-specific configuration user interface also serves double duty and provides the function of a widget selection and configuration user interface for the widgets in the stack, where one or more of the widgets can be added to a default location or a user-selected location in response to selection of the 18
[0051] [0051] Some methods of providing an entry point into a page editing mode in which a — user can manage or delete whole pages of application icons in a home screen user interface do not involve initiating an icon reconfiguration mode first and entering the page editing mode while in the icon reconfiguration mode. Some methods of providing a page editing mode also does not provide an entry point into an icon reconfiguration mode. Essentially, page editing and icon reconfiguration are decoupled from each other in some computer — systems, and transition from one mode to the other mode involves multiple user inputs and the process is cumbersome and time-consuming. As disclosed herein, the computer system provides an entry point from the page editing mode into the icon reconfiguration mode, and provides an entry point from the icon reconfiguration mode to the page editing mode. In particular, the computer system optionally enters the page editing mode in response to a user — input that is detected while a first page of the home screen user interface is displayed in the icon reconfiguration mode, and exits the page editing mode and displays another page of the home screen user interface displayed in the icon reconfiguration mode in response to an input directed to a representation of said other page. The ability to transition back and forth between the page editing mode and the icon reconfiguration mode in response to single inputs — is fast and efficient, and improves usability of the computer system. In some embodiments, the page editing user interface displayed in the page editing mode includes representations of multiple (e.g., all, some, etc.) user-arranged pages of the home screen user interface, and 19
[0052] [0052] On some computer systems, a small number of user-selected application icons may be included in a widget and placed on a page of a home screen user interface. However, the selection is static and does not change based on the current context. As a result, the usefulness of the widget is limited, and requires a lot of user maintenance time and effort to remain useful overtime. In addition, the widget position and size are not aligned with that of other application icons on the same page, resulting in a disorganized look and causing difficulty in maintaining a preset configuration of the home screen user interface. As disclosed herein, a computer system provides a suggested applications widget that includes application icons for a plurality of applications that are automatically selected by the — computer system based on criteria for measuring likely relevance of the applications to a user given the current context. The suggested applications widget is repositionable by a user during an icon reconfiguration mode and can be inserted into a user-specified location on a page of the home screen user interface. When displaying the suggested applications widget, the computer system displays the application icons within the suggested applications widget — with sizes and positions matching and aligned with other application icons on the same page, to create a uniform and consistent layout even when the suggested applications widget are displayed at different user-selected placement locations on the page. In some embodiments, the suggested applications widget serves the function of a mini application library and provides convenient opportunities for the user to discover a desired application icon from — among the currently displayed application icons in the suggested applications widget and select and drag a currently displayed application icon in the suggested applications widget to another location on the same page or a different page of the home screen user interface to add 20
[0053] [0053] On some computer systems, application icons on a home screen user interface may be arbitrarily arranged according to user’s inputs, or arranged in a fixed grid with a predetermined sequential order. As application icons are inserted into or deleted from a page of a home screen user interface, application icons are reflowed sequentially according to the predetermined sequential order. However, these reflow method does not take into account of the impact of having both application icons and user interface objects containing application content on the same page of the home screen user interface. If arbitrary positioning of objects are allowed, the page may quickly become disorganized and difficult to use when different sized objects (e.g., application icons and widgets) are moved around, added, and/or deleted. Such sequential reflow of objects that are all of the same size is not suitable for a page that includes objects of varying sizes, simply continuation of the same reflowing strategy will cause disorganization as well as erroneous end results in the layout of the pages. As disclosed herein, various rules for providing visual feedback and reflowing application icons and/or user interface objects containing application content (e.g., widgets) on one or more pages of a home screen user interface are introduced for use in various situations when application icons and/or user interface objects containing application content are inserted into, deleted from, and/or moved relative to the one or more pages. In some embodiments, rules are implemented to avoid one or more configurations of the page that are more likely to result in aggregation of alignment issues and/or more likely to contribute to disorganization of the pages and user confusion overtime. In some embodiments, rules are implemented to provide visual feedback (e.g. through automatic organization into blocks, reflowing and moving as blocks, etc.) about how a page will be organized if a user interface object containing application content is inserted into the page before the user input is ended and the user interface object containing application content is actually inserted into the page, and/or before the user input selects any — specific placement location for the user interface object containing application content on the page. In some embodiments, rules are implemented to provide visual feedback about a suitable and/or required placement location in a page, as soon as the user interface object containing application content is dragged onto the page, such that the user becomes aware of such recommendation or limitation for the placement location without having to make any unsuccessful attempts to drop the user interface object at unpermitted placement locations. These feature enhance the operability of the device (e.g., by providing suitable visual feedback and guidance to the user when the user provides input to reorganize the pages of the home screen user interface), and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by 22
[0054] [0054] On some computer systems, a widget can be added into a widget screen user interface from a user interface showing a listing of applications that have available widgets, or from a dedicated application for creating a particular type of customized widget (e.g., an application that creates a home screen widget for weather forecasting, an application that creates a widget for saving bookmarks, etc.). These methods do not provide a preview of multiple preconfigured widgets corresponding to different applications in the same user interface and does not provide easy means to access both the configuration options for modifying a preconfigured widget and inserting the widget as preconfigured to a user- selected location. As disclosed herein, a widget selection and configuration user interface displays a collection of preconfigured widgets from multiple applications. From the widget selection and configuration user interface, widget-specific configuration options for a preconfigured widget and/or widget stack can be accessed and the preconfigured widget and/or widget stack can be directly added to another user interface. As disclosed herein the widget selection and configuration user interface serves the function of a mini library of preconfigured widgets and/or widget stacks, but also allows access to widget-specific configuration options for preconfigured widgets and/or widget stacks. The widget selection and configuration user interface and the widget-specific configuration user interface optionally display the widgets with the currently selected configuration options, and real-time data from the widget(s) corresponding application(s). The widget selection and configuration user interface that serves the combined functions of allowing the user to view preconfigured widgets and providing access to configuration options for the widgets, as well as allowing the user to select and insert/move one or more widgets from the widget selection and configuration user interface or widget-specific configuration user interface to another user- selected location improves enhances the operability of the device (e.g., by making it easier to discover widgets and adding widgets to another location) and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which improves — battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently).
[0055] [0055] Below, Figures 1A-1C, 2, and 3 provide a description of example devices. Figures 4A-4B, and 5A1-5A36, 5B1-5B19, 5C1-5C73, 5D1-5D12, SE1-5E32, 5F1-5F30, 5G1-5G31, 5H1-5H76, and 511-5118 illustrate example user interfaces for displaying and interacting with user interface objects (e.g., application icons, mini-application objects, etc.) corresponding to different applications, example user interfaces for reconfiguring the multipage home screen user interface, example user interfaces for inserting a user interface object containing application content (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) into a page of a home screen user interface (e.g., a single page or multipage home screen user interface), example user interfaces for selection for display and updating user interface objects containing application content (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) that are associated with a placement location in a page of a home screen user interface (e.g., a single page or multipage home screen user interface), example user interfaces interacting with a plurality of user interface objects containing application content that is associated with a common placement location (e.g., a widget or mini application object stack, etc.), example — user interfaces for interacting with multiple pages of a home screen user interface (e.g., in an icon reconfiguration mode, in a page editing mode, and when transitioning between the two modes, etc.), example user interfaces for displaying and interacting with a user interface object that presents application icons that are automatically selected by a computer system at a user selected location, various ways that existing user interface objects corresponding to different applications (e.g., application icons, widgets, etc. of various sizes) on a page of a home screen user interface are moved and/or rearranged during a reconfiguration mode (e.g., in accordance with repositioning, deletion, addition, passing through, removal, etc. of one or more user interface objects corresponding to different applications), and example user interfaces for configuring user interface objects containing application content (e.g., widgets, mini application objects, etc.) and adding the same to another user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. Figures 6A-6K, 7A-7H, 8A-8M, 9A-9H, 10A-10H, 11A-11D, 12A- 12F, 13A-13H, and 14A-14G are flow diagrams of methods of displaying and interacting with user interface objects corresponding to different applications, of reconfiguring the multipage home screen user interface, of inserting a user interface object containing application content into a page of a home screen user interface, of selecting for display and updating user interface objects containing application content that are associated with a placement location in a page of a home screen user interface, interacting with a plurality of user interface objects containing application content that is associated with a common 24
[0056] [0056] Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the various described embodiments. However, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the various described embodiments is, optionally, practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments.
[0057] [0057] It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they — are not the same contact, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.
[0058] [0058] The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as — well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one 25
[0059] [0059] As used herein, the term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.
[0060] [0060] Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Example embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch-screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch- sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display and/or a touchpad).
[0061] [0061] In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a — physical keyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick.
[0062] [0062] The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video 26
[0063] [0063] The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch- sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.
[0064] [0064] Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch- sensitive displays. Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch- sensitive display system 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply called a touch-sensitive display. Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input/output (I/O) subsystem 106, other input or control devices 116, and external port 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensities of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.
[0065] [0065] As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a — center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user's sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user's hand), 27
[0066] [0066] In some embodiments, a tactile output pattern specifies characteristics of a tactile output, such as the amplitude of the tactile output, the shape of a movement waveform of the tactile output, the frequency of the tactile output, and/or the duration of the tactile output.
[0067] [0067] When tactile outputs with different tactile output patterns are generated by a device (e.g., via one or more tactile output generators that move a moveable mass to generate tactile outputs), the tactile outputs will, in some circumstances, invoke different haptic sensations in a user holding or touching the device. While the sensation of the user is based — on the user's perception of the tactile output, most users will be able to identify changes in waveform, frequency, and amplitude of tactile outputs generated by the device. Thus, the waveform, frequency and amplitude can be adjusted to indicate to the user that different 28
[0068] [0068] In some embodiments, a tactile output with a suitable tactile output pattern serves as a cue for the occurrence of an event of interest in a user interface or behind the scenes in a device. Examples of the events of interest include activation of an affordance (e.g., areal or virtual button, or toggle switch) provided on the device or in a user interface, success or failure of a requested operation, reaching or crossing a boundary in a user interface, entry into a new state, switching of input focus between objects, activation of a new — mode, reaching or crossing an input threshold, detection or recognition of a type of input or gesture, etc. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are provided to serve as a warning or an alert for an impending event or outcome that would occur unless a redirection or interruption input is timely detected. Tactile outputs are also used in other contexts to enrich the user experience, improve the accessibility of the device to users with visual or motor difficulties — or other accessibility needs, and/or improve efficiency and functionality of the user interface and/or the device. Tactile outputs are optionally accompanied with audio outputs and/or visible user interface changes, which further enhance a user's experience when the user interacts with a user interface and/or the device, and facilitate better conveyance of information regarding the state of the user interface and/or the device, and which reduce input errors and increase the efficiency of the user's operation of the device.
[0069] [0069] It should be appreciated that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than 29
[0070] [0070] Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory 102 by other components of device 100, such as CPU(s) 120 and the peripherals interface 118, is, optionally, controlled by memory controller 122.
[0071] [0071] Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s) 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 100 and to process data.
[0072] [0072] In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU(s) 120, and memory — controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.
[0073] [0073] RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM — Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA 30
[0074] [0074] Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111. Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 113 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, Figure 2). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
[0075] [0075] I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 and other input or control devices 116, with peripherals interface 118. I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156, optical sensor controller 158, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices 116. The — other input or control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of 31
[0076] [0076] Touch-sensitive display system 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch-sensitive display system 112. Touch-sensitive display system 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects. As used herein, the term "affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., a graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed toward the graphical user interface object). Examples of user-interactive graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button, slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, hyperlink, or — other user interface control.
[0077] [0077] Touch-sensitive display system 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch- sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch-sensitive display system 112 and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112. In some embodiments, a point of contact between touch-sensitive display system 112 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus.
[0079] [0079] Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater). The user optionally makes contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.
[0080] [0080] In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive display system 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
[0081] [0081] Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the various — components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light- emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.
[0082] [0082] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164. Figure 1A shows an optical sensor coupled with optical sensor controller 158 in I/O subsystem 106. Optical sensor(s) 164 optionally include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor(s) 164 receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor(s) 164 optionally capture still images and/or video. In some 33
[0083] [0083] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165. Figure 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled with intensity sensor controller 159 in /O subsystem 106. Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 receive contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch-screen display system 112 which is located on the front of device 100.
[0084] [0084] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166.
[0085] [0085] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167. Figure 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled with haptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, tactile output generator(s) 167 include one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive — polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Tactile output generator(s) 167 receive tactile feedback generation instructions from 34
[0086] [0086] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. Figure 1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled with peripherals interface 118. Alternately, accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled with an input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100.
[0087] [0087] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126, communication module (or set of instructions) 128, contact/motion — module (or set of instructions) 130, graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, haptic feedback module (or set of instructions) 133, text input module (or set of instructions) 134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136. Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 stores device/global internal state 157, as shown in Figures 1A and 3. Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch-sensitive display system 112; sensor state, including information obtained from the device’s various sensors and other input or control devices 116; and location and/or positional information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude.
[0088] [0088] Operating system 126 (e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software
[0089] [0089] Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external port 124. External port 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. In some embodiments, the external port is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
[0090] [0090] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to — multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., "multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.
[0091] [0091] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch- sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event.
[0092] [0092] In some embodiments, detecting a finger tap gesture depends on the length of time between detecting the finger-down event and the finger-up event, but is independent of the intensity of the finger contact between detecting the finger-down event and the finger-up event. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected in accordance with a determination that the length of time between the finger-down event and the finger-up event is less than a predetermined value (e.g., less than 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 or 0.5 seconds), independent of whether the intensity of the finger contact during the tap meets a given intensity threshold (greater than a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold), such as a light press or deep press — intensity threshold. Thus, a finger tap gesture can satisfy particular input criteria that do not require that the characteristic intensity of a contact satisfy a given intensity threshold in order for the particular input criteria to be met. For clarity, the finger contact in a tap gesture typically needs to satisfy a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold, below which the contact is not detected, in order for the finger-down event to be detected. A similar analysis — applies to detecting a tap gesture by a stylus or other contact. In cases where the device is capable of detecting a finger or stylus contact hovering over a touch sensitive surface, the nominal contact-detection intensity threshold optionally does not correspond to physical contact between the finger or stylus and the touch sensitive surface.
[0093] [0093] The same concepts apply in an analogous manner to other types of gestures.
[0096] [0096] In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156.
[0097] [0097] Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions (e.g., instructions used by haptic feedback controller 161) to produce tactile outputs using tactile output generator(s) 167 at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100.
[0098] [0098] Text input module 134, which is, optionally, a component of graphics module 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, e-mail 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application that needs text input).
[0099] [0099] GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing, to camera 143 as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location- — based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
[00100] [00100] Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof: . contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list); e< telephone module 138; o video conferencing module 139; . e-mail client module 140; . instant messaging (IM) module 141; o workout support module 142; 40
[00101] [00101] Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAV A-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
[00102] [00102] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, contacts module 137 includes executable instructions to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 138, video conference 139, e-mail 140, or IM 141; and so forth.
[00103] [00103] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephone module 138 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book 137, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies.
[00104] [00104] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contact list 137, and telephone module 138, videoconferencing module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.
[00105] [00105] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, e-mail client module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 144, e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143.
[00106] [00106] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of — characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, Apple Push Notification Service (APNs) or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both 42
[00107] [00107] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154, and video and music player module 152, workout support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data.
[00108] [00108] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete a still image or video from memory 102.
[00109] [00109] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.
[00110] [00110] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying — web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.
[00111] [00111] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated — with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions. 43
[00112] [00112] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget modules 149 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).
[00113] [00113] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, the widget creator module 150 includes executable instructions to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).
[00114] [00114] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.
[00115] [00115] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch- sensitive display system 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).
[00116] [00116] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, notes module 153 44
[00117] [00117] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, map module 154 includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.
[00118] [00118] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes executable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124), send an e-mail — with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, rather than e-mail client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video.
[00119] [00119] Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the — methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
[00120] [00120] In some embodiments, device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for — operation of device 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced. 45
[00121] [00121] The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100. In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.
[00122] [00122] Figure 1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (in Figures 1A) or 370 (Figure 3) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and a — respective application 136-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 136, 137-155, 380- 390).
[00123] [00123] Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes application internal state 192, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application — views 191 to which to deliver event information.
[00124] [00124] In some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go — back to a prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
[00125] [00125] Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch- sensitive display system 112, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166, accelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110). 46
[00126] [00126] In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripheral interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).
[00127] [00127] In some embodiments, event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173.
[00128] [00128] Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touch- sensitive display system 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.
[00129] [00129] Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.
[00130] [00130] Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy — which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub- events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
[00131] [00131] Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some 47
[00132] [00132] Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module 182.
[00133] [00133] In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter 170.
[00134] [00134] In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application’s user interface. Each application view 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, a respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176, object updater 177 or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state
[00135] [00135] A respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event sorter 170, and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).
[00136] [00136] Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a — touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.
[00137] [00137] Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186. Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187- — 2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event 187 include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch- sensitive display system 112, and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.
[00138] [00138] In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs 49
[00139] [00139] In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event 187 also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type.
[00140] [00140] When a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of sub- events do not match any of the events in event definitions 186, the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub- events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.
[00141] [00141] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata — 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.
[00142] [00142] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190. Activating an event handler 190 — is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some 50
[00143] [00143] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.
[00144] [00144] In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in — application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video and music player module 152. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touch- sensitive display.
[00145] [00145] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
[00146] [00146] It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 with input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.
[00147] [00147] Figure 1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, I/O subsystem 106 (e.g., haptic feedback 51
[00148] [00148] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes haptic feedback module 133. In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 aggregates and combines tactile outputs for user interface feedback from software applications on the electronic device (e.g., feedback that is responsive to user inputs that correspond to displayed user interfaces and alerts and other notifications that indicate the performance of operations or occurrence of events in user interfaces of the electronic device). Haptic feedback module 133 includes one or more of: waveform module 123 (for providing waveforms used for generating tactile outputs), mixer 125 (for mixing waveforms, such as waveforms in different channels), compressor 127 (for reducing or compressing a dynamic range of the waveforms), low-pass filter 129 (for filtering out high frequency signal components in the waveforms), and thermal controller 131 (for adjusting the waveforms in accordance with thermal conditions). In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 is included in haptic feedback controller 161 (Figure 1A). In some embodiments, a separate unit of haptic feedback module 133 (or a separate implementation of haptic feedback module 133) is also included in an audio controller (e.g., audio circuitry 110, Figure 1A) and used for generating audio signals. In some embodiments, a single haptic feedback module 133 is used for generating audio signals and generating waveforms for tactile outputs.
[00149] [00149] In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 also includes trigger module 121 (e.g., a software application, operating system, or other software module that determines a tactile output is to be generated and initiates the process for generating the corresponding tactile output). In some embodiments, trigger module 121 generates trigger — signals for initiating generation of waveforms (e.g., by waveform module 123). For example, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals based on preset timing criteria. In some embodiments, trigger module 121 receives trigger signals from outside haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., in some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 receives trigger signals from hardware input processing module 146 located outside haptic feedback module 133) and relays the trigger signals to other components within haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., waveform module 123) or software applications that trigger operations (e.g., with trigger module 121) based on activation of a user interface element (e.g., an application icon or an 52
[00150] [00150] Waveform module 123 receives trigger signals (e.g., from trigger module 121) as an input, and in response to receiving trigger signals, provides waveforms for generation of one or more tactile outputs (e.g., waveforms selected from a predefined set of waveforms designated for use by waveform module 123).
[00151] [00151] Mixer 125 receives waveforms (e.g., from waveform module 123) as an input, and mixes together the waveforms. For example, when mixer 125 receives two or more waveforms (e.g., a first waveform in a first channel and a second waveform that at least partially overlaps with the first waveform in a second channel) mixer 125 outputs a combined waveform that corresponds to a sum of the two or more waveforms. In some embodiments, mixer 125 also modifies one or more waveforms of the two or more waveforms to emphasize particular waveform(s) over the rest of the two or more waveforms (e.g., by increasing a scale of the particular waveform(s) and/or decreasing a scale of the rest of the waveforms). In some circumstances, mixer 125 selects one or more waveforms to remove from the combined waveform (e.g., the waveform from the oldest source is dropped when there are waveforms from more than three sources that have been requested to be output concurrently by tactile output generator 167).
[00152] [00152] Compressor 127 receives waveforms (e.g., a combined waveform from mixer 125) as an input, and modifies the waveforms. In some embodiments, compressor 127 reduces the waveforms (e.g., in accordance with physical specifications of tactile output generators 167 (Figure 1A) or 357 (Figure 3)) so that tactile outputs corresponding to the waveforms are reduced. In some embodiments, compressor 127 limits the waveforms, such as by enforcing a predefined maximum amplitude for the waveforms. For example, compressor 127 reduces amplitudes of portions of waveforms that exceed a predefined amplitude threshold while maintaining amplitudes of portions of waveforms that do not exceed the predefined amplitude threshold. In some embodiments, compressor 127 reduces a 53
[00153] [00153] Low-pass filter 129 receives waveforms (e.g., compressed waveforms from compressor 127) as an input, and filters (e.g., smooths) the waveforms (e.g., removes or reduces high frequency signal components in the waveforms). For example, in some instances, compressor 127 includes, in compressed waveforms, extraneous signals (e.g., high frequency signal components) that interfere with the generation of tactile outputs and/or exceed performance specifications of tactile output generator 167 when the tactile outputs are generated in accordance with the compressed waveforms. Low-pass filter 129 reduces or removes such extraneous signals in the waveforms.
[00154] [00154] Thermal controller 131 receives waveforms (e.g., filtered waveforms from low-pass filter 129) as an input, and adjusts the waveforms in accordance with thermal conditions of device 100 (e.g., based on internal temperatures detected within device 100, such as the temperature of haptic feedback controller 161, and/or external temperatures detected by device 100). For example, in some cases, the output of haptic feedback controller 161 varies depending on the temperature (e.g. haptic feedback controller 161, in response to receiving same waveforms, generates a first tactile output when haptic feedback controller 161 is at a first temperature and generates a second tactile output when haptic feedback controller 161 is at a second temperature that is distinct from the first temperature). For example, the magnitude (or the amplitude) of the tactile outputs may vary depending on the temperature. To reduce the effect of the temperature variations, the waveforms are modified (e.g., an amplitude of the waveforms is increased or decreased based on the temperature).
[00155] [00155] In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., trigger module 121) is coupled to hardware input processing module 146. In some embodiments, other input controller(s) 160 in Figure 1A includes hardware input processing module 146. In some embodiments, hardware input processing module 146 receives inputs from hardware input device 145 (e.g., other input or control devices 116 in Figure 1A, such as a home button or an — intensity-sensitive input surface, such as an intensity-sensitive touch screen). In some embodiments, hardware input device 145 is any input device described herein, such as touch- sensitive display system 112 (Figure 1A), keyboard/mouse 350 (Figure 3), touchpad 355 54
[00156] [00156] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes haptic feedback controller 161 (e.g., haptic feedback controller 161 in Figure 1A), which controls the — generation of tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 is coupled to a plurality of tactile output generators, and selects one or more tactile output generators of the plurality of tactile output generators and sends waveforms to the selected one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 coordinates tactile output requests that correspond to activation of hardware input device 145 and tactile output requests that correspond to software events (e.g., tactile output requests from haptic feedback module 133) and modifies one or more waveforms of the two or more waveforms to emphasize particular waveform(s) over the rest of the two or more waveforms (e.g., by increasing a scale of the particular waveform(s) and/or decreasing a scale of the rest of the waveforms, such as to prioritize tactile outputs that correspond to activations of hardware input device 145 over tactile outputs that correspond to software events).
[00157] [00157] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 1C, an output of haptic feedback controller 161 is coupled to audio circuitry of device 100 (e.g., audio circuitry 110, Figure 1A), and provides audio signals to audio circuitry of device 100. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 provides both waveforms used for generating tactile outputs and audio signals used for providing audio outputs in conjunction with generation of the tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 modifies audio signals 55
[00158] [00158] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes amplifier 163. In some embodiments, amplifier 163 receives waveforms (e.g., from haptic feedback controller 161) and amplifies the waveforms prior to sending the amplified waveforms to tactile output generator 167 (e.g., any of tactile output generators 167 (Figure 1A) or 357 (Figure 3)). For — example, amplifier 163 amplifies the received waveforms to signal levels that are in accordance with physical specifications of tactile output generator 167 (e.g., to a voltage and/or a current required by tactile output generator 167 for generating tactile outputs so that the signals sent to tactile output generator 167 produce tactile outputs that correspond to the waveforms received from haptic feedback controller 161) and sends the amplified waveforms to tactile output generator 167. In response, tactile output generator 167 generates tactile outputs (e.g., by shifting a moveable mass back and forth in one or more dimensions relative to a neutral position of the moveable mass).
[00159] [00159] In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes sensor 169, which is coupled to tactile output generator 167. Sensor 169 detects states or state changes (e.g., mechanical position, physical displacement, and/or movement) of tactile output generator 167 or one or more components of tactile output generator 167 (e.g., one or more moving parts, such as a membrane, used to generate tactile outputs). In some embodiments, sensor 169 is a magnetic field sensor (e.g., a Hall effect sensor) or other displacement and/or movement sensor. In some embodiments, sensor 169 provides information (e.g., a position, a displacement, and/or a movement of one or more parts in tactile output generator 167) to haptic feedback controller 161 and, in accordance with the information provided by sensor 169 about the state of tactile output generator 167, haptic feedback controller 161 adjusts the waveforms output from haptic feedback controller 161 (e.g., waveforms sent to tactile output generator 167, optionally via amplifier 163).
[00160] [00160] Figure 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure 1A) in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200. In 56
[00161] [00161] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 204. As described previously, menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally executed on device
[00162] [00162] In some embodiments, device 100 includes the touch-screen display, menu button 204 (sometimes called home button 204), push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208, Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot 210, head set jack 212, and docking/charging external port 124. Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In some embodiments, — device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113. Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensities of contacts on touch-sensitive display system 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100.
[00163] [00163] Figure 3 is a block diagram of an example multifunction device with a display — and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a 57
[00164] [00164] Each of the above identified elements in Figure 3 are, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above identified modules or programs (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as — separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures 58
[00165] [00165] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces ("UI") that are, optionally, implemented on portable multifunction device 100.
[00166] [00166] Figure 4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof: o Signal strength indicator(s) for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals; . Time; . a Bluetooth indicator; . a Battery status indicator; o Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as: o Icon 416 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 418 for e-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread e-mails; o Icon 420 for browser module 147, labeled "Browser;” and o Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, labeled "Music;” and . Icons for other applications, such as: o Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled “Messages;” o Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;” o Icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled "Camera;” o Icon 432 for online video module 155, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled "Stocks;” 59
[00167] [00167] It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in Figure 4A are merely examples. For example, other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In — some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.
[00168] [00168] Figure 4B illustrates an example user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g, a tablet or touchpad 355, Figure 3) that is separate from the display 450. Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 357) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 359 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.
[00169] [00169] Although many of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in Figure 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in Figure 4B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in Figure 4B) on the display (e.g., 450). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in Figure 4B) with the touch- sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in Figure 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch- — sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in Figure 4B) are used by the device to manipulate the user 60
[00170] [00170] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or a stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.
[00171] [00171] As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in Figure 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in Figure 4B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch-screen display (e.g., touch- sensitive display system 112 in Figure 1A or the touch screen in Figure 4A) that enables — direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch-screen display, a detected contact on the touch-screen acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch-screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, — focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another 61
[00172] [00172] As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has arange of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch- sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is — described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity 62
[00173] [00173] In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of alarge range of predefined thresholds values without changing the trackpad or touch-screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter). — [00174] As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent 63
[00175] [00175] In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface optionally receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end — location (e.g., a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is, in some circumstances, based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is, optionally, applied to the intensities of the swipe — contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
[00176] [00176] The user interface figures described herein optionally include various intensity diagrams (e.g., 5530) that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive 64
[00177] [00177] In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during the input. For example, for some “light press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both the contact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some "deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a second intensity threshold during the input, greater than the first intensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response only if a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold. This delay time is typically less than 200 ms (milliseconds) in duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps to avoid accidental recognition of deep press inputs. As another example, for some “deep press” inputs, there is a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity 65
[00178] [00178] In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, such as user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running, rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Example factors are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.
[00179] [00179] For example, Figure 4C illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold 480 that changes over time based in part on the intensity of touch input 476 over time. Dynamic intensity threshold 480 is a sum of two components, first component 474 that decays over time after a predefined delay time pl from when touch input 476 is initially detected, and second component 478 that trails the intensity of touch input 476 over time. The initial high intensity threshold of first component 474 reduces accidental triggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate "deep press” response if touch input 476 provides sufficient intensity. Second component 478 reduces unintentional triggering of a "deep press” response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input. In some embodiments, when touch input 476 satisfies dynamic intensity threshold 480 (e.g., at point 481 in Figure 4C), the “deep press” response is triggered.
[00180] [00180] Figure 4D illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold 486 (e.g., intensity threshold Ip). Figure 4D also illustrates two other intensity thresholds: a first intensity threshold ITy and a second intensity threshold IL. In Figure 4D, although touch input 484 satisfies the first intensity threshold ITu and the second intensity threshold IT, prior to time p2, no response is provided until delay time p2 has elapsed at time 482. Also in Figure 4D, dynamic intensity threshold 486 decays over time, with the decay starting at time 488 after a predefined delay time pl has elapsed from time 482 (when the response associated with the second intensity threshold ITi was triggered). This type of dynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a response associated with the dynamic intensity threshold ITp immediately after, or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold ITu or the second intensity threshold IL.
[00181] [00181] Figure 4E illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold 492 (e.g., intensity threshold Ip). In Figure 4E, a response associated with the intensity threshold IT, is triggered after the delay time p2 has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected. Concurrently, dynamic intensity threshold 492 decays after the predefined delay time pl has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected. So a decrease in intensity of touch input 490 after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold Ir, followed by an increase in the intensity of touch input 490, without releasing touch input 490, can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold ITp (e.g., at time 494) even when the intensity of touch input 490 is below another intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold IL.
[00182] [00182] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold ITL to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold IT; and the deep press intensity threshold ITp is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold ITp to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold ITp is sometimes referred to as a "deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold ITo to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold IT and the light press intensity threshold IT, is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold ITo to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold ITo is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments ITo is zero. In some embodiments, ITo is greater than zero. In some illustrations a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In — some illustrations, a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact.
[00183] [00183] In some embodiments, described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of — contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to 67
[00184] [00184] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).
[00185] [00185] For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input 68
[00186] [00186] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that are, optionally, implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100 or device 300, with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and (optionally) one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
[00187] [00187] Figures SA1-5A36 illustrate example user interfaces for displaying and interacting with user interface objects corresponding to different applications in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 6A-6K. For convenience of — explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112. However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display 450 and a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display 450, along with a focus selector.
[00188] [00188] For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed — with reference to operations performed on a device without a home button, and a gesture meeting predefined criteria is used to cause dismissal of a currently displayed user interface 69
[00189] [00189] Figures SA1-5A36 illustrate example user interfaces for displaying and interacting with user interface objects corresponding to different applications on a multipage home screen user interface (e.g., including two or more user-arranged home screens and a system-arranged home screen arranged in a predefined sequence in a first page navigation — direction (e.g., from left to right)), in accordance with some embodiments. The user interface objects corresponding to different applications include application icons and optionally user interface objects including application content from respective applications (e.g., widgets, mini application objects, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, both the application icons and the user interface objects including application content are configured to launch their corresponding applications when activated by a first type of input (e.g., a tap input at a location of the application icon or user interface object containing application content). In some embodiments, user interface object including application content is updated (e.g., by the operating system or by the applications) according to content and/or instructions provided their corresponding applications, while the applications remain dormant or operating in the background.
[00190] [00190] Figures SA1-5A4 illustrate examples of navigating between different home screen user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00191] [00191] Figure SA1 shows a first user-arranged page 5050 of a multipage home screen user interface (also referred to as "user-arranged home screen 5050). The user-arranged home screen 5050 includes a plurality of application icons (application icons 5008a-5008m) arranged in a preset layout (e.g., on a 5x4 grid). In some embodiments, the plurality of application icons is user-selected and are placed at respective positions on the user-arranged home screen 5050 in accordance with user inputs. In some embodiments, the user-arranged home screen 5050 includes page navigation element 5004 indicating both the total number of pages in the multipage home screen user interface, the position of the currently displayed page in the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface. For example, as shown in Figure 5A1, navigation element 5004 includes a sequence of page dots or page 70
[00192] [00192] Figures SA1-5A3 shows navigation from the user-arranged page 5050 to another user-arranged page 5052 in a first navigation direction (e.g., a forward direction through the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface) specified by a navigation input (e.g., a leftward swipe gesture on the user-arranged page 5050, a tap input on the page indicator icon 5004b for the user-arranged page 5052, etc.). Figure SA1 shows a 71
[00193] [00193] In Figure 5A2, the user-arranged page 5050 of the multipage home screen user interface, including application icons 5008a-5008m and other concurrently displayed user interface elements, are shown moving in accordance with the movement of contact 5502 to 72
[00194] [00194] In Figure 5A3, the next user-arranged page 5052 of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., previously undisplayed user-arranged home screen 5052) is displayed as a result of the swipe input by contact 5502, replacing the previously-displayed user-arranged page 5050. User-arranged page 5052 of the multipage home screen user interface includes an additional plurality of application icons 5008r-5008w (e.g., a different set of user-selected — application icons from the plurality of application icons on the user-arranged page 5050). In Figure 5A3, as a result of changing the displayed user-arranged home screen, navigation element 5004 is updated with page indicator icon 5004a de-highlighted and page indicator icon 5004b highlighted.
[00195] [00195] Figure 5A4 follows Figure 5A3. Figures 5A3-5A4 illustrate continued navigation from the user-arranged page 5052 to a system-arranged user interface (e.g., a system-arranged home screen 5054, or another user interface that includes automatically generated application groupings, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00196] [00196] Similar to Figure 5A1, Figure 5A3 shows a leftward swipe input by contact
[00197] [00197] Figure 5A4 shows the system-arranged home screen 5054 of the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. The system-arranged — home screen 5054 differs from user-arranged home screen 5050 and 5052 in that system- arranged home screen 5054 has a layout (e.g., positions and grouping) for application icons and user interface objects containing application content that is automatically generated without user input, whereas user-arranged home screen 5052 and 5050 have layouts (e.g., positions and grouping) for application icons and user interface objects containing application — content that are user-configured. In some embodiments, the device generates the system- arranged home screen 5054 by assigning (e.g., categorizing, clustering, grouping, etc.) application icons that share one or more characteristics under the same automatically generate application grouping. For example, Figure 5A4 shows that system-arranged home screen 5054 includes an application grouping corresponding to “communication” (e.g., represented by grouping icon 5020a), an application grouping corresponding to “recently added” (e.g., represented by grouping icon 5020b), an application grouping corresponding to “utilities” (e.g., represented by grouping icon 5020c), and an application grouping corresponding to “productivity” (e.g., represented by grouping icon 5020d), etc. In some embodiments, the same application icon may be included in more than one application groupings. For example, application icon 50080 (representing an “email” application) is included in the application groupings corresponding to grouping icons 5020a, 5020b, and 5020c. In some embodiments, the “recently added” application grouping represented by grouping icon 5020b includes 74
[00198] [00198] In some embodiments, search input area 5030 is displayed at the top of — system-arranged home screen 5054. The search input area 5030 can be used to search applications and optionally widgets available on the device (e.g., available on the user- arranged pages of the multipage home screen user interface). In some embodiments, the search input area 5030 displayed on the system-arranged home screen automatically applies a filter than only applications and optionally widgets that meet the search criteria received via — the search input area will be returned as search results. In some embodiments, the search is performed on applications and optionally widgets that are currently installed on the device (e.g., not including deleted applications and widgets, or applications that are available in the app stores but not installed). In some embodiments, the search is performed on applications and optionally widgets that are installed regardless of whether they are currently available via — a visible user-arranged home screen of the home screen user interface (e.g., including applications and optionally widgets that are on hidden pages or previously deleted pages of the multipage home screen user interface, as well as applications and optionally widgets that are on visible pages of the multipage home screen user interface). In some embodiments, a corresponding search input area is available on the beginning page of the multipage home — screen user interface which is a widget screen displaying a listing of widgets corresponding to different applications installed on the device. In some embodiments, the search input area available on the widget screen returns search results that include applications and optionally widgets, as well as other types of information, such as content from installed applications (e.g., messages, emails, contacts, logs, game history, webpages, photos, etc.). In some embodiments, a corresponding search input area is optionally made available on multiple (e.g., some, all, each, etc.) of the user-arranged pages of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., in response to a downward swipe detected on the page (e.g., a downward swipe from the top edge of the user interface, or from any area within the user interface, etc.)). In some embodiments, the search input area on a user-arranged page has the same — function as that on the system-arranged page of the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, the search input area on a user-arranged page has the same function as 75
[00199] [00199] In some embodiments, the system-arranged home screen 5054 optionally includes one or more widgets (e.g., widgets 5022a and 5022b) (e.g., also referred to as user interface objects including application content, or mini application object) (e.g., including widgets that are also available on the user-arranged home screens, and optionally widgets that are automatically selected by the system). Unlike an application icon, a widget is a mini- application object that displays information or provide a function of a corresponding application without requiring the application itself to be displayed. For example, system- arranged home screen 5054 includes widget 5022a for a weather application that displays weather information for a selected city and widget 5022b for a clock application that shows time information around the globe (e.g., time information for multiple locations around the globe). In some embodiments, the system-arranged home screen 5054 includes a recommended applications widget 5055 that displays respective application icons for a plurality of recommended applications that are automatically identified from the applications installed on the device based on the user’s individual usage patterns, and optionally, average usage patterns of a large number of users.
[00200] [00200] Figure 5A4 shows various contacts and touch inputs that are detected on the system-arranged home screen 5054 in different example scenarios, including a swipe input by contact 5508, respective tap inputs by contacts 5110, 5112, and 5114. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a contact on the touch-screen 112, the device determines the type of the input, the starting location of the input, the movement direction and movement distance of the input (if any), current location and movement characteristics of the input, and/or the termination of the input, etc., and based on the type, location, movement direction, movement distance, termination state, etc., performs a corresponding operation.
[00201] [00201] Figures SA4-5A6 illustrate an example of navigating the system-arranged home screen 5054 in response to a swipe input, in accordance with some embodiments. For example, in response to the upward swipe input by contact 5508 (e.g., starting on an application icon or on an unoccupied area of the home screen), the system-arranged home screen 5054 or portions thereof are scrolled upward to show previously-undisplayed portions of the system-arranged home screen 5054. For example, in Figure SAS, the application groupings represented by grouping icons 5020a-5020d are moved upwards in accordance 76
[00202] [00202] In Figure 5A4, a respective grouping icon includes a plurality of distinct — portions, including a plurality of portions occupied by application icons (or reduced scale versions thereof) for a subset of applications including in the automatically-generated grouping represented by the grouping icon, and optionally a folder launch icon that corresponds to the folder containing the application icons of the applications included in the grouping. In some embodiments, only a limited number of applications (e.g., three) included in the grouping have their application icons shown on the grouping icon. In some embodiments, the folder launch icon includes miniature images of application icons for applications included in the grouping represented by the grouping icon. For example, the grouping icon 5020a for the “communication” grouping includes application icons for the telephony application, the email application, and the messaging application that are included in the “communication” grouping. In some embodiments, the “communication” grouping include additional applications that are not represented by their application icons on the grouping icon 5020a. In some embodiments, the applications that are represented by their application icons on the grouping icon are automatically selected by the system without user input based on various criteria, such as usage frequency, recency, whether the application requests user attention (e.g., badged, has unread notification, etc.), etc. The folder launch icon 5014a on the grouping icon 5020a shows miniature images of application icons for seven applications that are currently included in the “communication” grouping. In some 77
[00203] [00203] Figures SA4 and 5A7-5A9 illustrate examples of navigating from the system- arranged home screen 5054 in response to user tap inputs on the application icons and folder launch icon shown on a grouping icon, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00204] [00204] Figure 5A7 following Figure 5A4 illustrates that, in response to a tap input by contact 5510 at a location on the system-arranged home screen 5054 that corresponds to application icon 5008a (or a reduced scale version thereof) shown on the grouping icon 5020a (shown in Figure 5A4), the device 100 launches the application (e.g., message application) corresponding to the application icon 5020a and displays application user interface 5056 corresponding to the selected application in Figure SA7. In Figure 5A7, message application also includes virtual keyboard 5042 at the bottom of application user interface 5056. In Figure 5A7, upon detecting a home gesture or input (e.g., an upward edge swipe input by contact 5516 (e.g., swiping upward from a bottom edge region of the display)), the device returns to displaying the system-arranged home screen 5054 (e.g., as shown in Figure 5A4) (e.g., exiting message application and dismissing application user interface 5056). Similarly, in Figure 5SA8 following Figure 5A4, in response to another tap input by contact 5512 that is detected at the location corresponding to application icon 50080 inside grouping icon 5020a as shown in Figure 5A4, a different application (e.g., email application) is launched and the device displays application user interface 5058 corresponding to the selected application in Figure 5A8. In Figure SAS, upon detecting an upward edge swipe input by contact 5518, the device returns to displaying the system-arranged home screen 5054.
[00205] [00205] Figure 5A9 following Figure 5A4 illustrates that, in response to another tap input by contact 5514 that is detected at the location corresponding to the folder launch icon 5014a on the grouping icon 5020a, a folder window 5080, corresponding to grouping 5020a, is displayed overlaying a background user interface 5054’ (e.g., blurred and darkened system- arranged home screen 5054). The folder window 5080 shows application icons and related widgets (e.g., 'mCall” widget 5022c corresponding to phone application) for multiple (e.g., all, some, etc.) applications belonging to the application grouping 5020a. In some 78
[00206] [00206] A number of tap inputs by various contacts in different scenarios are shown in Figure 5A9. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a tap input by contact 5526 at any location in user interface 5054” outside of pop-up window 5080, the device returns to displaying system-arranged home screen 5054 (e.g., Figure SA4 or Figure SA10). In some embodiments, in response to detecting a tap by contact 5520 at the location corresponding to application icon 50080 inside the folder window 5080, the corresponding application (e.g., message application) is launched and the device displays application user interface 5056 corresponding to the selected application (e.g., as shown in Figure SA7). In some embodiments, in response to a tap input by contact 5522 that is detected at the location corresponding to application icon 50080 inside the folder window 5080, a different application (e.g., email application) is launched and the device displays application user interface 5058 corresponding to the selected application (e.g., as shown in Figure SAS). In some embodiments, in response to a tap input by contact 5524 that is detected at the location corresponding to avatar "Neil" corresponding to a user contact inside ‘mCall’ widget 5022c, device performs a function of the application “mCall” to place a call to user contact ‘Neil’ using phone application "mCall”. In some embodiments, other operations that can be triggered through interactions with an application icon on a user-arranged home screen can also be triggered through the same interaction with the application icon when the application icon is shown on the system-arranged home screen, such as displaying a quick action menu, triggering an icon reconfiguration mode, deleting a corresponding application, moving the application icon to a different location on the user-arranged home screen after icon reconfiguration mode is started, etc.
[00207] [00207] Figures SA10-5A14 illustrate examples of performing a search in response to user input in the search input area 5030, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00208] [00208] In Figure 5A 10, a tap input by contact 5528 is detected on the search input area 5030 at the top of the system-arranged home screen 5054. In response to the tap input by contact 5528, system-arranged home screen 5054 transitions to user interface 50547” with search filter selector 5032 displayed below the search input area 5030, and virtual keyboard 5042 appearing at the bottom of user interface 5054”, as shown in Figure SA11. Search filter 79
[00209] [00209] In Figure 5A12, the user typed in a search keyword “ca” in the search input area 5030 with the “badged” filter being enabled. In response to detecting the search input, application icons for applications that match the search keyword “ca” (e.g., phone application (with “missed calls information”), calendar application, and “Cal Today” news application) and that have unread notifications (e.g., having application icons that are badged) as indicated by badges 5010a-c are returned and displayed in user interface 5054” in Figure SA12. In some embodiments, only application icons (and, optionally widgets) are returned in response to a search input (e.g., search results are user interface objects that may be repositioned in multipage home screen user interface in an icon reconfiguration mode).
[00210] [00210] In Figure SA12, in response to a tap input by contact 5530 to change search condition from "badged” to “all,” the search result is updated with application icons for a more comprehensive sets (e.g., all, substantially all, etc.) of applications (e.g., limited to — currently installed applications, or applications ever installed on the device (e.g., including the applications on hidden pages of the home screen user interface, and/or previously deleted applications, etc.), etc.) that match the search keyword "ca,” regardless of unread notifications, are returned and displayed in user interface 5054” in Figure 5A13. In some embodiments, widgets for relevant applications (e.g., widget 5022c for the mCall application) — are displayed as search results as well.
[00211] [00211] In some embodiments, the application icons and optionally widgets returned in the search results have the same functions as the applications displayed on the user-arranged pages of the home screen user interface. For example, In Figure 5A13, a contact 5532 is detected at the location that corresponds to application icon 5008n. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that liftoff of contact 5532 is detected within a first threshold amount of time (e.g., the required amount of time for detecting a touch-hold input), without detecting substantial movement of contact 5532 (e.g., contact is substantially stationary) since touch-down of the contact, the device launches a corresponding telephony application and displays an application user interface of the corresponding telephony application. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that liftoff of contact 5532 is detected within a second threshold amount of time (e.g., the required amount of time for detecting a tap and hold input), without detecting substantial movement of contact 5532 80
[00212] [00212] Figure 5A 14 shows both a tap input by contact 5534 and, alternatively, a drag input by contact 5536 at a location of an application icon on the search result user interface 5060 in the icon reconfiguration mode. In response to the tap input by contact 5534 at a — location corresponding to deletion affordance for application icon 5008w (e.g., delete badge 5012e), the device removes application icon 5008w from user interface 5060 (e.g., deletes the “calculator” application associated with application icon 5008w from the search results and from the device (e.g., from the user-arranged home screens and the system-arranged home screen)), as shown in Figure SA19. In some embodiments, in response to the tap input by contact 5540 on the cancel button, the device redisplays the system-arranged home screen
[00213] [00213] In Figure SA15, in response to the drag input by contact 5536 shown in Figure SA14, home screen user interface 5052” (e.g., the former user-arranged home screen interface where application icon 5008w was located, or the adjacent home screen of the system- arranged home screen), including application icons 5008r-5008v and other concurrently displayed user interface elements, is displayed in the icon reconfiguration mode. Page indicator icon 5004b corresponding to page 5052 is highlighted in the page navigation 81
[00214] [00214] As shown in Figure 5A17, the drag input by contact 5536 terminates (e.g., via liftoff) and application icon 5008w is dropped into user-arranged home screen 5050” in the first reconfiguration mode. Also shown in Figure 5SA17, upon detecting an upward edge swipe input by contact 5538 (or a tap input in an unoccupied area of the user-arranged page 50507), the device terminates the first reconfiguration mode and user-arranged home screen 5050 is displayed, as illustrated by Figure SA18.
[00215] [00215] Figure 5A19-5A20 illustrate an example of exiting first reconfiguration mode, in accordance with some embodiments. In Figure SA19, a tap input by contact 5540 is received at the location that corresponds to an option for exiting the search result user interface 5060 in first reconfiguration mode (e.g., the ‘cancel’ option). In response to a tap input by contact 5540 at ‘cancel’ the device exits the search result user interface 5060 and returns to the system-arranged home screen 5054 in the normal operation mode, as shown in Figure 5A20. In some embodiments, the system-arranged home screen 5054 is redisplayed in normal operation mode, irrespective of whether icon reconfiguration mode was triggered before the cancel button is selected, and irrespective of whether an application icon has been — deleted from the search result user interface 5060 or 5054”.
[00216] [00216] Figures SA21-5A36 illustrate an example where the widget screen and the system-arranged page of the multipage home screen user interface are not represented as pages in the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface, but are instead user interfaces that are respectively displayed overlaying the beginning page and ending page of the sequence of user-arranged pages of the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, when the system-arranged page is not one of the sequence of pages represented 82
[00217] [00217] As shown in Figure 5A21, the multipage home screen user interface includes four user-arranged pages represented by the four page indicator icons 5004a-5004b and 5004d-5004e¢ in the page navigation element 5004. The currently displayed page is user- arranged page 5064 which is the beginning page of the sequence of user-arranged pages in the multipage home screen user interface. In Figures SA21 through Figure 5A23, in response to a rightward swipe input by contact 5531 (e.g., specifying a navigation direction from the end page to the beginning page through the sequence of pages (e.g., a leftward navigation direction through the pages)), the widget screen user interface 5053 slides over the user- arranged home screen 5064, as user-arranged home screen recedes from the user and becomes darkened and blurred behind the widget screen user interface 5053. In some embodiments, the widget screen user interface 5053 includes a plurality of user-selected widgets 5022 that are optionally sorted according to system-determined relevant metrics (e.g., messages widget 5022f, weather widget 5022a, map widget 5022d, and calendar widget 5022e). In some embodiments, various widgets of different sizes, as well as various widgets of different applications are included in the widget screen (e.g., widgets 5022e and 5022f are 2x2 sized, while widgets 5022a and 5022d are 2x4 sized). In some embodiments, the widget screen user interface 5053 also includes a recommended applications widgets that displays application icons for a plurality of applications that are automatically selected by the device in accordance with various recommendation criteria (e.g., individual usage patterns, averaged usage patterns across a large number of users, recent usage behavior, long term usage behavior, etc.). In Figures 5A24-5A26, in response to a leftward swipe input by contact 5529 (e.g., specifying a navigation direction from the beginning page to the end page through the sequence of pages (e.g., a rightward navigation direction through the pages)), the widget screen user interface 5053 slides away from the user-arranged home screen 5064, and user- arranged home screen 5064 is restored to the foreground of the display (as shown in Figure 5A26).
[00218] [00218] Figures 5A26-5A32 shows a swipe input by contact 5527 across different portions of the page navigation element 5004 in a rightward navigation direction through the pages of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., a direction from the beginning page to the end page of the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface). In 83
[00219] [00219] In Figure 5A32, a page navigation input by contact 5523 (e.g., a leftward swipe input anywhere on the user-arranged page 5052) is detected on the user-arranged home screen 5052 which is currently the last page in the sequence of pages of the multipage home — screen user interface. The page navigation input specifies a rightward navigation direction through the pages when the last user-arranged page of the multipage home screen user interface has been reached. In Figures SA33-5A34, in response to the navigation input by contact 5523, the application library user interface 5054” slides onto the display from the right edge of the display, where the last user-arranged page 5052 recedes from the user and > becomes a blurred and/or darkened background for the application library user interface 5054”.
[00220] [00220] In Figures 5A35-5A36, another page navigation input by contact 5521 (e.g., a rightward swipe input anywhere on the application library user interface 5054”) is detected on the application library user interface 5054”. The page navigation input specifies a leftward navigation direction through the pages of the multipage home screen user interface. In response to the navigation input by contact 5521, the application library user interface 5054” 84
[00221] [00221] Figures 5B1-5B19 illustrate example user interfaces for reconfiguring and interacting with the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00222] [00222] Figures 5B1-5B6 illustrate example user interfaces for configuring and interacting with the multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode), in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 5B1 shows a user-arranged page 5050 of the multipage home screen user interface including a plurality of application icons (e.g., application icons 5008a-5008m) and a plurality of preconfigured application icons (application icons 5008n-5008q) at the bottom of user-arranged home screen 5050. Page navigation element 5004 is displayed on the user-arranged home screen 5050 with page indicator icon 5004a highlighted, indicating that the user-arranged home screen 5050 is the third page in a sequence of five pages of the multipage home screen user interface. In this illustrative example, the widget screen and the system-arranged home screen are not included in the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface, but are displayed as overlays respectively over the beginning and end pages of the sequence of user- arranged pages of the multipage home screen user interface, and therefore are not represented in the page navigation element 5004. In some embodiments, when a system-arranged page of — the home screen user interface is not included in the sequence of pages represented by the page indicator icons in the page navigation element, the system-arranged page is also referred to as the application library user interface (e.g., application library user interface 5054”). In some embodiments, whether or not the system-arranged page is represented by a page indicator icon in the page navigation element of the sequence of pages of the multipage home — screen user interface, it is accessible by an input that specifies a navigation direction that is the same as a navigation direction through the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, a swipe input in another direction (e.g., downward edge swipe on a left corner of a user-arranged home screen) optionally also causes the application library user interface to be displayed overlaying any of the user-arranged — home screens. In some embodiments, the example illustrated here is not limited to embodiments where the system-arranged home screen or application library are represented 85
[00223] [00223] In Figure 5B1, detection of a number of inputs by various contacts in various scenarios are shown, the inputs individually meet the requirement to trigger the first reconfiguration mode, in some embodiments. When a contact is detected, the device evaluates the input against various criteria to determine which operation, if any, should be performed. As shown in Figures 5B1-5B2, in response to a touch-hold and drag input by a contact 5542 detected at a location on the touch-screen that corresponds to application icon 5008a, the device enters the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode). In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5B3 following Figure 5B1, a longer touch-hold input without movement by a contact 5541 that is detected on another application icon 5008k (or any application icon (e.g., application icon 50082), or widget displayed on the user-arranged home screen 5050) also triggers the first reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, as shown in Figures 5B3 following Figure 5B1, a touch-hold input by a contact 5543 that is detected on an unoccupied area of the user-arranged home screen 5050 and that meets a shorter time threshold than the touch-hold input detected on the application icon 5008a also triggers the first reconfiguration mode. Figures 5B2-5B3 illustrate that in response to entering the first reconfiguration mode, the device optionally generates a non-visual output (e.g., tactile output 5092) and provides visual feedback (e.g., animates the application icons in — home screen 5050”) to indicate that a user interface reconfiguration mode (e.g., the first reconfiguration mode) is activated.
[00224] [00224] Figures 5B4-5B5 illustrate that, in the first reconfiguration mode, the user can drag a target (e.g., selected) application icon to reposition it in the multipage home screen user interface, e.g., by dropping it onto a different location on the currently displayed page, or navigating to a different page and dropping it onto a desired location on the newly displayed page. For example, in Figure 5B4-5B5, application icon 5008a is dragged to a different location by a drag input provided by a contact 5544 (or a continuation of the drag input by contact 5442) in the user-arranged home screen 5050’. Other application icons on the home screen 5050” automatically shift and move into the position vacated by application icon 5008a, or make room to accommodate the application icon 5008a at the drop location. When a termination of the input is detected (e.g., liftoff of contact 5544 is detected), application icon 5008a is inserted into the nearest insertion location in the user-arranged home screen 86
[00225] [00225] In some embodiments, upon entering the first reconfiguration mode, the page navigation element 5004 changes its appearance (e.g., become highlighted or replaced with another affordance in the same location, to indicate that additional home screen reconfiguration (e.g., second reconfiguration mode) is available by tapping the highlighted page navigation element 5004. In some embodiments, user interface object 5094 (e.g., an add widget button) appears in the user-arranged home screen 5050” in the first reconfiguration mode to indicates that one or more widgets can be configured and added to home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, the page navigation element 5004 with the changed appearance still provides the same navigation function as in the normal operational mode (e.g., outside of the reconfiguration mode), and a swipe input from one page indicator icon to another page indicator icon in the page navigation element 5004 with the changed appearance still causes navigation to the page corresponding to the page indicator icon at the current contact location. However, in some embodiments, the page navigation function based on tap input on the individual page indicator icons are disabled for page navigation element 5004, and a tap input on any portion of the page navigation element 5004 causes transition from the first reconfiguration mode to a second reconfiguration mode (e.g., page editing mode). In some embodiments, the page navigation element 5004 with the changed appearance still function the same way as in the normal operation mode in terms of page navigation (e.g., swiping or tapping to navigate to a different page still work), and the additional function of triggering the transition to the second reconfiguration mode is performed in response to a different type of input (e.g., a touch-hold input by a contact on any — portion of the page navigation element 5004, a tap input on a portion of the page navigation element 5004 that is not occupied by a page indicator icon, etc.).
[00226] [00226] Figures 5B6-5B19 illustrate example user interfaces for configuring and interacting with home screens in the second reconfiguration mode, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00227] [00227] Figures 5B6-5B7 illustrate that a tap input by a contact 5548 is detected on the highlighted page navigation element 5004 on the user-arranged home screen 5050’ (e.g., while in first reconfiguration mode). In response to the tap input, the device transitions from 87
[00228] [00228] In some embodiments, the page editing user interface 5062 includes a preset holding area 5100 (e.g., concurrently visible with the page representations of the unhidden pages, or in another portion of the page editing user interface that is not concurrently visible with the page representations). The preset holding area 5100 displays previously deleted/hidden user-arranged home screens which is currently empty in Figure 5B7. In some embodiments, the preset holding area 5100 includes a deletion affordance 5102 that when activated, permanently delete the hidden home screens in the preset holding area. In some embodiments, such a holding area 5100 and/or delete button 5102 are not provided in the page editing user interface. Hidden pages are visually marked as hidden and remain among the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface. A restore affordance is displayed for a respective hidden page, and when the restore affordance is activated, the status of the page changes from hidden/deleted to unhidden, and the restored page will be displayed among other pages of the multipage home screen user interface once the device exits the second reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, search function provided on the system-arranged home screen returns search results including application icons on the hidden pages of the home screen user interface as well as application icons from pages that are not hidden. In some embodiments, a filter selector for enabling search results that include application icons on the hidden pages are provided in the search input area on the system- arranged home screen.
[00229] [00229] Figures 5B7, 5B8, and 5B11 illustrate five different inputs by various contacts 5550, 5552, 5558, 5560, and 5562, which would cause the multipage home screen user interfaces to be configured differently as illustrated below.
[00231] [00231] In Figure 5B9, page representations 5064” and 5066” of the previously deleted/hidden home screens 5064 and 5066 are displayed in the preset holding area 5100. In Figure 5B9, upon detecting a gesture for exiting the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., a upward edge swipe input by contact 5554, a tap input by a contact 5555 in an unoccupied area of the page editing user interface 5062, etc.), the device exits the second reconfiguration mode and returns to displaying the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, as shown in Figure 5B10. In some embodiments, the page from which — the second reconfiguration mode was entered is redisplayed (e.g., page 5050). In some embodiments, a page that is newly restored is displayed upon existing the second reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, the system selects the page that is displayed when exiting the second reconfiguration mode based on multiple factors. In Figure 5B10, the first reconfiguration mode is still active, in which the user can rearrange application icons or reenter the second reconfiguration mode by selecting the highlighted page navigation element
[00233] [00233] Figure 5B11 shows a number of inputs by various contacts that illustrates different interactions with the page editing user interface 5062, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, in response to a tap input by contact 5560, which selects delete affordance 5102, page representations 5064” and 5066” of previously hidden/deleted home screens 5064 and 5066 are removed from the preset holding area 5100 and the pages 5064 and 5066 along with the applications represented by application icons on those pages are permanently deleted from the device. As a result, the deleted applications are removed from their assigned groupings on the system-arranged user interface, as well. In some embodiments, the delete affordance 5102 is grayed out when there are no hidden pages in the preset holding area, as illustrated in Figure 5B12. In some embodiments, pages that are deleted in this manner are not recoverable (e.g., are permanently removed from device 100). In some embodiments, permanent deletion of whole pages is disabled on a device, and a page is only deleted permanently if most or all application icons on that page is manually deleted individually or moved to another page.
[00234] [00234] In Figure 5B11 followed by Figure 5B13, a drag input by contact 5562, which selects the page representation 5064” of user-arranged home screen 5064 in the preset holding area 5100 and moves the page representation 5064” back to the sequence of page representations for pages that are not currently hidden (e.g., page representations 5050” and 5052”). The location of the page representation 5064” is determined based on liftoff location of contact 5562. For example, the page representation 5064” is optionally displayed to the right of the page representation 5052” (as shown in Figure 5B13), in the middle, or to the left of the page representation 5050”. In addition, in Figure 5B11 followed by Figure 5B13, a drag input by contact 5558 drags page representation 5050” from the first position in the sequence of page representations to a second position in the sequence of page representations — to adjust the position of the corresponding page 5050 in the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface. At the end of the drag input by contact 5558 and the drag input by contact 5562, the sequence of page representations are as shown in Figure 5B13 (e.g., page representation 5052” followed by page representation 5050”, followed by page representation 5064”).
[00236] [00236] Figures 5B14-5B16 illustrate navigation through the sequence of the unhidden pages of the multipage home screen user interface in response to a sequence of navigation inputs that specifies a navigation direction through the multipage home screen user interface. As shown in Figure 5B14, when the device returns to the first reconfiguration mode, there are three unhidden pages in the multipage home screen user interface in the sequence of user- arranged page 5052, user-arranged page 5050, and user-arranged page 5064. The three user- arranged pages have their respective page indicator icons 5004b, 5004a, and 5004d in the highlighted page navigation element 5004 in a sequence in accordance with the order of the pages in the multipage home screen user interface. In response to a sequence of swipe inputs by contacts 5565 and 5567, the device navigates from the user-arranged page 5052” (Figure 5B14) to the user-arranged page 5050' (Figure 5B15), and then from the user-arranged page —5050' (Figure 5B15) to the user-arranged page 5064’ (Figure 5B16).
[00237] [00237] In Figure 5B16, upon detecting a input for exiting the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., an upward edge swipe input by contact 5566 or a tap input by contact 5569 on an unoccupied area of the user-arranged page 5064” in the first reconfiguration mode, etc.), the device terminates the first reconfiguration mode and the user-arranged page 5064 is displayed in the normal operation mode.
[00238] [00238] In some embodiments, after at least one page has been hidden, when the device exits the second reconfiguration mode and returns to the first reconfiguration mode or the normal operation mode, the device displays a warning that after a page of the home screen is hidden, new applications will not be shown on the user-arranged home screens. As shown in Figure 5B17, after the device enters the normal mode in response to the input for exiting the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., as shown in Figure 5B16), the device displays the warning 5553 that informs the user of the change. In some embodiments, after at least one page is hidden, new applications will only be shown on the system-arranged home screen, and the user has the option to add the application icon for the new applications to a user- arranged page that is not currently hidden (e.g., by dragging and dropping the application icon from the system-arranged page to the user-arranged page in the first reconfiguration mode).
[00239] [00239] In Figure 5B17, a tap input by a contact 5551 is detected at a location in the touch screen corresponding to an affordance to return to the first reconfiguration mode or the normal operation mode. As shown in Figure 5B 18, the user-arranged page 5064 is displayed in normal operation mode after the warning 5553 is dismissed.
[00240] [00240] In Figure 5B17, another page navigation input has been detected (e.g., a leftward swipe input by contact 5571) on user-arranged page 5064, and in response, an application library user interface 5054” (e.g., alternative to a system-arranged page 5054 that is represented as one of the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface by the page navigation element 5004) is displayed overlaying a background user interface (e.g., ablurred and darkened version of the user-arranged home screen 5064 as shown in Figure 5B18). In some embodiments, the application library user interface 5054” has characteristics that are analogous to the system-arranged home screen 5054 and the application library user interface 5054” as described earlier with respect to Figures SA1-5A36 and accompanying descriptions. In some embodiments, the groupings of application icons (e.g., application groupings 5020a-5020d) will be updated to remove any application icons from deleted/hidden pages of the home screen user interface.
[00241] [00241] Figures 5C1-5C73 illustrate example user interfaces for inserting a user interface object containing application content (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) into a page of a home screen user interface (e.g., a single page or multipage home screen user interface), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00242] [00242] Figure 5C1 shows a user-arranged page 5302’ in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode) of a multipage home screen user interface. The application icons 5008aa-5008ao on the user-arranged page 5302 (e.g., 5302’ in the normal mode) are shown with a jiggling movement to indicate that the placement locations of the application icons can be adjusted in accordance with user input. The user-arranged page 5302” in the first reconfiguration mode shows the page navigation element 5004 in a highlighted state as compared to its appearance on the user-arranged page 5302 in the normal mode (e.g., non- reconfiguration mode). The first page indicator icon 5004a is visually distinguished from the other three page indicator icons 5004b-500d in the page navigation element 5004, to indicate that the user-arranged page 5302 is the first in a sequence of four user-arranged pages of the multipage home screen user interface. An add widget button 5094 is displayed at the top of the page 5302’ in the first reconfiguration mode. A tap input by a contact 5568 is detected at 93
[00243] [00243] In Figures 5C2, a tap input by a contact 5570 is detected at a location on the touch screen 112 corresponding to the add button 5318 on the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 after at least one widget (e.g., widget 5310a) has been selected. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 5570, the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 ceases to be displayed and the page 5302’ in the first reconfiguration mode is redisplayed, as shown in Figure 5C3. In Figure 5C3, the selected widget (e.g., widget 5310a, relabeled as widget 5322 when shown on the home screen) is automatically inserted at a respective placement location in the redisplayed page 5302’ in the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., at the top of the redisplayed page 5302’). In some embodiments, the selected widget is inserted at another location in the currently displayed home screen page (e.g., a user-selected location), if the selected widget was dragged away from its original location in the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 to the edge of the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304. In some embodiments, the user can drag the widget 5322 to another location after the widget 5322 has been inserted into the home screen page 5302’ in the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., repositioned in the same — manner as an application icon that is dragged and dropped in the home screen page 5302’ or across different pages of the multipage home screen user interface).
[00244] [00244] As illustrated in Figure 5C3, and in comparison to the page 5302” shown in Figure 5C1 prior to the insertion of the widget 5322, there is not sufficient space on the page 5302’ to accommodate all the application icons already present on the page 5302” and the widget 5322 in the regular manner (e.g., individually, and/or on the layout grid of the page, etc.). As a result, insertion of the widget 5322 causes the existing application icons on the page 5302’ (e.g., icons 50082a-5008a0) rightward and downward toward the bottom of the page 5302’, and some application icons in the bottom row of the page 5302” cease to be displayed on the page 5302’.
[00245] [00245] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5C3-5C4, the application icons that do not fit on current user-arranged home screen 5302” (e.g., application icons 5008am, 5008an, and 500820) are moved onto an adjacent page of the page 5302’ in the multipage 95
[00246] [00246] In Figure 5C4, a rightward swipe input by a contact 5574 is detected on the newly created user-arranged page 5324”. In response to detecting the swipe input by the contact 5574, the device replaces returns to the previous user-arranged page 5302’ including repositioned application icons 5008aa-5008al and the newly inserted widget 5322, as shown in Figure 5C5.
[00247] [00247] In Figure 5CS5, a tap input by a contact 5576 is detected on the add widget button 5094 in the page 5302” again. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 5576, device displays the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 again, as shown in Figure 5C6. In Figure 5C6, the recommended widget area 5308 is updated, and a new widget 5310d is displayed to replace the widget 5310a that has already been inserted into a home screen page. In this example, the widget 5310d has the same size as the widget 5310a.
[00248] [00248] In Figure 5C5, a contact 5578 is detected on the widget 5310d, and in accordance with a determination that selection criteria are met (e.g., the contact 5578 has not moved by more than a threshold amount during a threshold amount of time to meet a touch- hold requirement, or an intensity of the contact 5578 meets a first intensity threshold, etc.), the selection indicator 5312d is updated to indicate the selected status of the widget 5310d prior to liftoff of the contact 5578. In some embodiments, the widget 5310d is shown to be lifted away from its original location on the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 while the contact 5578 is maintained. While the widget 5310d remains selected, movement of the contact 5578 is detected, and in response to detecting the movement of the 96
[00249] [00249] As shown in Figure 5C7, when the user-arranged page 5302’ is redisplayed, widget 5310d (now relabeled as widget 5326 outside of the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304) remains under the contact 5578. As the contact 5578 continues to move on the touch-screen 112, the widget 5326 is dragged around the user- arranged page 5302” according to the movement of the contact 5578, as shown in Figure 5C8.
[00250] [00250] In Figures 5C9 and 5C11, it is shown that the contact 5578 is maintained and continues to move downward dragging the widget 5326 to a different placement location, — currently occupied by a set of application icons 5008ai-5008al. As shown in Figure 5C10, the contact 5578 dragging the widget 5326 has paused over the placement location partially occupied by the application icons 53021-53021, and in response to detecting that contact 5578 has remained at the same placement location for at least a threshold amount of time, the application icons 53021-53021 ceases to be displayed at their original locations and are moved tothe newly created page 5324”. In addition, the previously displayed application icons 5008aa-5008ad are returned from the newly created page 5324” to the user-arranged page 5302' after the widget 5326 has vacated that the application icons’ original placement 97
[00251] [00251] Figure 5C12 shows that, after the liftoff of the contact 5578 at the location shown in Figure 5C11, the widget is placed at the new placement location at the bottom of the page 5302”, along with the widget 5322 at the top of the page 5302” and the restored application icons 5008aa-5008ad.
[00252] [00252] In Figure 5C12, a leftward swipe input by a contact 5580 is detected by the device (e.g., at a location in the touch screen that does not correspond to any widget icons or application icons, or a location that is occupied by a widget or application icon, etc.). In response to the swipe input by the contact 5580 and in accordance with a determination that the movement of contact 5580 has exceeded a predefined threshold amount of movement (e.g., half of the display width) to complete the page navigation operation, the newly created page 5324” of the home screen user interface is displayed again. As shown in Figure 5C13, — user-arranged home screen 5324” now includes a plurality of application icons, that include the application icons 5008am-5008ao that were previously displaced due to insertion of the widget 5322, and the application icons 5008ae-5008al that were previously displaced due to the insertion of the widget 5326.
[00253] [00253] In Figure 5C13, a swipe input by a contact 5582 is detected. In response to the swipe input by the contact 5582 and in accordance with a determination that the movement of contact 5582 has exceeded a predefined threshold amount of movement (e.g., half of the display width) to complete the page navigation operation, the page 5302’ is redisplayed, as shown in Figure 5C14.
[00254] [00254] In Figure SC14, a tap input by a contact 5584 is detected at a location corresponding to a deletion badge 5328 that is associated with widget 5326 in the first reconfiguration mode. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 5584, the widget 98
[00255] [00255] Figure 5C14 also illustrates another scenario, where a tap hold input by a contact 5586 is detected at a location corresponding to the widget 5326. As seen in Figures 5C16-5C17, the widget 5326 is lifted off its placement location in the page 5302’ by the touch-hold input, and is dragged away from the placement location upwards in accordance with movement of the contact 5586. In Figures 5C17-5C18, the widget 5326 is dragged by the contact 5586 over the widget 5322, and dropped on the widget 5322 upon liftoff of the contact 5586 at a location over the widget 5322. In accordance with a determination that widget 5326 and the widget 5322 are of the same size, a widget stack 5328 is created as seen in Figure 5C18 at the placement location of the widget 5322, with the widget 5326 shown on top. The plurality of application icons 5008aa-5008al that were displaced by the insertion of the widget 5326 in the lower portion of the page 5302” are restored from the page 5324” back to their original placement locations on the page 5302”, as shown in Figure 5C18.
[00256] [00256] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5C18, the newly created widget stack 5328 is displayed with widget indicator icons 5330a and 5330b. The newly added widget 5326 is added to the top of the stack and corresponds to the widget indicator icon 5330a, and accordingly, the widget indicator icon 5330a is highlighted relative to the widget indicator icon 5330b to show the order of the currently displayed widget 5326 in the widget stack (e.g., relative to the currently hidden widget 5322).
[00257] [00257] Also in Figure 5C18, an upward edge swipe input by a contact 5590 that meets the criteria for terminating the first reconfiguration mode, is detected. In response to detecting the upward edge swipe input by the contact 5590, the first reconfiguration mode is terminated and the device returns to the user-arranged home screen 5302 in the normal non- reconfiguration mode, as seen in Figure 5C19. 99
[00258] [00258] Figure 5C19, an upward swipe input by a contact 5592 is detected at a location that corresponds to the placement location occupied by the widget stack 5328, while the widget 5326 is displayed at the placement location. In response to the upward swipe input by the contact 5592, the device to switch to the next widget in the stack 5328 and displays the widget 5322 at the placement location, as shown in Figure 5C20. The device also updates the widget indicator icon 5330 to show that the widget indicator icon 5330b for the widget 5322 is now highlighted relative to the widget indicator icon 5330a for the widget 5326, in Figure 5C20).
[00259] [00259] In Figures 5C20-5C22, a touch-hold input by a contact 5594 followed by lift- off without movement of the contact 5594 causes display of a quick action menu 5332 for the widget stack 5328 associated with the placement location at which the touch-hold input is detected. In Figure 5C20, the contact 5594 is detected at a location corresponding to the currently displayed widget 5322 in the widget stack 5328. In accordance with a determination that the contact 5594 is kept substantially stationary for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., an amount of time that is shorter than the time required to trigger the first reconfiguration mode using a touch-hold input, and equal to or more than the time required to trigger the first reconfiguration mode using a touch-hold followed by drag input, etc.), the device displays the quick action menu for the widget stack 5328. In some embodiments, liftoff of the contact 5594 is required before the quick action menu 5332 is displayed, and the quick action menu is maintained until dismissed by another tap input outside of the quick action menu, or by selection of a menu option in the quick action menu. In some embodiments, liftoff of the contact 5594 is not required for the display of the quick action menu 5332, and the contact 5594 can move to a menu option in the quick action menu 5332 to select the menu option by liftoff over the menu option.
[00260] [00260] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure SC21, the quick action menu 5332 includes menu options 5334-5344 for performing actions associated with the currently displayed widget 5326 and the widget stack 5328. For example, the quick action menu 5332 includes an option 5334 for sharing the currently displayed widget using one or more sharing means provided by the device, an option 5336 for displaying a widget-specific configuration — user interface for configuring the currently displayed widget, an option 5338 for deleting the currently displayed widget from the widget stack, an option for displaying a stack-specific configuration user interface for editing the widget stack, an option 5342 for deleting the 100
[00261] [00261] Figure 5C22 shows tap inputs respectively performed by two contacts 5596 and 5598 on different options of the quick action menu 5332 (e.g., options 5336 and 5340) in two different example scenarios. In response to the tap input by the contact 5596 on the option 5336 for editing the currently displayed widget, a widget-specific configuration platter 5336’ for editing the currently displayed widget 5326 is displayed with widget options 5348 — specific to the currently displayed widget 5326 (e.g., size, content update frequency, available application function, whether user input is enabled, etc.), as shown in Figure 5C23. In the other scenario, in response to the tap input by the contact 5598 on the option 5340 to edit the widget stack 5328, stack-specific options (e.g., option 5356a to open the widget options for the widget 5326, option 5356b to open the widget options for the widget 5322, option 5358a to delete the widget 5326 from the widget stack 5328, option 5358b for deleting the widget 5322 from the widget stack 5328, etc.) are displayed along with options that are applicable to widget stacks (e.g., a control 5360, that when activated, enables and/or disables a wildcard widget for the widget stack 5328, a control 5362, that when activated, enables and/or disables automatic widget switching for the placement location of the widget stack 5328, a control — 5347 for deleting the whole stack, etc.) in a stack configuration platter 5340’. In some embodiments, a wildcard widget occupies a slot in the widget stack, and servers as placeholder in the widget stack for another widget that is not currently included in the widget stack but may be determined to be relevant to the user based on the current context. In some embodiments, automatic switching allows the device to automatically (e.g., without user — input) select from the widgets included in the widget stack (e.g., optionally, including a wildcard widget) a widget to display at the placement location of the widget stack, e.g., in accordance with the current context and/or in accordance with a rotation schedule. Figure 5C24 shows that the control 5360 and 5362 are activated by contacts 5604 and 5608 respectively to enable the wildcard widget and automatic switching for the widget stack 5328, in this example. In Figure 5C23 and 5C24, a done button 5351 is displayed along with the configuration platters 5336” and 5340”, respectively. A tap input by contacts 5600 or 5602 on the done button 5351 dismisses the configuration platters 5336’ and 5340”, respectively, the 101
[00262] [00262] In Figure 5C25, an upward swipe input by a contact 5610 is detected at the placement location occupied by the widget stack 5328 while the widget 5326 is the currently displayed widget, and in response to the swipe input by the contact 5610, the device displays the next widget in the widget stack according to the navigation direction specified by the swipe input, which is the wildcard widget 5366 in this example. As shown in Figure 5C26, the device automatically selects a widget that is not currently included in the widget stack 5366 (and optionally not in any widget stack that is shown on the same page) and that is determined to be relevant to the user given the current context, and displays the automatically selected widget in place of the wildcard widget 5366. In some embodiments, if multiple widgets are determined to be equally relevant given the current context, multiple widgets may be concurrently displayed in place of the wildcard widget 5366, provided that the overall size and arranged of the multiple widgets will fit the placement location of the widget stack 5328. In Figure 5C26, the widget indicator icons 5330 are updated such that the widget indicator icon 5330c is highlighted relative to the other widget indicator icons 5330a and 5330b in the sequence of widget indicator icons, and inform the user that the currently displayed widget is the last one in the widget stack. In some embodiments, a wildcard indicator (e.g., a red edge, or glowing appearance) is displayed when the wildcard widget is displayed (e.g., having been filled by an automatically selected widget that is not included in the widget stack) at the placement location, to inform the user that the wildcard widget is being displayed. In some embodiments, the wildcard widget is always inserted at the bottom of the widget stack and represented by the last widget indicator icon in the sequence of widget indicator icons for the widget stack. In some embodiments, the widget indicator icons are persistently displayed next to a respective widget stack. In some embodiments, the widget indicator icons are displayed when the currently displayed widget in the widget stack is updated, e.g., by automatic switching or rotation, and/or by user request.
[00263] [00263] In Figure 5C26, a reconfiguration input is detected on the page 5302 (e.g., a touch-hold input by a contact 5614 on an unoccupied area of the page 5302 for a first 102
[00264] [00264] Figures 5C27-Figure 5C32 illustrate an example of adding another 4x4 sized widget to the top of the page 5302 where the 2x4 sized widget stack 5328 already exists. In Figure 5C27, a tap input by a contact 5616 is detected at a location corresponding to the add widget button 5094. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 5616, the device displays the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304, as shown in Figure 5C28. In Figure 5C28, a new widget 5310e has been presented in the recommended widget area, and it has been selected (e.g., as indicated by the selection indicator 5312e) by a contact 5618 (e.g., by a touch-hold input, or by an earlier tap input on the widget 5310e) and being dragged away from its original location in the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304. In response to detection of the drag input by the contact 5618, the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 ceases to be displayed, and the page 5302” in the first reconfiguration mode is displayed, as shown in Figure 5C29. Figures 5C29-5C30 illustrate that the widget 5310e (now labeled as widget 5368 on the page 5302”) is dragged to the placement location occupied by the widget stack and a set of application icons 5008aa- 5008ad, and dropped into that placement location. As a result of dropping the widget 5368, in accordance with a determination that the placement location of the widget stack 5328 is not sufficiently big to accommodate the widget 5368 (or is not of the same size, in some embodiments; or is of a different set of dimensions, in some embodiments, etc.), the widget 5368 is not added to the widget stack 5328 at the placement location. Instead, the widget stack 5328 is moved out of the placement location (e.g., downward, and/or rightward (if it is narrower than the width of the page layout)) it previously occupied, to make room for the widget 5368. As a result, existing application icons 5008aa-5008al are displaced from the — current page 5302” and a new page 5370’ is optionally created to hold these displaced application icons, as shown in Figure 5C31.
[00265] [00265] In Figure 5C31, the newly created page 5370” includes the set of application icons 5008aa-5008al that have been displaced from the page 5302” due to the insertion of the widget 5368 and the reflow movement of the widget stack 5328. In some embodiments, if a single widget was occupying the placement location occupied by the widget stack 5328, the single widget is optionally sent to the newly created page 5370” with the application icons 5008aa-5008ad, while the application icons outside of the space needed to accommodate the widget 5368 5C29-5C30 would not be moved on page 5302”.
[00266] [00266] Figure 5C29-5C30 illustrate a sequence of page navigation inputs from the page 5302’ toward the end of the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user — interface (e.g., two consecutive leftward swipe inputs by contact 5620 and 5622 anywhere on the currently displayed page, two consecutive tap inputs on the page indicators 5004f and 5004e, a quick and short swipe input along the page indicator 5004 toward the right, a longer and slower swipe input along the page indicator 5004 toward the right, etc.), causes the device to navigate to page 5370’ first, and then to page 5324’. In Figure 5C31, the page 5370’ is anewly created page to accommodate the displaced application icons 5008aa-5008al, and the new page indicator icon 5004f is added behind the page indicator icon 5004a and before the page indicator icon 5004e and is highlighted relative to the other page indicator icons in the sequence of page indicator icons in the page indicator 5004. In Figure 5C32, the page 5324” was created in the previous reconfiguration session, different from the current reconfiguration session (e.g., the previous reconfiguration session is ended when the home screen user interface exited the first reconfiguration mode and returned to the normal mode, as shown in Figure 5C18-5C25), and includes application icons 5008am-5008ao that were displaced from the page 5302” during the previous reconfiguration session.
[00267] [00267] Figures 5C33-5C46 illustrate an example of adding a widget to a user- arranged page of a multipage home screen user interface and the concurrent reconfiguration of the user-arranged page of the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. In the example shown in Figures 5C33-5C46, application icons that are displaced from a page of the multipage home screen user interface in response to a widget being inserted at a location of the application icons in the page are automatically sent to a folder (e.g., in a new folder created on the page, or a preconfigured folder in a different page), in accordance with some embodiments. This is in contrast to the example shown in Figures 5C1-5C32, where displaced application icons and/or widgets are moved to a newly created 104
[00268] [00268] Figure 5C33 shows a first user-arranged page 5302” of a multipage home scree user interface. The user-arranged page 5302” includes a plurality of application icons 5008aa- 5008as arranged in accordance with a preset layout (e.g., on a 5x4 grid) in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode). In some embodiments, the user- arranged home screen 5302” includes page indicators 5004 indicating both the total number of pages and the position of the currently displayed page in the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface. For example, as shown in Figure 5C33, page indicator icon 5004c is highlighted, indicating that the currently displayed page 5302’ is the fourth page of a total of five pages of the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, multiple pages (e.g., all pages) of the multipage home screen user interface are user-arranged pages (e.g., there is no system-arranged page or widget screen, or a system- arranged page and a widget screen are displayed as overlays rather than pages of the home screen user interface, etc.). In some embodiments, the first page of the multipage home screen — user interface is a widget screen, and the last page of the multipage home screen user interface is a system-arranged home screen.
[00269] [00269] In Figure 5C33, the user-arranged page 5302’ in the first reconfiguration mode includes an add widget button 5094. In Figure 5C33, a tap input by a contact 5624 is detected at a respective location on the touch screen 112 that corresponds to the add widget button
[00270] [00270] In Figures 5C36 and 5C37, the widget 5310h moves from one location to — another location on the user-arranged page 5302” in accordance with the movement of the contact 5626. In Figures 5C37-5C39, the movement of the contact 5626 is paused over a first location on the user-arranged page 5302 for at least a threshold amount of time without being terminated. The first location currently accommodates to a set of two application icons (e.g., application icons 5008ai and 5008aj). In some embodiments, the set of application icons comprises a number of application icons corresponding to the size of widget 5310h. In Figures 5C38 and 5C39, in accordance with a determination that the user-arranged page 5302’ cannot accommodate all of the existing application icons and the new widget 5310h in the usual manner (e.g., individually, and/or on a preset layout grid on the page, etc.), the device generates a folder 5390a on the page 5302’ and moves the set of application icons 5008ai-5008aj at the first location into the newly created folder 5390a to make space for the widget 5310h at the first location. In some embodiments, the set of application icons cannot be activated directly from user-arranged home screen 5302” after being moved into the folder 5390a. In some embodiments, the folder 5390a is created on the currently displayed page of the home scree user interface (e.g., user-arranged page 5302”) at a predefined location (e.g., — ata respective placement location succeeding all or a predetermined set of remaining application icons in the currently displayed page of the home screen user interface). In some embodiments, an animated transition is displayed showing the creation of the folder on the 106
[00271] [00271] In Figures 5C39-5C41, movement of the contact 5626 is detected and the widget 5310h is moved from the first location to a second location occupied by a set of widgets 50080-5008p in accordance with the movement of the contact 5626. In Figures 5C40 and 5C41, in accordance with a determination that the contact is maintained over the second location for more than a threshold amount of time without being terminated, the set of application icons 5008a0 and 5008ap at the second location are moved from the second location to the folder 5390a to make space for the widget 5310h. Concurrent with the movement of the widget 5310h to the second location in the page 5302” (e.g., vacating the first location), the set of application icons 5008ai and 5008j are moved from the folder 5390a back to the first location, as shown in Figure 5C41. In Figure 5C42, the liftoff of the contact 5626 is detected while the widget 5310h was over the second location. In response to liftoff of the contact 5626, the widget 5310h is inserted into home screen user interface 5302” at the second location, and the set of application icons 5008a0-5008ap remains in the folder 5390a.
[00272] [00272] Figures 5C43-5C44 illustrate that, after the widget 5310h is inserted into the page 5302”, repositioning the widget within the page 5302” does not cause additional — application icons to be moved to the folder 5390a. In Figure 5C43, an additional drag input by a contact 5636 is detected on the touch screen from the second location to a third location occupied by a set of application icons 5008ae-5008af. In accordance with a determination that there is sufficient space on the currently displayed page to accommodate all or a predetermined set of the existing application icons and the widget 5310h (e.g., individually, and/or on the preset layout grid on the page, etc.), the application icons (e.g., application icons between the third location and the second location, application icons 5008ae-5008ap, etc.) on the page 5302” are reflowed (shifts rightward and downward sequentially) within the page 5302’ to accommodate the widget 5310h at the third location. No additional application icons are moved to the folder 5390a as a result of the move of the widget 5310h. Application — icons currently within folder 5390a (e.g., application icons 500820-5008ap) remain within the folder 5390a.
[00273] [00273] In Figure 5C45-5C46, a tap input by a contact 5638 is detected at a respective location corresponding to a deletion affordance 5392 associated with the application icon 5008as. In response to the tap input by the contact 5638, the device removes the application icon 5008as from the user-arranged page 5302’ (e.g., and deletes the application associated with application icon 5008as from the device (e.g., from the user-arranged home screens and the system-arranged home screen)), as shown in Figure 5C46.
[00274] [00274] In Figure 5C46, a tap input by a contact 5640 is detected on the add widget button 5094. In response to the tap input by the contact 5640, the device displays the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304, as shown in Figure 5C47. In Figure 5C47, a — tap input by a contact 5642 is detected at a respective location corresponding to the recommended widget 5310g, and after the contact is maintained on the widget 5310g for at least a threshold amount of time with less than a threshold amount of movement, the widget 5310g is selected as indicated by the selection indicator 5312g. In Figure 5C48, after the widget 5310g is selected by contact 5642, movement of the contact 5642 is detected. In accordance with a determination that more than a threshold amount of movement of the contact 5642 has been detected, the widget selection and configuration user interface starts to fade away and eventually ceases to be displayed (as shown in Figures 5C48) and the user- arranged page 5302’ is displayed with the widget 5310g hovering over it, as shown in Figure 5C49.
[00275] [00275] In Figures 5C49-5C51, the widget 5310g is dragged to a fourth location in the page 5302” in accordance with movement of the contact 5642. In Figure 5C50, the contact 5626 is maintained over the fourth location for at least a threshold amount of time without being terminated. The fourth location currently accommodates a set of application icons 5008ac-5008af in a 272 grid that matches to size of the widget 5310g. In Figure 5C50, in accordance with a determination that drag input by the contact 5646 is maintained over the fourth location for more than a threshold amount of time without being terminated, the set of application icons 5008ac-5008af and all or a predetermined set of the application icons below the set of application icons 5008ac-5008af are shifted rightward and downward one by one, until enough space is created for the insertion of the widget 5310g at the fourth location. All — ora predetermined set of the application icons at the end of the layout (e.g., last icons in the last row) that do not fit within the current page are pushed into the folder 5390a. For 108
[00276] [00276] Figure 5C52 shows a number of inputs by various contacts 5644, 5646, 5648, and 5650 that are detected in different scenarios, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the device, when detecting an input, uses the location of the input to determine which operation is to be performed in response to the input.
[00277] [00277] In Figure 5C52, a tap input by a contact 5646 is detected at a location corresponding to a deletion affordance 5320g associated with the widget 5310g. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 5646, the device deletes the widget 5310g from the user-arranged page 5302”, as shown in Figure 5C53. In Figure 5C53, in response to the removal of the widget 5310g, the application icons that are shifted on the user-arranged page and the application icons that are moved to the folder 5390a due to the insertion of the widget 5310g are returned to their original locations on the user-arranged page 5302’ (e.g., the state shown in Figure 5C46 is restored).
[00278] [00278] Figure 5C52 also shows a tap-hold input by a contact 5648 (or an upward swipe input by the contact 5648, or a light press input by the contact 5648) at a location corresponding to the widget 5310g. The input is distinguished from a tap input on the widget 5310g which launches the application corresponding to the widget 5310g. In response to the input on the widget 5310g by the contact 5648 that is distinguished from a tap input for launching the corresponding application (and distinguished from a touch-hold and drag input for starting the first reconfiguration mode, and distinguished from an extra-long touch and hold input, etc.), the device displays a widget-specific configuration platter 5352 with a plurality of options (e.g., widget options 5394a-5394d) for the widget 5310g, as shown in Figures 5C54-5C55. In 5C55, the widget configuration platter 5352 includes a deletion — affordance 5346 for deleting the widget 5310g from the current page 5302. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a tap input by a contact 5652 on a done button 5351 displayed next to the widget configuration platter 5352, the device dismisses the widget configuration platter 5352 and redisplays the user-arranged home screen 5302” in the first reconfiguration mode, as shown in Figure 5C55.
[00279] [00279] Also in Figure 5C52, a tap input by a contact 5650 is detected at respective location corresponding to the folder 5390a. In response to detecting the tap input by the 109
[00280] [00280] In Figure 5C52, a tap input by a contact 5644 is detected at a respective location on the touch screen 112 that corresponds to the add widget button 5094. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 5644, the device displays the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304, as shown in Figure 5C57. In Figure 5C57, a tap input by a contact 5654 is detected at a location corresponding to the calendar application 5316a. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 5654, the device displays an application- specific widget configuration user interface 5304”, as shown in Figure 5C58. The application- specific widget configuration user interface 5304” has a size selection portion 5659 that lists a plurality of sizes 5400a-5400c for a widget corresponding to the currently selected application (e.g., calendar). In some embodiments, the most commonly used sizes are displayed, such as 2x2 sized, 2x4 size, and 4x4 sized. Additional sizes are also available upon selection of a "more sizes” button in the size selection area. In Figure 5C58, the 2x2 widget size 5400a is selected, and as a result, the widget previews (e.g., widget 53101 for the up next widget type, and widget 5310m for the today widget) shown in the widget type selection portion 5657 are shown with the 2x2 size. In some embodiments, if a different widget size is — selected, the previews of the different types of widgets shown in the widget type selection area will have the different selected size.
[00281] [00281] In Figure SC58, a touch-hold and drag input (or a simple drag input) by a contact 5656 is detected at a location corresponding to the widget 53101 for the up next widget of the calendar application. In response to the drag input by the contact 5656, the — device ceases to display the application-specific widget configuration user interface 5304” and displays the user-arranged page 5302’ of the multipage home screen user interface underneath the widget 53101, as shown in 5C59. In some embodiments, the widget 53101 is 110
[00282] [00282] In Figure 5C61, two separate inputs are detected in different scenarios. In particular, while the widget stack displaying user-arranged home screen 5302” including a plurality of application icons 5002 and multiple widgets and/or widget stacks, a tap input by contact 5658 is detected at a location corresponding to a widget on top of widget stack 5396 (e.g., at widget 53101). In response to detecting a tap-hold input by a contact 5658 (e.g., distinguished from a tap input for launching the application and a long tap-hold input for triggering the first reconfiguration mode, etc.), the device displays a stack-specific configuration platter 5340” (e.g., analogous to the stack-specific configuration platter 5340’ in Figure 5C24) overlaid on the user-arranged page 5302’, as shown in Figure 5C62. In some embodiments, the stack-specific configuration platter 5340” displays options 5356 for displaying the widget-specific options for the two or more widgets in widget stack 5396 (e.g., similar to the widget options pop-up 5352 in Figure 5C55). In some embodiments, tap input by contact 5664 is detected on ‘wildcard widget’ selector (e.g., a toggle option). In some embodiments, in response to detecting tap input by contact 5664, the device turns on a — wildcard widget option (e.g., including a system-selected widget in widget stack 5396). In some embodiments, the stack configuration platter 5340” includes a control 5360 for enabling a wildcard widget for the stack and a control 5362 for enabling automatic switching of the currently displayed widget for the widget stack. In some embodiments, in response to detecting tap input by contact 5666, the device turns on automatic switching of widgets — within in the widget stack (e.g., a widget in widget stack 5396 is displayed for a predetermined time and then replaced by another widget from widget stack 5396).
[00283] [00283] In Figure 5C61, another tap input by a contact 5660 is detected at a respective location corresponding to the add widget button 5094. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 5660, the device displays the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304, as shown in Figure 5C63. In Figure 5C63, for example, the widget 5310f is selected, as indicated by highlighted widget selection indicator 5312f. In Figure 5C63, a tap input by a contact 5668 is detected at a location corresponding the ‘add’ button 5318 while the widget 5310f is selected. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 5668, the device ceases to display the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304, and displays the user- arranged home screen 5302” including widget 5310f at a predefined default location (e.g., top of the page, upper left corner of the page, etc.), as shown in Figure 5C64.
[00284] [00284] Figures 5C64-5C67 illustrate page navigation and page reconfiguration in response to movement and placement of the widget 5310f by a drag input by a contact 5670. In Figure 5C64, the drag input by the contact 5670 is detected at a location corresponding to the widget 5310f, and the widget 5310f moves in user-arranged home screen 5302” in accordance with the movement of the drag input by the contact 5670. In accordance with a determination that movement of drag input by contact 5670 has exceeded a predefined threshold amount of movement (e.g., half of the display width) in a navigation direction through the multipage home screen user interface, another page 5376” of the home screen user interface is displayed (e.g., user-arranged home screen 5376’ is the third page as indicated by highlighted page indicator icon 5004b), as shown in Figure 5C65. As shown in Figure 5C65, the widget 5310f is held over a portion of user-arranged home screen 5376” that corresponds to the location of a respective set of application icons (e.g., application icons 5008e-50081). In Figure 5C66, liftoff of the contact 5670 is detected, while the widget 5310f is over the location occupied by the set of application icons 5008e-50081. In response to liftoff of the contact 5670, the widget 5310f is inserted into the user-arranged page 5376’ at the final drop off location. Application icons on the user-arranged page 5376” are shifted rightward and downward one by one toward the last placement location on the page 5376 to make room for the widget 5376” at the drop off location. Application icons 5008e-5008k are shifted down two rows in user-arranged home screen 5370’, and application icons 50081 and —5008m are moved to a newly created folder 5390b displayed in the lower right corner of user- arranged home screen 5370”), as shown in Figure 5C67. In Figure 5C67, an upward edge swipe input by a contact 5670 is detect, and in response, the device exits the first 112
[00285] [00285] In Figure 5C68, a leftward swipe input by a contact 5674 is detected on the widget 5310f, and in response to the leftward swipe input by the contact 5674, the device navigates to the next page in the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the navigation direction (e.g., rightward) specified by the leftward swipe input. As shown in Figure 5C69, the user-arranged page 5302 is displayed as a result of the swipe input.
[00286] [00286] In Figure 5C69, an upward swipe input by a contact 5676 is detected on the widget stack 5386, while the widget 5310f is the currently displayed widget in the stack. In response to the upward swipe input by the contact 5676, the widget 5310g becomes the currently displayed widget in the widget stack 5386, as shown in Figure 5C70.
[00287] [00287] A number of downward swipe inputs by various contacts in different scenarios are shown in Figure 5C70. In Figure 5C70, a downward swipe input by a contact 5678 is detected at a location corresponding to the widget stack 5396 while the widget 5310g is the currently displayed widget. In some embodiments, in response to downward swipe input by the contact 5678, in accordance with a determination that widget 5310g is part of a widget stack, the device replaces the widget 5310g with a next widget in the widget stack (e.g., the widget 53101 as shown in Figure 5C71).
[00289] [00289] In Figure 5C71, a rightward swipe input by a contact 5684 is detected at a location corresponding to the widget stack 5396 while the widget 53101 is displayed. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the movement of contact 5580 has exceeded a predefined threshold amount of movement (e.g., half of the display width) to complete a page navigation operation, a next page (e.g., user-arranged home screen 5376 as indicated by highlighted page indicator icon 5004b) of the home screen user interface in the navigation direction (e.g., leftward) specified by the rightward swipe input is displayed, as shown in Figure 5C72.
[00290] [00290] Figure 5C72 shows downward swipe inputs by contacts 5686 and 5688 respectively detected at locations corresponding to application icon 5008a and widget 5310f. In some embodiments, in response to detecting either downward swipe input by the contact 5686 or contact 5688, the device displays the search user interface 5059, as shown in Figure 5C73.
[00291] [00291] Figures 5D1-5D12 illustrate example user interfaces for selecting for display and updating user interface objects containing application content (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) that are associated with a placement location in a page of a home — screen user interface (e.g., a single page or multipage home screen user interface), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00292] [00292] Figure 5D1 illustrates an example page of home screen user interface (e.g., page 5404 of a multipage home screen user interface). In some embodiments, the page 5404 is a user-arranged page of a multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, the — user interactions demonstrated using the example page 5404 is also available on at least a portion of a system-arranged page of a multipage home screen user interface or a single-page home screen user interface that displays both application icons and user interface objects containing application content corresponding to different applications. In some embodiments, the user interactions demonstrated using the example page 5404 is also available on a widget — page of a multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, the user interactions demonstrated using the example page 5404 is also available on an application library user 114
[00293] [00293] As shown in Figure 5D1, at a first moment in time (e.g., T=6:12PM), the page 5404 displays a plurality of widgets at respective placement locations assigned to the widgets.
[00294] [00294] In some embodiment, a placement location on a page of the home screen has a respective size that is configured to accommodate a widget of a corresponding size, or a grid of application icons of the same corresponding size. For example, a 1x1 sized placement location only accommodates a single application icon, and cannot accommodate any widget. A 1x2 sized placement location can accommodate two application icons arranged side by side inarow, or a single 1x2 sized widget. A 2x2 sized placement location can accommodate four application icons arranged side by side in two adjacent rows, and a single 2x2 sized widget or two 1x2 sized widgets arranged in two adjacent rows. A 2x4 sized placement location can accommodate a two rows of four application icons arranged side by side, a single 2x4 sized widget, two 1x4 sized widgets arranged in two adjacent rows, or two 2x2 sized widgets arranged side by side in a single row, etc. A 4x4 sized placement location can accommodate four rows of four application icons arranged side by side, a single 4x4 sized widget, two rows of 2x4 sized widgets, two rows of two 2x2 sized widgets arranged side by side, etc. In some embodiments, a placement location is optionally associated with multiple widgets of the same size. For example, a 2x2 sized placement location is optionally associated with 2 or more 2x2 sized widgets and the widgets are selectively displayed at the placement location at different times. In some embodiments, a placement location is optionally associated with multiple widgets of different sizes, and may display different combinations of widgets that can be accommodated by the size of the placement location. For example, in some embodiments, a 2x4 sized placement location can be associated with two 2x2 sized widgets, two 1x4 sized widgets, and a 2x4 sized widget; and optionally, the set of 2x2 sized widgets, the set of two 1x4 sized widgets, and the single 2x4 sized widgets are respectively displayed at different times at the placement location. In some embodiments, the computer system selects which set 115
[00295] [00295] Figure 5D2 illustrate that some of the placement locations that are currently displaying the widgets shown in Figure 5D1 are associated with multiple widgets, while other placement locations are associated with a single widget only. For example, the placement location 5410a is associated with the suggested applications widget 5055. The placement location 5410d is associated with the second widget 5310h of application 1 and the first widget 53101 of application 2, The placement location 5410b is associated with the second widget 5130g of application 2, the up next widget 5412c of the calendar application, the UK weather widget 5412c of the weather application, the set alarm widget of the alarm application, and a wildcard widget. The placement location 5410c is associated a local weather widget 5406 of the weather application, a world clock widget 5414a of the clock application, a nearby widget 5414b of the maps application, a recommended contacts widget 5414a of the messages application, and a wildcard widget. Other placement locations (e.g., placement locations 5008ae’, 5008af”, 5008n’, 50080'm 5008p’ and 5008q’) on the page 5404 are occupied by application icons (e.g., application icons 5008ae, 5008af, 5008n, 50080, 5008p, and 5008q). In some embodiments, for a placement location that is associated — with multiple widgets from different applications, the user has enabled automatic switching of the widgets based on context as well as manual switching in response to user inputs. In some embodiments, the widgets have a sequential order in the stack of widgets associated 116
[00296] [00296] Figure 5D3 illustrates that, at a different time from that shown in Figure SD1 (e.g., T=6:15PM), the set of recommended applications are updated to include a different set of application icons. In accordance with a recent update to the suggested applications widget 5055, the computer system displays an update indicator 5416b on the corner of the suggested applications widget 5055. In some embodiments, the update indicator 5416b fades away after — a preset period of time. At this moment, no update is made to the widget displayed at placement location 5410d. As shown in Figure 5D3, the placement location 5410b is updated and the second widget 5310g of the Application 2 is replaced by the up next widget 5412c of the calendar application, because the computer system determines that the scheduled time for the upcoming event on the calendar is close or within a threshold amount of time (e.g., 15 minutes) of the current time. An update indicator 5416c is displayed at the corner of the widget 5412c to indicate that an update has occurred for this placement location. In some embodiments, the content of the upcoming event (e.g., people, location, activity, etc.) is used as the data for determining the current context as well as other data, such as the current location, current time, current activities of the user on the computer system, etc. In accordance with the context determined by the data available to the computer system, the computer system updates the widgets displayed at the placement location 5410c as well, replacing the local weather widget 5406 with two widgets, the nearby widget 5414b of the maps application and the recommended contacts widget 5414a of the messages application. In some embodiments, the content of the widgets displayed in the nearby widget 5414b and the recommended contacts widget 5414a is updated based on the current context as well. For example, the meeting location and meeting time in the upcoming event is used to recommend a driving route in the nearby widget, and the meeting participants are listed in the recommended contacts widget 5414a. In some embodiments, two widgets are selected from the set of widgets associated with the placement location 5410c because both appear to be sufficiently relevant to the current context, but neither is absolutely dominating over the other for the current context. In some embodiments, the two widgets concurrently displayed in the same placement location are resized (or a suitable sized widget from the same application is 117
[00297] [00297] Figure 5D4 illustrates that, shortly after the update to the page 5404, a notification 5412d for a message arrives at the computer system. The content of the message is regarding a flight that leaves London in an hour, and a request for a phone call to Danny.
[00298] [00298] Figure 5D5 following Figure 5D4 illustrates that, the arrival of the message provides new data to update the current context, and in accordance with the update to the — current context, the up next widget 5412c is replaced with the UK weather widget 5412c showing the current weather in London. In addition, the world clock widget 5414c is added to the placement location 5410c, and displayed concurrently with a resized recommended contacts widget 5414a of the messages application and the nearby widget 5414b of the maps application, e.g.., because the added data makes the relevance (determined by the computer — system) of multiple widgets less clear than a moment before (e.g., calendar event is still coming up in 15 minutes). In addition, the recommended applications widget 5055 is updated to show the application icon of a telephony application to make it more convenient for the user to call Danny as requested in the message. The recommended contacts in the recommended contacts widget 5414a is also updated to include an avatar of Danny to make it easier for the user to contact Danny via text message. The world clock widget 5414c is updated to show the local time at the user’s location as well as the local time in London. Since the placement locations for displaying the recommended applications widget 5055, the UK weather widget 5412c, and the world clock widget 5414c are updated, update indicators 5416b, 5416a, and 5416c are displayed at their corresponding placement locations.
[00299] [00299] Figure 5D6 illustrates that, at a later time (e.g., T=6:25PM), after the user has locked the screen and has just woken the display of the computer system again, a wake screen user interface 5384 is displayed. An unlocking input by a contact 5692 (e.g., an upward edge swipe input, or another input that dismisses the lock screen or wake screen of a device, etc.) is detected on the wake screen user interface 5384.
[00301] [00301] Figure 5DB8 illustrates that, at a later time (e.g., T=10:00AM the next day), the page 5404 is displayed while the current location is at the local airport and the current time is close to the arrival time of a flight AFX from London. Based on the new context data (e.g., current location at the airport, current time is near flight arrival time, etc.) and the existing context data that is still relevant (e.g., the message about the arrival of Danny from London, and the request for the call, etc.), the computer system determines that a flight status widget 5412f of a flight application is most likely to be useful to the user at the current time, and utilizes the wildcard slot of the placement location 5410b to display the flight status widget 5412f at the placement location 5410b. The content of the flight status widget 5412f is updated to show the flight status of a flight arriving from London at 11:35AM, for example. In addition, the computer system determines that the user may very likely need a ride hailing service to pick up Danny, and utilizes the wildcard slot of the placement location 5410c to display a ride hailing widget of a ride hailing application at the placement location 5410c. The computer system also determines that the recommended contacts widget 5414f of the messages application and the world clock widget 5414c of the clock application may also be useful at this time, and display them concurrently with the ride hailing widget 5414d within the placement location 5410c. The content of the ride hailing widget 5414d is updated to show a suggested destination of “home” and the content of the world clock widget 5414c is updated to show the current time locally and in London. As shown in Figure SDS, the suggested applications are also updated to show the application icons for the maps application, the weather application, the telephony application, and the camera application, which are determined to be relevant to the current context, and do not have a corresponding widget on the same page. In Figure 5D8, the computer system also switches the widget displayed at placement location 5410d from the second widget 5310h of application 1 to the — first widget 5310i of the application 2, e.g., according to an autorotation schedule associated with the placement location 5410d. Due to the update made to the placement locations 5410a, 5410b, 5410c, and 5410d, the update indicators 54162, 5416b, 5416c, and 5410d are displayed at the corner of their corresponding placement locations.
[00302] [00302] Figure 5D8 also shows that an input by a contact 5415 is detected on the avatar of Danny in the recommended contacts widget 5414a of the messages application, and in response to the input by the contact 5415, the computer system launches the messages application and displays a messaging user interface 5386 for sending a text message to 120
[00303] [00303] Figure 5D10 illustrates that, after the messages application is dismissed, the page 5404 is redisplayed with updates to the placement locations on the page 5404. In particular, the placement location 5410c is updated to remove the recommended contact widget 5414a because the user has just finished using the messages application and dismissed — the messages application. The suggested applications widget 5055 is updated to include the application icon of the messages application so the messages application is still easily accessible to the user. Other application icons in the recommended applications widget 5055 are also updated optionally based on the current context. In the placement location 5410b, the flight status widget 5412f remains most relevant in light of the current time and location (e.g., at the airport and close to the arrival time of the flight from London) and continues to be displayed in the wildcard slot of the placement location 5410b. After the removal of the recommended contacts widget 5414a and the world clock widget 5414c from the placement location 5410c, the computer system determines that the user may wish to preview a route of the drive from the airport to home or look up another stop along the route (e.g., a place for lunch), and accordingly the relevance (determined by the computer system) of the nearby widget 5414b is increased and displayed concurrently with the ride hailing widget 5414d in the placement location 5410c. Due to the updates to the placement locations 5410a and 5410b, update indicators 5416a and 5416b are displayed at corresponding placement locations.
[00305] [00305] In Figure 5D11, another upward swipe input by a contact 5695 is detected on widget(s) currently displayed at the placement location 5410c, and in response to the upward swipe input by the contact 5695, the computer system replaces the currently displayed widget(s) with another widget from the widget stack associated with the placement location 5410c. In this example, the next widget in the sequence of widgets in the widget stack (e.g., a cyclic sequence) after the wildcard widget is the local weather widget 5406. Accordingly, the computer system replaces display of the widget(s) currently displayed at the placement location 5410c with the local weather widget 5406, as shown in Figure 5D12. In some embodiments, if the currently displayed widget at the placement location 5410c is not the wildcard widget, or does not contain the wildcard widget, the computer system selects the next widget (e.g., world clock widget) in the stack relative to the currently displayed widget (e.g., local weather widget) in the navigation direction of the input to replace the currently displayed widget at the placement location 5410c. Because the update to the placement location 5410c is due to manual input, the update indicator 5416a for the placement location is optionally not displayed.
[00306] [00306] Figures SE1-5E32 illustrate example user interfaces (e.g., a page of a home screen user interface and in a stack-specific configuration user interface, etc.) for interacting — with a plurality of user interface objects containing application content that are associated with a common placement location (e.g., a widget stack or mini application object stack, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00307] [00307] Figures SE1-5E3 illustrate example user interfaces for interacting with widgets and widget stacks in a multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. Figure SE1 shows a respective user-arranged page 5202 of a multipage home screen user interface (also referred to as "user-arranged home screen 5202”), including a plurality of application icons (e.g., application icons 5008a-5008k), and one or more widgets (e.g., widget 5022j) and/or widget stacks (e.g., widget stack 5024b) arranged in a preset layout (e.g., on a 6x4 grid for application icons, with placement locations for widgets and widget stacks specified in terms of full rows and half rows of the 6x4 grid). A widget stack includes multiple widgets corresponding to different applications and only a subset of the multiple widgets (e.g., one widget, two widgets, etc.) displayed at the placement location of 122
[00308] [00308] In Figure SE1, the device 100 displays the user-arranged home screen 5202 in a normal operation mode (e.g., a normal mode, in some embodiments, provides the ordinary functions of application icons and widgets (e.g., a tap input on an application icon or widget causes display of an application corresponding to the application icon or widget). In the normal operation mode, positions of the application icons and widgets on the user-arranged home screen 5202 (and other pages of the multipage home screen user interface) cannot be adjusted in response to drag and drop inputs directed to the application icons and widgets. As shown in Figure SE1, the device 100 detects a swipe input by a contact 6100 in a first — direction at a location of the widget stack 5024b (e.g., an upward edge swipe on widget stack 5024b). In some embodiments, the widget stack 5024b is visually distinguished from an individual widget (e.g., widget 5022j) upon touch-down or swipe of the contact 6100 at the location of the widget stack 5024b. In some embodiments, upon detecting touch-down or movement of the contact 6100, the device 100 reveals edges of one of more widgets included in the widget stack 5024b underneath the currently displayed widget (e.g., widget 5022g) in the widget stack.
[00309] [00309] Figures SE2-5E3 illustrate that, in response to detecting the swipe input by the contact 6100 at the location of the widget stack 5024b (e.g., as shown in Figure SE2) and in accordance with a direction of the swipe input by the contact 6100, the device 100 replaces — the currently displayed widget (e.g., widget 5022g) with another widget in the stack (e.g., a widget that is next to the currently displayed widget in the stack (e.g., widget 5022k), as shown in Figure 5E3). In some embodiments, widget indicator icons 5330 are displayed 123
[00310] [00310] Figures 5E3-5E9 illustrate an example process for adding a widget to a widget stack in the respective page 5202 of the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance — with some embodiments. Figures SE3-5E9 also illustrates movement of a widget stack and application icons on the respective page of the multipage home screen user in response to removal of a widget from its original placement location on the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00311] [00311] In Figure 5E3, the user-arranged page 5202 of the multipage home screen user interface includes a plurality of application icons (e.g., application icons 5008a-5008h) arranged in two full rows with four application icons each, followed by a 2x2 sized widget 5022j and a 2x2 sized widget stack 5024b arranged side by side. Below the 2x2 sized widget 5022j and the 2x2 sized widget stack 5024b is a single partial row with three application icons (e.g., application icons 5008i-5008k). The device 100 detects touch-down of a contact — 6102 at a location of widget 5022j on the touch-screen 112. In response to detecting the contact 6102 and in accordance with a determination that selection criteria are met (e.g., the contact 6102 has not moved by more than a threshold amount during a threshold amount of 124
[00312] [00312] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a input that corresponds to a — request to enter the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., a touch-hold input on an application icon or widget that meets a first time threshold, a touch-hold input on an unoccupied area on a page of a home screen user interface that meets a second time threshold, a touch-hold input that meets a third time threshold followed by a drag input on an application icon or widget, a light press input followed by a drag input on an application icon or widget, etc.), the device enters into the first reconfiguration mode and generates a non-visual output (e.g., tactile output 5092) and/or visual feedback (e.g., animates the application icons in home screen 5202’) to indicate that the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., the icon reconfiguration mode) is activated. In some embodiments, after the device 100 enters the first reconfiguration mode, the widget stack 5024b is displayed with a visual indication (e.g., the edges of one or more lower widgets in the stack 5024b are visible, as shown in Figure SE4) that multiple widgets are present in the stack, even while the stack is not touched or currently selected. In Figure SE4, the device 100 highlights the page navigation element 5004 on the user-arranged page 5202’ when the page is displayed in the first reconfiguration mode.
[00313] [00313] In the first reconfiguration mode, a user interface object corresponding to an application (e.g., an application icon, widget, or widget stack) can be dragged and repositioned in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., by dropping it onto a placement location for the user interface object. When a user interface object corresponding 125
[00314] [00314] For example, in Figure SE4, while the widget 5022; remains selected, the device 100 detects movement of the contact 6102 toward the widget stack 5024b. In response to detecting the movement of the contact 6102 by more than a threshold distance from a touch-down location of the contact 6102, the device 100 moves the widget 6022j from its original placement location on the left of the widget stack 5024b in accordance with the movement of the contact 6102. In some embodiments, an existing widget stack can be a drop off location for a dragged widget if a size of the widget stack corresponds to (e.g., is equal to, is larger than, etc.) a size of the dragged widget. As shown in Figures SES5-5E6, the widget stack 5024b does not move out of its current placement location when the dragged widget 5022j is moved to and hovered over the placement location of the widget stack 5024b. In accordance with a determination that liftoff of the contact 6102 is detected while the widget 5022) is over the placement location of the widget stack 5024b (e.g., overlapping by at least a threshold amount with the widget stack 5024b displayed at the placement location), the widget 5022j is dropped onto the widget stack 5024b and becomes the currently displayed widget in the widget stack 5024b. In some embodiments, a widget dropped onto a widget stack becomes the last widget in the widget stack, and consequently, the widget 5022; 126
[00315] [00315] In some embodiments, the device 100 uses a hover input (e.g., the contact of a — drag input having less than a threshold amount of movement at a respective location during a threshold amount of time) and/or a hover location to disambiguate between an intent to insert a dragged widget to an existing widget stack and an intent to move the dragged widget to the placement location of the existing widget stack without adding the dragged widget to the widget stack. For example, if the contact of a drag input is kept substantially stationary over and slows down significantly near a peripheral portion of a placement location that is occupied by another widget or widget stack for at least the threshold amount of time, a hover input is detected and an intent to move the dragged widget to the placement location is recognized by the device 100; and as a result, the widget or widget stack moves out of the placement location to make room for the dragged widget to be dropped at the placement — location without creating a stack and without being added to an existing widget stack. If the contact is kept substantially stationary over a central portion of the placement location that is occupied by another widget or widget stack for at least the threshold amount of time, a hover input is detected over the widget stack and an intent to insert the dragged widget into the existing widget stack at the placement location is recognized by the device 100; and as a — result, the widget or widget stack stays in the placement location and is optionally enlarged or moves in the z-direction toward the dragged object (e.g., as shown in Figure 5E6) to prompt the user that the dragged widget can be dropped into the existing widget stack or be merged with the existing widget at the placement location into a new stack. In some embodiments, other ways of disambiguating the intent to move a widget to a placement location occupied — by another widget or widget stack and the intent to add the widget to another widget or widget stack are possible. For example, hovering over a widget stack or widget causes the widget stack or widget to move out of its placement location to allow a dragged widget to be 127
[00316] [00316] In some embodiments, when a widget (e.g., widget 5022j) is dragged on a user-arranged page of a home screen user interface in response to user input, the device 100 provides visual feedback regarding how application icons and/or widgets will be repositioned as a result of the movement and/or repositioning of the dragged widget, before the widget is dropped. For example, as shown in Figures SES and 5E6, application icons on the home screen 5202’ are automatically grouped into 2x2 blocks in accordance with the size of the dragged widget 5022j. In particular, as shown in Figures SES and 5E6, the application icons 5008i-5008k are automatically organized from a single row into a 2x2 block, without the widget 5022) ever being dragged to the area occupied by the application icons 5008i-5008;. The organization of the single row of application icons into the 2x2 block provides a visual indication to the user about how the application icons will be reflowed on the current page of the home screen user interface in response to repositioning of the dragged widget on the — current page of the home screen user interface. As shown in Figure SE7, after the dragged widget 5022) is dropped onto the widget stack 5024b and becomes part of the widget stack 5024b, the updated widget stack 5024b moves from its original placement location toward the placement location vacated by the widget 5022), while the 2x2 block of application icons 5008i-5008k moves toward the placement location vacated by the updated widget stack 5024b. In Figure SES, the updated widget stack 5024b is reflowed within the page 5202 to the original placement location of the widget 5022), and application icons 5008i-5008k are reflowed as a 2x2 block to occupy the previous placement location of widget stack 5024b. Additional details of how application icons and/or widgets are moved and repositioned in the pages of a home screen user interface in response to movement of widgets are described, for — example, with regards to Figure SH1-5H76 and accompanying descriptions.
[00317] [00317] In Figure SES, a user input that corresponds to a request to exit the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., a tap input by a contact 6104 detected at a location corresponding 128
[00318] [00318] Also as shown in Figure SEY, in some embodiments, widget stack 5024b has automatic switching of widgets enabled. With passage of time, widget 50221 replaces widget 5022i as the currently displayed widget of the widget stack 5024b at the new placement — location of the widget stack 5024b. The widget 50221 is the first widget in the widget stack 5024b, as indicated by the highlighting of widget indicator icon 5330d. In Figure 5E9, a user input that corresponds to a request to enter the first reconfiguration mode (e.g. a touch-hold input by a contact 6106 on an unoccupied area of the user-arranged page 5202, a touch-hold input on an application icon or the widget stack 5024b, etc.) is detected. In response to the — user input that corresponds to the request to enter the first reconfiguration mode, the device 100 reenters the first reconfiguration mode, as shown in Figure SE10.
[00319] [00319] Figures SE10-5E20 illustrate interactions with an example stack-specific configuration user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00320] [00320] In Figure SE10, a user input that corresponds to a request to display a stack- specific configuration user interface for the widget stack 5024b (e.g, a tap input by a contact 6108 on the widget stack 5024b while the user-arranged page is in the first reconfiguration mode) is detected. In response to the user input that corresponds to the request to display the stack-specific configuration user interface for the widget stack 5024b, the device 100 displays a stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 for the widget stack 5024b, as shown in Figure SE11. In some embodiments, a touch-hold input by a contact that is detected at a location corresponding to the widget stack 5024b triggers display of a quick action menu that includes an option (e.g., “configure widget stack”), that when selected by a tap input, causes display of the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 as well. In some embodiments, the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 is displayed as an overlay above a deemphasized (e.g., blurred, darkened, etc.) page of the home screen user interface from which the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 was invoked, and dismissal of the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 (e.g., in response to activation of 129
[00321] [00321] Figure SE11 shows a number of inputs by various contacts and illustrates different interactions with the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026, in accordance with some embodiments. The stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 concurrently — displays representations of the at least two widgets present in a corresponding widget stack (e.g., widget stack 5024b). In some embodiments, widget representations shown in the stack- specific configuration user interface 5026 are reduced scale images of the widgets in the widget stack. In some embodiments, the widget representations are functioning widgets that include live application content from their corresponding applications. In some embodiments, widget representations are ordered within the stack-specific configuration user interface in accordance with the ordinal position of their corresponding widgets within the stack (e.g., the top widget in a widget stack will be displayed as the first widget representation in the stack- specific configuration user interface, the bottom widget in the widget stack will be displayed as the last widget representation in the stack-specific configuration user interface, etc.). In — some embodiments, the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 has an adjustable size in at least one dimension (e.g., vertically) and/or is scrollable in that dimension to display additional widget representations that do not fit within the display area of the stack-specific configuration user interface. In some embodiments, a respective widget representation has a corresponding deletion affordance (e.g., deletion affordance 5027 for widget representation 50221’ corresponding to widget 50221). In some embodiments, one or more controls for adjusting one or more widget stack configuration options (e.g., “widget suggestion” and/or “smart switching”, etc.) are displayed in the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026. In some embodiments, a “widget suggestion” control (e.g., a toggle control 5360, a radio button, etc.), when activated, changes the enabled and/or disabled state of a function that includes in the widget stack a wildcard widget or placeholder widget that is replaced by a system-selected widget at the time of display in the widget stack 5024b. Additional details of how a wildcard widget is updated and displayed in a widget stack are described with regards 130
[00322] [00322] In some embodiments, contacts 6114, 6116, and 6118 in Figure SE11 are detected at a location corresponding to a widget representation (e.g., the representation 50221’ of the widget 50221) in the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026. In some embodiments, the contacts 6114, 6116, and 6118 represent inputs that are detected at the same location on the same widget representation 50221” at different times. In some embodiments, contacts 6114, 6116, and 6118 are a same contact that, upon meeting different criteria, cause the device to perform different actions with regards to widget 50221. In Figure SE11, contacts 6112 and 6110 are also detected at various locations within the stack-specific configuration user interface. In some embodiments, the device 100 detects a contact, and depending on one or more characteristics of the contact (e.g., location (e.g., initial, current, path history, etc.), duration, movement direction, movement pattern (e.g., path, pause, hover, etc.), intensity, input progression relative to various gesture recognition criteria, etc.) as evaluated against various sets of criteria corresponding to different operations, the device performs the operation for which the corresponding criteria are met by the contact. The contacts shown in Figure SE11 represent inputs that meet respective sets of criteria for different operations provided by the stack-specific configuration user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00323] [00323] Figures SE11-5E13 illustrate an example of navigating the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 in response to a scrolling input (e.g., a swipe input by the contact 6110 in a first scrolling direction (e.g., upward, downward, etc.)), in accordance with — some embodiments. In Figure SE11, an upward swipe input by the contact 6110 is detected in the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 (e.g., beginning in an unoccupied area of the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 or beginning from a widget 131
[00324] [00324] Figure SE11 followed by Figure SE14 illustrate deletion of a widget from a widget stack, in accordance with some embodiments. As shown in Figure SE11, a tap input by the contact 6112 is detected on the deletion affordance 5027 associated with the widget
[00325] [00325] Figure SE15 following Figure SE11 illustrate accessing a widget-specific configuration user interface for a selected widget in the widget stack from the stack-specific configuration user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. As shown in Figure SE11, a tap input by the contact 6114 is detected on the representation 50221” of the widget 5022’. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6114 on the representation 50221 of the widget 50221, the device 100 displays a widget-specific configuration user interface 5352 with a plurality of selectable configuration options (e.g., widget options 5394a-5394c (e.g., size, content update frequency, available application function, whether user input is enabled, etc.)) for the tapped widget 50221. In some embodiments, the widget-specific configuration user interface 5352 is displayed overlaid on a deemphasized user-arranged page 5202’ or a deemphasized stack-specific configuration user interface 5026. In some embodiments, the widget-specific configuration user interface 5352 includes a deletion affordance 5346 for deleting the widget 50221 from the widget stack 5024b. Tap inputs (e.g., inputs by contacts 6124 or 6126) detected at locations corresponding to different widget configuration options (e.g., widget option 1, widget option 2, widget option 3, etc.)) cause the device 100 to update the appearance and/or functions of the widget 50221. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure SE15, a preview 50221” of the widget 50221 is displayed in the widget-specific configuration user interface 5352 in accordance with the currently selected configuration options for the widget 50221. In some embodiments, the widget preview includes live application content (e.g., application content that is automatically updated in real-time or periodically) from the application corresponding to the widget 50221.
[00326] [00326] Figure SE16 following Figure SE11 illustrates selection of a widget representation in the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 in response to a touch- hold input, in accordance with some embodiments. As shown in Figure 5E16, after touch- down of the contact (e.g., the contact 6114 or contact 6118, respectively) on the widget — representation 50221” for the widget 50221, in accordance with a determination that the contact has been kept substantially stationary for at least a threshold amount of time, the device selects the widget representation 50221” (e.g., as indicated by the highlighted boundary of the widget representation 50221”). In some embodiments, the selected widget representation is lifted up from its original location toward the contact (e.g., the contact 6114 or contact 6118, respectively).
[00327] [00327] Figures SE16-5E19 following Figure SE11 illustrate an example process for reordering the widgets in a widget stack using the stack-specific configuration user interface of the widget stack. In Figure SE17, after the widget representation 50221’ is selected by the touch-hold input by the contact 6114, the device detects movement of the contact 6114 in a first direction (e.g., a downward direction, a rightward direction, a direction going from the top toward the bottom of the stack, an upward direction, etc.) through the sequence of widget representations for widgets in the widget stack 5024b. In response to the movement of the contact 6114, as shown in Figures SE17-5E18, the widget representation 50221" is dragged downward past the widget representation 5022g” for the widget 5022g. As shown in Figures SEI18-5E19, lift-off of the contact 6114 is detected when the widget representation 50221” is dragged to a location between the widget representation 5022g” and the widget representation 5022k’ for the widget 5022k. In response to detecting lift-off of the contact 6114, the widget representation 50221” is repositioned in between the widget representation 5022g” and the widget representation 5022k’. As a result, the order of the widgets in the widget stack 5024b — is adjusted accordingly (e.g., the widget 5022g is the top widget in the stack, and the widget 50221 is now the second widget in the stack and, optionally, the currently displayed widget of the widget stack as well (e.g., widget indicator icon 5330d is highlighted)). In some embodiments, the representation 50221” of the widget 50221 is semi-transparent or translucent while it is being dragged within the widget stack 5024b. In some embodiments, the widget representation 50221’ remains opaque during the drag input by the contact 5116.
[00328] [00328] Returning to Figure SE16, after a touch-hold threshold is met by the contact 6118 (e.g., the contact 6118 is held substantially stationary for at least a threshold amount of 135
[00329] [00329] As shown in Figure SE20, in accordance with movement of the contact 6118 toward the periphery (e.g., an edge) of the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026, — the widget representation 50221” is lifted off the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 and taken out of the sequence of widget representations of the widgets in the widget stack 5024b. Figure SE20 illustrates an intermediate state in which, as the widget representation 50221” is moved toward the peripheral region of the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026, the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 gradually fades (e.g., is deemphasized visually by dimming and/or becoming more translucent). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the contact 6118 is hovered in the peripheral region of the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 (or near the edge of the display) for at least a threshold amount of time, the device 100 ceases to display the stack-specific configuration user interface 5026 and the previously deemphasized — user-arranged page 5202’ is restored (e.g., becomes brighter, more color saturated, more clear, etc.), as shown in Figure SE21.
[00330] [00330] Figures SE21 and 5E22 follow Figure SE20 and illustrate intermediate states showing the representation 50221” of the widget 50221 being dragged within the user- arranged page 5202’ in the first reconfiguration mode in accordance with movement of — contact 6118. As the representation of the widget representation 50221” is moved in the user- arranged page 5202’, in accordance with a determination that the widget representation 50221 is approaching a potential placement location that is currently occupied by existing 136
[00331] [00331] In some embodiments, in response to lift-off of the contact 6118 and in conjunction with insertion of the widget 50221 in the placement location at the top right — corner of the page 5202”, the device 100 displays an animation that propagates some visual effect (e.g., simulated wave motion, propagating light waves, etc.) across the page 5202’ in direction radiating away from the placement location of the widget 50221. In some embodiments, such animation is not displayed when an existing widget is moved from one placement location to another placement location on the same page. In some embodiments, — such animation is not displayed when an existing widget is moved from one placement location to another placement location on the same page or on different pages. In some embodiments, such animation is only displayed when a widget is dragged and dropped onto a 137
[00332] [00332] Figures SE23-5E32 illustrate examples of movement of widgets and widget stacks within and between respective pages of the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00333] [00333] In Figure 5E23, following Figure SE22, widget 50221 has been placed at a placement location in the page 5202’ (and optionally removed from widget stack 5024b). In — Figure 5E23, a drag input by a contact 6132 is detected at a location corresponding to the widget 50221 in page 5202”. In some embodiments, in accordance with movement of the contact 6132, the widget 50221 is dragged within the user-arranged page 5202’ from the placement location in the upper right corner of the page 5202” to the placement location in the upper left corner of the page 5202”, as shown in Figures SE24-5E25. In Figure SE24, the — widget 5022] optionally moves across the page 5202” on a display layer above the 2x2 block formed by application icons 50082, 5008b, 5008e, and 5008f. When the 2x2 block formed by the application icons 5008a, 5008b, 5008e, and 5008f moves as a group to the right side of the display, the ordinal positions of the application icons within the 2x2 block remain unchanged. In some such embodiments, the widget 50221 becomes semi-transparent or translucent during the drag input to reveal the locations of any application icons moving underneath the display layer of the dragged widget 5022. In some embodiments, when an existing widget is dragged from one location to another location in a user-arranged page, the last single row of application icons at the bottom of the page remains in a single row, and does not move into a block unless the widget is dragged near the single row.
[00334] [00334] In Figure SE25, a drag input by a contact 6134 is detected at a location corresponding to the placement location of the widget 50221 in the upper left corner of the page 5202’. In some embodiments, the contact 6134 is either a new contact that is detected 138
[00335] [00335] In Figure SE30, following Figure SE29, lift-off of the contact 6134 is detected while the widget 50221 is dragged over the user-arranged page 5204”, e.g., while the widget 50221’ is near the placement location in the upper left corner of the page 5204’. In response to detecting the lift-off of the contact 6134, the widget 50221 is placed in the placement location in the upper left corner of the page 5204”, while existing application icons 5008r-5008 us on the page 5204” are reflow as a 2x2 block formed by application icons 5008r, 5008s, 5008v, and 5008w, and a partial row formed by application icons 5008t and 5008u. In Figure 5E30, a user input corresponding to a request to exist the first reconfiguration mode is detected (e.g., a tap input by a contact 6136 is detected at a location corresponding to a done button shown in page 5204”in the first reconfiguration mode, an upward edge swipe input is detected near — the bottom edge of the display, a tap input is detected in an unoccupied area on the page 5204’, etc.). In response to detecting the input that corresponds to the request to exit the first reconfiguration mode, the device 100 terminates the first reconfiguration mode and displays the user-arranged home screen 5204 in the normal mode, as shown in Figure 5E31.
[00336] [00336] In Figure SE31, a page navigation input (e.g., a rightward swipe input by a contact 6138, a tap or swipe on the page indicator icon 5004, etc. ) is detected while the page 5204 is displayed. In response to the page navigation input, the device 100 displays the page 5202 of the home screen user interface, as shown in Figure S5E32. Figure SE31, shows that 139
[00337] [00337] In some embodiments, the process shown in Figures SE27-5E30 can continue directly from the state shown in Figure SE22, and the contact 6134 shown in Figures SE27- SE29 is the same contact as the contact 6118 shown in Figure SE27. In other words, a widget can be dragged from a widget stack and dropped into a page that is different from the page in which the widget stack is displayed. In some embodiments, if the widget is dropped into a page from the widget selection and configuration user interface, a widget-specific configuration user interface, or a stack-specific configuration user interface, rather than moved from another page, the device displays an animated transition showing a visual effect being propagated from the placement location of the widget across the page (e.g., propagating from the upper left corner of the page 5204” in multiple directions across the page 5204”).
[00338] [00338] Figures SF1-5F30 illustrate example user interfaces for interacting with multiple user-arranged pages of a home screen user interface (e.g., in an icon reconfiguration mode, in a page editing mode, and when transitioning between the two modes, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00339] [00339] Figure 5F1 illustrates a first user-arranged home screen 5302 of a multipage — home screen user interface currently displayed in a normal mode. When a user-arranged home screen is displayed in the normal mode, the placement locations of the user interface objects on the home screen cannot be directly modified (e.g., the user cannot reorganize and/or delete the application icons or widgets on the home screen in the normal mode). A user interface object on the home screen in the normal mode performs its normal function, > e.g., launching a corresponding application, when activated by an input that meets first criteria (e.g., a tap input by a contact on the user interface object, an in-air tap input detected in conjunction with a gaze input directed to the user interface object, etc.). In this example, the multipage home screen user interface includes four user-arranged pages or home screens (e.g., including the first user-arranged home screen 5302), as indicated by the four page indicator icons 5004 (e.g., page indicator icons 5004a-5004d) in the page navigation element
[00340] [00340] Figure SF2 illustrates that, in response to the movement of the contact 6200 with more than the threshold amount of distance from its initial location in Figure SF1, the multipage home screen user interface enters a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode). The computer system displays the first user-arranged home screen 5302 in the first reconfiguration mode (now labeled as 5302”), where location of application icons on the first user-arranged home screen 5302 can be adjusted by dragging and dropping the corresponding application icons. In some embodiments, an add widget button 5094 is — displayed on the user-arranged home screen 5302 (and other user-arranged home screens when the multipage home screen user interface is in the first reconfiguration mode). Activation of the add widget button 5094 causes a widget selection and configuration user interface to be displayed, and new widgets can be selected from the widget selection and configuration user interface and placed on the first user-arranged home screen 5302. In — conjunction with displaying the first user-arranged home screen 5302 in the first reconfiguration mode, the computer system highlights the page navigation element 5004 to indicate that additional functionality has become available when the highlighted page navigation element 5004 is activated by an input that meets preset criteria (e.g., by a tap input, by a tap-hold input, etc.). In some embodiments, when the page navigation element 5004 is not highlighted and the home screen user interface is in the normal mode, interaction with the page navigation element in accordance with different preset criteria (e.g., swiping through the sequence of page indicator icons in directions corresponding to the navigation directions through the pages of the home screen user interface, tapping on individual page indicators, etc.) causes navigation through the pages of the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, when the page navigation element is highlighted in the first reconfiguration mode, a tap input on the page navigation element no longer causes navigation to a page corresponding to the tapped page indicator icon, and instead, it causes the computer 141
[00341] [00341] Figure 5F3 illustrates that, while the user-arranged page 5302’ is displayed in the first reconfiguration mode, the computer system detects a tap input by a contact 6202 at a location corresponding to the highlighted page navigation element 5004 on the first user- arranged home screen 5302” displayed in the first reconfiguration mode.
[00342] [00342] Figures 5F4-5F6 illustrate that, in response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6202 at the location corresponding to the highlighted page navigation element 5004 in Figure 5F3, the computer system displays an animated transition from the first user- arranged home screen 5302’ in the first reconfiguration mode to a page editing user interface 5305 corresponding to the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., home screen reconfiguration mode). During the animated transition, the first user-arranged home screen 5302’ that was displayed reduces in size and moves toward a position in a preset layout on the display that corresponds to the ordinal position of the page 5302 in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., given that the page 5302 is the first page in the sequence of pages of the home screen user interface, the page 5302’ shrinks and moves toward the first ordinal position in a final 2x2 grid on the display (e.g., the upper left corner slot in the layout)). It appears as if the currently displayed page 5302” is zooming out from the current display, and representations of additional user-arranged home screens (e.g., representations 5306”, 5308”, and 5309” of the other pages 5306, 5308, and 5309 of the home screen user interface) gradually come into view and are displayed with the representation 5302” of the first user-arranged home screen — 5302 according to a predefined layout (e.g., a 2x2 grid) in the page editing user interface
[00343] [00343] Figure 5F6 shows the page editing user interface 5305 corresponding to the second reconfiguration mode of the multipage home screen user interface, displayed in response to the tap input by the contact 6202 in Figure SF3. The page editing user interface 5305 displays representations of user-arranged home screen from the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., representation 5302” of the first user-arranged home screen 5302”, representation 5306” of the second user-arranged home screen 5306”, representation 5308” of 143
[00344] [00344] Figure 5F6 further illustrates that the computer system detects a tap input by a — contact 6204 at a location corresponding to the selection affordance 5312d associated with the representation 5309” of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309” on the page editing user interface 5305.
[00345] [00345] Figure 5F7 illustrates that in response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6204, the representation 5309” of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309” becomes visually de-emphasized (e.g., darkened, blurred, becoming more translucent, etc.) relative to other representations of user-arranged home screens on the page editing user interface 5305, and the selection affordance 5312d becomes unchecked to indicate the unselected state of the 144
[00346] [00346] Figure 5F8 follows Figure SF7 and illustrates that, in response to the tap input by the contact 6208 on the representation 5309” of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309’ that is currently in the hidden state (e.g., not accessible in the home screen user interface outside of the second reconfiguration mode), the computer system maintains display of the page editing user interface 5305 and does not navigate to the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309 corresponding to the representation of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309”. In some embodiments, the computer system maintains display of the page editing user interface 5305 in accordance with a determination that the tap input by the — contact 6208 is on a representation of a home screen that is in the unselected or hidden state (e.g., with its associated selection affordance in the unselected state). In some embodiments, in response to the tap input on a representation of a home screen that is in the unselected or hidden state, the computer system displays an enlarged version of the representation to show the application icons on the home screen that is in the unselected or hidden state, but does not exit the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., the page editing user interface 5305 is optionally displayed underneath the enlarged version of the representation of the hidden page).
[00347] [00347] Figure 5F9 follows Figure 5F8, and illustrates that the computer system detects a tap input by a contact 6212 at a location corresponding to the selection affordance 5312a associated with the representation 5302” of the first user-arranged home screen 5302” — on the page editing user interface 5305.
[00348] [00348] Figure 5F10 illustrates that, in response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6212 in Figure 5F9, the representation 5302” of the first user-arranged home screen 145
[00349] [00349] Figure 5F11 follows Figure 5F7 and illustrates that, in response to the tap input by the contact 6206 at the location corresponding to the representation of the second user-arranged home screen 5306’ in Figure 5F7, which is not in the unselected or hidden state in the page editing user interface 5305, the computer system ceases to display the page editing user interface 5305 (e.g., exits the second reconfiguration mode of the home screen — user interface) and displays the second user-arranged home screen 5306 corresponding to the representation 5306” of the second user-arranged home screen 5306” in the first reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, the computer system ceases display of the page editing user interface 5305 and reenters the first reconfiguration mode of the home screen user interface in accordance with a determination that the tap input by the contact 6206 is on —a representation of a home screen that is in the selected or unhidden state (e.g., with its associated selection affordance in the selected state). As shown in Figure SF11, the highlighted page navigation element 5004 in the user-arranged home screen 5306” includes only three page indicator icons (e.g., page indicator icons 5004a, 5004b, and 5004c corresponding to the first user-arranged home screen 5302, the second user-arranged home screen 5306, and the third user-arranged home screen 5308, respectively), as the fourth user- arranged home screen 5309 is temporarily hidden and not accessible in the multipage home screen user interface outside of the second reconfiguration mode. The page indicator icon 5004b is highlighted as the corresponding user-arranged home screen — the second user- arranged home screen 5306” — is the currently displayed page of the multipage home screen — user interface. In Figure SF11, the computer system further detects two distinct swipe inputs by a contact 6214 (e.g., a rightward swipe) and a contact 6216 (e.g., a leftward swipe), respectively, in two separate scenarios.
[00350] [00350] Figure 5F12 follows Figure SF11 and illustrates that, in response to the rightward swipe input by the contact 6214, the computer system ceases to display the second user-arranged home screen 5306’ and displays the first user-arranged home screen 5302’, in the first reconfiguration mode. The highlighted page navigation element 5004 updates to — show that the page indicator icon 5004a corresponding to the first user-arranged home screen 5302 is highlighted. The computer system further detects another rightward swipe input by a contact 6218 on the first user-arranged home screen 5302”.
[00351] [00351] Figure 5F13 illustrates that in response to the rightward swipe input by the contact 6218 on the first user-arranged home screen 5302”, the computer system displays a widget screen 5053 (e.g., a user interface that is also displayed when swiping rightward from a wake screen user interface or lock screen user interface). The widget screen 5053 includes a collection of widgets, such as a suggested applications widget 5055, and various widgets corresponding to different applications (e.g., a map widget 5316b corresponding to a map application, a weather widget 5316c corresponding to a weather application, a message widget 5316d corresponding to a message application, and a calendar widget 5316e corresponding to a calendar application, etc.). In some embodiments, the widget screen 5353 is displayed in a reconfiguration mode with respective deletion affordances 5318 (e.g., deletion affordances 5318a-5318d) being associated with corresponding widgets of a set of widgets that are selected for inclusion in the widget screen 5353 by a user. In some embodiments, the widgets displayed on the widget screen 5353 are ordered in accordance with a measure of relevance as determined by the computer system based on the current context (e.g., location, time, user interactions, etc.) and usage patterns (e.g., individuals usage pattern, average usage pattern across a large number of users, etc.). In some embodiments, the widget screen 5353 includes a search input field 5320 for inputting search — criteria for searching for application content, application icons, and/or widgets on the computer system and, optionally, on a remote network. In some embodiments, the widget screen 5353 is displayed as an overlay on top of a de-emphasized first-available user- arranged home screen of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., as an overlay on top of the de-emphasized first user-arranged home screen 5302’ if the first user-arranged home screen 5302 is no hidden and is the first unhidden page of the multipage home screen user interface). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the widget screen 5353 as a page (e.g., preceding the first-available user-arranged home screen) of the multipage home 147
[00352] [00352] Figure 5F14 follows Figure SF11, and illustrates that in response to the leftward swipe input by the contact 6216, the computer system ceases to display the second user-arranged home screen 5306’ and displays the third user-arranged home screen 5308’ of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode. The computer system further detects a leftward swipe input by a contact 6220 on the third user-arranged — home screen 5308’ in the first reconfiguration mode.
[00353] [00353] Figure 5F15 follows Figure 5F14, and illustrates that in response to the leftward swipe input by the contact 6220, the computer system displays an application library user interface 5054” overlaying the last-available user-arranged home screen (e.g., third user- arranged home screen 5308”) of the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, instead of the application library user interface 5054”, the computer system displays a system-arranged home screen 5054 of the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, when the system-arranged home screen 5054 or the application library user interface 5054” is displayed while the home screen user interface is in the first reconfiguration mode, application icons and/or widgets present on the system-arranged home screen 5054 and the application library user interface 5054” can be dragged from the system- arranged home screen or the application library user interface to a user-selected placement location on one of the user-arranged pages or on the widget screen. In some embodiments, 148
[00354] [00354] Figure 5F16 follows Figure 5F7, and illustrates that in response to the upward edge swipe input by the contact 6210, the computer system ceases to display the page editing user interface 5305 and displays the user-arranged home screen 5302’ that was displayed immediately before the second reconfiguration mode is entered. The computer system displays the user-arranged home screen 5302” in the first reconfiguration mode. In this example, the computer system displays the first user-arranged home screen 5302” because the first user-arranged home screen 5302” was displayed immediately before the page editing user interface 5305 was displayed (e.g., due to the tap input by the contact 6202 on the page navigation element 5004 on the first user-arranged home screen 5302” in Figure 5F3). The page navigation element 5004 is updated to show only three page indicator icons 5004a- 5004c, corresponding to the first user-arranged home screen 5302’, the second user-arranged home screen 5306”, and the third user-arranged home screen 5308”, respectively. The page indicator icon 5004d is not shown as the corresponding user-arranged home screen (e.g., the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309”) is in the unselected or hidden state in the page editing user interface 5305. Figure 5F16 further illustrates that the computer system detects a tap input by a contact 6222 at a location corresponding to the page navigation element 5004 — on the first user-arranged home screen 5302”. In some embodiments, when exiting the second reconfiguration mode, the computer system only transitions from the second reconfiguration mode into the first reconfiguration mode rather than directly into the normal mode. In some 149
[00355] [00355] Figure 5F17 follows Figure 5F16, and illustrates that in response to the tap input by the contact 6222, the computer system ceases to display the first user-arranged home screen 5302 and displays the page editing user interface 5305 (e.g., transitioning from the first reconfiguration mode back into the second reconfiguration mode). On the page editing — user interface 5305, the representation 5309” of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309’ is still visually de-emphasized relative to the other representations of user-arranged home screens (e.g., indicating the unselected or hidden state of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309”). The associated selection affordance 5312d is also in the unselected state. The computer system then detects a tap input by a contact 6224 at a location corresponding to the — selection affordance 5312d associated with the representation 5309” of the fourth user- arranged home screen 5309”.
[00356] [00356] Figure 5F18 illustrates that, in response to the tap input by the contact 6224 in Figure 5F17, the selection affordance 5312d becomes selected and the representation 5309” of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309” is no longer visually de-emphasized. As a — result, the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309’ is now available to be viewed in the multipage home screen user interface outside of the second reconfiguration mode. Figure SF18 also illustrates that the computer system detects a tap-and-hold input by a contact 6226 on the representation of the first user-arranged home screen 5302’, and a subsequent drag input by moving the contact 6226. In response to detecting the tap-and-hold input, the computer system selects the representation 5302” of the first user-arranged home screen 5302’ for repositioning within the sequence of representations of the pages in the home screen user interface (e.g., including pages that are currently in the unselected or hidden state). The representation 5302” of the first user-arranged home screen 5302’ can then be dragged in accordance with the subsequent movement of the contact 6226, to different locations on the page editing user interface 5305 with respect to other representations of user- arranged home screens.
[00357] [00357] Figures 5F19 to Figure SF20 illustrate that the drag input by the contact 6226 moves the representation 5302” of the first user-arranged home screen 5302’ to a location corresponding to the representation 5306” of the second user-arranged home screen 5306”. As a result, the representations of the user-arranged home screens on the page editing user interface 5305 become reordered, with the representation 5302” of the first user-arranged home screen 5302” and the representation 5306” of the second user-arranged home screen 5306’ switching places. After the user lifts off the contact 6226, the corresponding first user- arranged home screen 5302 and the second user-arranged home screen 5306 switch places in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., the first user-arranged home screen 5302 now becomes the second page in the multipage home screen user interface and the second user- arranged home screen 5306 becomes the first page of the multipage home screen user interface). In Figure SF20, the computer system further detects a tap input by a contact 6228 on the representation 5309” of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309’ in the page editing user interface 5305, where the representation 5309” has already been changed to a selected or — unhidden state by the earlier tap input by the contact 6224 (Figure SF17).
[00358] [00358] Figure SF21 illustrates that, in response to the tap input by the contact 6226 in Figure 5F20, the computer system ceases to display the page editing user interface 5305 and displays the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309” in the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., in contrast to the scenario shown in Figures SF7-5F8). The fourth user-arranged home screen 5309” includes the page navigation element 5004 with four page indicator icons, as the tap input by the contact 6224 in Figure SF17 has previously re-selected the selection affordance 5312d associated with the representation 5309” of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309” in the page editing user interface 5305. As a result, the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309 becomes unhidden and can be navigated to in the multipage home screen user interface outside of the second reconfiguration mode. In Figure 5F21, the computer system further detects an upward edge swipe input by a contact 6230 near the bottom edge of the display 112 while the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309’ is displayed in the first reconfiguration mode.
[00359] [00359] Figure 5F22 illustrates that, in response to the upward edge swipe input by the — contact 6230 in Figure 5F21, the computer system causes the fourth user-arranged home screen 5309” to exit the first reconfiguration mode and be displayed in the normal mode (e.g., the home screen user interface as a whole also transitions out of the second reconfiguration 151
[00360] [00360] Figures 5F23 to Figures 5F25 illustrates that, in response to the rightward swipe input by the contact 6232 in Figure 5F22 and subsequent rightward swipe inputs by contacts 6234 and 6236, the computer system navigates through different user-arranged home screens in the multipage home screen user interface in a navigation direction corresponding to the swipe direction of the swipe inputs (e.g., from the rightmost page in the multipage home screen user interface to the leftmost page in the multipage home screen user interface).
[00361] [00361] Figures 5F26 to 5F30 illustrate various grid configurations for displaying the representations of user-arranged home screens on the page editing user interface 5305, in — accordance with some embodiments.
[00362] [00362] In some embodiments, when the number of user-arranged home screens (e.g., including user-arranged home screens that have been hidden and user-arranged home screens that are available outside of the second reconfiguration mode) is fewer than or equal to a first preset number (e.g., four), the computer system displays the representations of the user- arranged home screens in a first preset grid (e.g., a 2x2 grid). For example, the representations of the user-arranged home screens would fill the 2x2 grid from the top row to the bottom row, and within a given row from the left column to the right column. For example, in Figure 5F26, there exist three user-arranged home screens including a hidden user-arranged home screen. As a result, the page editing user interface 5305 displays two rows with the first row having two representations 5311a-5311b of user-arranged home screens and the bottom row having one representation 5311c of user-arranged home screen.
[00363] [00363] In some embodiments, when the number of user-arranged home screens (e.g., including user-arranged home screens that have been hidden and user-arranged home screens that are available outside of the second reconfiguration mode) is greater than a first preset number (e.g., four) and fewer than or equal to a second preset number (e.g., nine), the computer system displays the representations of the user-arranged home screen in a second grid (e.g., a 3x3 grid) on a single page (e.g., a page that is fully displayed and not scrollable). The representations of the user-arranged home screens fill the 3x3 grid from the top row to the bottom row, and within a given row from the left column to the right column. For example, in Figure SF27, there exist five representations 5311d-5311h of user-arranged home screens including two representations 5311f and 5311h of user-arranged home screen in the hidden or unselected state to indicate that their corresponding pages are not accessible in the home screen user interface outside of the second reconfiguration mode. As a result, the page editing user interface 5305 displays a top row with three representations of user-arranged home screen, a middle row with two representations of user-arranged home screens, and an empty bottom row. The pages that correspond to the representations 5311d, 5311e, and 5311g that are in the selected or unhidden state are accessible in this order as shown in the page editing user interface 5305, in the multipage home screen user interface outside of the second reconfiguration mode. In Figure 5F28, there exist seven representations 53111-53110 of user-arranged home screens. As a result, the page editing user interface 5305 displays a top row with three representations 53111-5311k of user-arranged home screens, a middle row with three representations 53111-5311n of user-arranged home screens, and a bottom row with one representation 53110 of user-arranged home screen. Three representations 5311k, 5311m, and 5311n of user-arranged home screen are in the hidden or unselected state to indicate that their corresponding pages are not accessible in the home screen user interface outside of the second reconfiguration mode. The pages that correspond to the representations 53111, 53117, 53111, and 53110 that are in the selected or unhidden state are accessible in this order as shown in the page editing user interface 5305, in the multipage home screen user interface outside of the second reconfiguration mode.
[00364] [00364] In some embodiments, when the number of user-arranged home screens (e.g., including user-arranged home screens that have been hidden and user-arranged home screens that are available outside of the second reconfiguration mode) is greater than the second preset number (e.g., nine), the computer system displays the representations of the user- 153
[00365] [00365] Figures 5G1-5G31 illustrate example user interfaces for displaying and interacting with a user interface object (e.g., a suggested applications widget, a recommended applications widget, a recent apps widget, etc.) that presents application icons that are automatically selected by a computer system at a user selected location (e.g., a user-selected 154
[00366] [00366] Figure SG1 illustrates a user-arranged home screen 5350’ (e.g., a fourth user- arranged home screen 5350 in a sequence of five user-arranged home screens) of a multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode). The user-arranged home screen 5350” in the first reconfiguration mode includes a highlighted page navigation element 5004 with five page indicator icons corresponding to five user- arranged home screens in the multipage home screen user interface. The user-arranged home screen 5350” displays the add widget button 5094. The computer system further detects a tap — input by a contact 6300 at a location corresponding to the add widget button 5094 on the user-arranged home screen 5350” in the first reconfiguration mode. The user-arranged home screen 5350” includes user-arranged application icons 5008a-5008k in multiple rows.
[00367] [00367] Figure 5G2 illustrates that, in response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6300 in Figure 5G1, the computer system ceases to display the user-arranged home screen 5350’ and displays a widget selection and configuration user interface 5304. The widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 includes a plurality of preconfigured widgets of various sizes that can be selected and added to a user-arranged home screen of the multipage home screen user interface without further configuration. In some embodiments, the computer system automatically select the preconfigured widgets for display in the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 based on preset criteria (e.g., criteria based on usage frequency, usage pattern, etc. of an individual user, or a large number of users, etc.) and optionally based on the current context (e.g., location, time, recent user interactions, etc.). For example, the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 includes a suggested applications widget 5354 of a 2x4 size, two widgets (e.g., widgets 5355a and 5355b of a 2x2 — size) corresponding to an application 22, and a listing of applications that have corresponding widgets (e.g., a calendar application, a news application, etc.). Respective selection affordances are displayed for the preconfigured widgets in the widget selection and configuration user interface 5403 (e.g., selection affordance 5312a for the suggested applications widget 5354, selection affordances 5312b for widget 5310b, selection affordance 5312c for widget 5310c, etc.). A tap input on the selection affordance of a preconfigured widget changes the selection state of the corresponding preconfigured widget. The widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 as shown in Figure 5G2 shows that the 155
[00368] [00368] In some embodiments, the suggested applications widget 5354 includes two rows of application icons for automatically suggested applications with four application icons per row. In some embodiments, a different number of rows of application icons are optionally included in the suggested applications widget. As illustrated in Figure 5G2, the suggested applications widget 5354 includes application icons 5057a-5057h corresponding to eight — different applications (e.g., a Files application, a Document application, a Pages application, a Game application, a Shortcut application, a Home application, a Wallet application, and a News application). Some or all of the application icons 5057a-5057h in the suggested applications widget 5354 are automatically selected by the computer system without user input explicitly selecting those application icons. The set of application icons selected for inclusion in the suggested applications widget 5354 are automatically changed from time to time, e.g., in response to changing context (e.g., location, time, recent user interactions, etc.). After the suggested applications widget 5354 is selected (e.g., as indicated by the selection affordance 5312a being in a selected state), a tap input by a contact 6302 is detected on the add button 5359 in Figure 5G2. In some embodiments, the content shown in the preconfigured widgets in the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 are automatically updated while the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 is displayed. For example, the set of suggested applications shown in the suggested applications widget are automatically changed without user input due to changing context without user input, while the suggested applications widget 5354 is shown in the widget — selection and configuration user interface 5304. In some embodiments, the application content shown in the preconfigured widgets 5310b and 5310c is automatically updated in accordance with changes in the application 22, while the preconfigured widgets 5310b and 5310c are displayed in the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304.
[00369] [00369] Figure 5G3 illustrates that, in response to the tap input by the contact 6302 selecting the add button 5359 in Figure 5G2, the computer system inserts the selected suggested applications widget 5354 into a predefined location of the user-arranged home screen 5350’ (e.g., the home screen that was displayed immediately before displaying the 156
[00370] [00370] In some embodiments, when the user-arranged home screen 5350” is in the first reconfiguration mode, the suggested applications widget 5354 is displayed with a platter 5361 as a background, and the various suggested application icons 5057 are displayed on top of the platter 5361. Respective suggested application icons 5057 are associated with respective text labels to indicate the names of their corresponding applications. In some embodiments, when the user-arranged home screen 5350” is in the first reconfiguration mode, the suggested application icons in the suggested applications widget 5354 are of a different size (e.g., smaller, larger, etc.) compared to the user-arranged application icons (e.g., application icons 5008a-5008g) displayed directly on the user-arranged home screen 5350' in the first reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, in the first reconfiguration mode, the user-arranged application icons are animated on the page 5350”, while the system-suggested application icons 5057 in the suggested applications widget 5354 are not animated. In the first reconfiguration mode, the system-suggested application icons 5057 in the suggested applications widget 5354 are not aligned with the user-arranged application icons 5008 on the page 5350’.
[00371] [00371] In some embodiments, the application icons 5057 in the suggested applications widget 5354 are displayed with a set of distinct display properties compared to that of the user-arranged application icons on the home screen 5350” in the first reconfiguration mode. For example, the platter 5361, the suggested application icons 5057, and the text labels of the suggested application icons 5057 in the suggested applications 157
[00372] [00372] In some embodiments, when the user-arranged home screen 5350” is in the first reconfiguration mode, a user can re-arrange the user-arranged home screen 5350” by dragging the suggested applications widget 5354 to other locations on the user-arranged home screen 5350, such as re-positioning the suggested applications widget 5354 to occupy the third and fourth rows of the user-arranged home screen 5350”. In some embodiments, the computer system maintains a number of predefined locations to which the suggested applications widget 5354 cannot be placed, such as occupying the second and the third row of a home screen. In some embodiments, when the page 5350’ is in the first reconfiguration — mode, the suggested applications widget 5354 can be deleted by tapping on its associated deletion affordance.
[00373] [00373] In Figure 5G3, the computer system further detects an input that corresponds to a request to exit the first reconfiguration mode and enter the normal mode of the home screen user interface (e.g., the input is an upward edge swipe input from the bottom of the — user-arranged home screen 5350” using a contact 6304, a tap input in an unoccupied area of the home screen 5350”, etc.).
[00374] [00374] Figure 5G4 illustrates that, in response to detecting the input that corresponds to a request to exit the first reconfiguration mode and enter the normal mode of the home screen user interface (e.g., the upward edge swipe input from the bottom of the user-arranged home screen 5350” using the contact 6304, a tap input in an occupied area of the home screen 5350’, etc.) in Figure 5G3, the computer system displays the user-arranged home screen 5350 in the normal mode. In some embodiments, the suggested applications widget 5354 in the normal mode has a different appearance from that in the first reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, the suggested application icons 5057 in the suggested applications widget are — displayed with a second of display properties that make them blend in with and have a similar look-and-feel to the user-arranged application icons 5008 on the same home screen. For example, in the normal mode, the computer system ceases to display (or makes more 158
[00375] [00375] In some embodiments, when displayed in the normal mode, the text labels associated with the suggested application icons 5050 have a different set of display properties compared to that of the text labels associated with the user-arranged application icons 5008 on the same page. The set of display properties are not related to the textual content of the text labels, but rather their appearance unrelated to the textual content of the text labels. For example, the text labels associated with the suggested application icons 5057 are more translucent, has a shimmering visual effect, or has a predefined tint, etc. as a whole, as compared to the text labels associated with user-arranged application icons 5008, subtly indicating to the user which part of the home screen includes the suggested applications widget 5354.
[00376] [00376] In Figure 5G4, the computer system further detects a user input that corresponds to a request to lock the device or display a wake screen user interface, etc. (e.g., a downward edge swipe input from the top of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5350 by a contact 6306, or another predefined type of input, etc.).
[00377] [00377] Figure 5G5 illustrates that, in response to the user input that corresponds to a request to lock the device or display a coversheet user interface, etc. (e.g., the downward edge swipe input from the top of the fourth user-arranged home screen 5350 by a contact 6306, or another predefined type of input, etc.), the computer system displays a lock screen or wake screen user interface 5384. After some time has elapsed (e.g., from 6:05AM to 6:10AM), the computer system detects an input that corresponds to a request to redisplay the home screen user interface (e.g., an upward edge swipe input by a contact 6308 from the bottom of the lock screen or wake screen user interface 5384, another predefined type of input, etc.).
[00378] [00378] Figure 5G6 illustrates that, in response to the input that corresponds to a request to redisplay the home screen user interface (e.g., the upward edge swipe input by the contact 6308 from the bottom of the lock screen or wake screen user interface 5362, another predefined type of input, etc.), the computer system redisplays the user-arranged home screen
[00379] [00379] Figure 5G7 illustrates that, in response to the page navigation input (e.g., the leftward swipe input by a contact 6310, or another predefined type of input, etc.), the computer system displays an adjacent user-arranged home screen 5364 of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., to the right of the user-arranged home screen 5350). The 160
[00380] [00380] Figure 5G8 illustrates that the computer system ceases to display the map widget 5367 and displays a calendar widget 5370 as the currently displayed widget of the widget stack due a change in context (e.g., due to an elapse of time, a change in location of the user, etc.) without user input requesting the update. In some embodiments, the map widget 5367 and the calendar widget 5370 switched manually (e.g., the user can manually switch the widget displayed at the widget stack using a swipe input on the currently displayed widget in the stack). In some embodiments, in response to changes of application icons and/or widgets displayed on the home screen, the computer system also updates the selection of suggested application icons 5063 included in the suggested applications widget 5368 to — avoid showing duplicated application icons on the same user-arranged home screen. For example, in response to the computer system displaying the calendar widget 5370 on the user-arranged home screen 5364, the calendar application icon 5063a in the suggested applications widget 5368 is replaced by another application icon 5063i for an application that is not currently represented on the home screen (e.g., application icon for an App Store — application, etc.). As a result, the suggested applications widget 5368 no longer includes a duplicate application icon compared to the user-arranged application icons and widgets (e.g., the calendar widget 5370) displayed on the user-arranged home screen 5364. In Figure 5G8, the computer system further detects another navigation input (e.g., a rightward swipe input by a contact 6312 on the user-arranged home screen 5364) to navigate back to the user-arranged — home screen 5350.
[00381] [00381] Figures 5G9 to 5G10 illustrate that, in response to the rightward swipe input by the contact 6312 on the user-arranged home screen 5364 in Figure 5G8, the computer 161
[00382] [00382] Figure 5G11 illustrates that, in response to the tap input by the contact 6314, the computer system displays a message application user interface 5372 for the user to view the received message. The computer system further detects an upward edge swipe input by a contact 6316 to dismiss the currently displayed user interface 5372 and returns to the home screen user interface.
[00383] [00383] Figure 5G12 illustrates that, in response to the upward edge swipe input by the contact 6316, the computer system returns to displaying the user-arranged home screen 5350. The suggested applications widget 5354 is updated to replace the clock application icon 50571 with a message application icon 5057q, as a result of the message application being recently open. In Figure 5G12, the computer system further detects an input that meets the — criteria for displaying a contextual menu corresponding to the user interface object on the home screen user interface (e.g., the input is a tap-and-hold input by a contact 6318 at a location inside the suggested applications widget 5354, a light press input at a location inside the suggested applications widget 5354, etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system provides different responses and performs different operations depending on the location of the input (e.g., the location of the contact 6318), as will be discussed in more detail with reference to Figures 5G13-5G18. In Figure 5G12, the contact 6318 is detected at a location corresponding to the message application icon 5057q that is currently displayed within the suggested applications widget 5354.
[00384] [00384] Figure 5G13 illustrates that, in response to detecting the input that meets the — criteria for displaying a contextual menu corresponding to the user interface object on the home screen user interface (e.g., detecting the tap-and-hold input by the contact 6318 exceeding a predefined intensity and/or time threshold), the computer system displays a first contextual menu (e.g., a first quick action menu 5374) associated with the messages application and the suggested applications widget in the user-arranged home screen 5350.
[00385] [00385] In some embodiments, the first quick action menu 5374 includes a plurality of widget-specific selectable options and application-specific (e.g., message-specific) selectable options. In some embodiments, the widget-specific options include at least: a “Share Widget” option, that when selected (e.g., by a tap input), causes display of a sharing user interface to — share the suggested applications widget 5354 with other users; an “Edit Widget” option, that when selected (e.g., by a tap input), causes display of widget-specific configuration options for the suggested applications widget 5354 (e.g., display of a widget-specific configuration user interface or platter for changing the size, update frequency, etc. of the suggested applications widget); and a "Delete Widget” option, that when selected (e.g., by a tap input), — causes the suggested applications widget 5354 to be removed for the home screen 5350.
[00386] [00386] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user interface object that is located at the location of the input (e.g., the location of the contact 6318) is the messages application icon 5057p for the messages application, the computer system displays the application-specific options corresponding to the messages application (e.g., including options to be performed with respect to the message application, or within the messages application, etc.), including for example: a “Compose New Message” option, that when selected, causes display of an application user interface for composing a message 163
[00387] [00387] In some embodiments, the quick action menu 5374 also includes an “Edit home Screen” option, that when selected (e.g., by a tap input) causes display of the home screen user interface (e.g., the user-arranged home screen 5350) in the first reconfiguration mode.
[00388] [00388] In some embodiments, multiple copies of the suggested applications widgets are permitted to exist on the same home screen or on different pages of the home screen user interface. In such case, the operations (either widget-specific or app-specific) performed with respect to one copy of the suggested applications widget does not apply to another copy of the suggested applications widget. For example, the user can choose to never show a message — application icon in a first suggested applications widget, but still allows the message application icon to be shown in a second suggested applications widget on the same home screen, or a different home screen.
[00389] [00389] In Figure 5G13, the computer system further detects a tap input by a contact 6320 at the “Hide Message App” option of the first quick action menu 5374. Figure 5G14 illustrates that, in response to the tap input by the contact 6320 selecting the "Hide Message App” option, the computer system ceases to display the first quick action menu 5374 and displays the user-arranged home screen 5350 in the normal mode. The suggested applications widget 5354 is updated to replace the message application icon 5057q with a different application icon, game application icon 5057d.
[00390] [00390] Figure 5G15 follows Figure 5G12 and illustrates that, instead of detecting the tap-and-hold input by the contact 6318 on the message application icon 5057q as shown in 164
[00391] [00391] Figure 5G16 illustrates that, in response to the input that meets the criteria for displaying a contextual menu corresponding to the user interface object on the home screen user interface (e.g., the tap-and-hold input by the contact 6322 exceeding a predefined pressure and/or time threshold and placed on the fitness application icon 5057j), the computer system displays a second contextual menu (e.g., a second quick action menu 5376) on the user-arranged home screen 5350. The manner of displaying is similar to that described with respect to the display of the first context menu in Figure 5G13, except that the currently selected application icon 5057] is emphasized rather than the previously selected application icon 5057q. In Figure 5G16, the widget-specific options on the second quick action menu 5376 are identical to those in the first quick action menu 5374, but the application-specific options are different, as the second quick action menu 5376 includes fitness application specific options. In some embodiments, the application-specific options for the fitness application includes: a "Start New Workout” option, when selected (e.g., by a tap input) causes the fitness application to be displayed; a "Hide Fitness App” option, when selected (e.g., by a tap input), temporarily hides the fitness application icon 5057j from the suggested applications widget 5354; and a "Never Show Fitness App Here” option, when selected, permanently removing the fitness application icon 5057j from the suggested applications widget 5354.
[00392] [00392] As shown in Figure 5G16, the computer system further detects a tap input by a contact 6324 on the second quick action menu 5376 at a location corresponding to the "Never Show Fitness App Here” option. Figure 5G17 illustrates that, in response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6324, the computer system displays the user-arranged home screen 5350 in the normal mode, and the fitness application icon 5057 is replaced by an another system- suggested application icon 5057r (e.g., podcast application icon) in the suggested applications widget 5354. The fitness application icon 5057j will no longer be included in the application suggested widget 5354, as the "Never Show Fitness App Here” option was selected in Figure S5G16.
[00393] [00393] As shown in Figure 5G16, the computer system further detects an input that meets the criteria for displaying a contextual menu corresponding to the user interface object on the home screen user interface (e.g., a tap-and-hold input by a contact 6324 at a location inside the suggested applications widget 5354 that does not correspond to any application icons 5057 in the suggested applications widget 5354).
[00394] [00394] Figure 5G18 illustrates that, in response to detecting the input that meets the criteria for displaying a contextual menu corresponding to the user interface object on the home screen user interface (e.g., the tap-and-hold input by the contact 6326), the computer system displays a third contextual menu (e.g., a third quick action menu 5378). The home screen background is visually de-emphasized relative to the platter 5361 and the quick action menu 5378. The third quick action menu 5378 is different from the first quick action menu 5374 or the second quick action menu 5376 as the third quick action menu 5378 includes only widget-specific options. The third quick action menu 5378 does not include any application-specific options as the tap-and-hold input by the contact 6234 in Figure 5G15 is not placed on any application icons in the suggested applications widget 5354. The suggested applications widget 5354 does not become visually de-emphasized and the application icons (e.g., all application icons, a predetermined set of application icons, etc.) within the suggested applications widget 5354 share the same visual appearance (e.g., displayed on top of the platter 5361). The computer system further detects a tap input by a contact 6326 on the “Edit > Home Screen” option in the third quick action menu 5378.
[00395] [00395] Figure 5G19 illustrates that, in response to the tap input by the contact 6326, the computer system displays the user-arranged home screen 5350” in the first reconfiguration mode. The computer system further detects an input that corresponds to a request to select and move the application icon 5057q relative to the platter 5361 (e.g., a tap- — and-hold input by a contact 6328 at the location of the application icon 5057q to select the application icon 5057q, and a subsequent drag input by movement of the contact 6328 to move the application icon 5057q relative to the platter 5361; or a drag input by the contact 6328 that starts from the location of the application icon 5057q, etc.).
[00396] [00396] Figure 5G20 illustrates that the message application icon 5057q is being dragged outside of the suggested applications widget 5354 according to the movement of the contact 6328. Upon a lift-off of the contact 6328 while the messages application icon 5057q is in an area outside of the suggested applications widget 5354, the message application icon 166
[00397] [00397] Figure 5G22 illustrates that, in response to the request to exist the first reconfiguration mode and return to the normal mode (e.g., in response to the upward edge swipe in Figure 5G21), the computer system re-displays the user-arranged home screen 5350 in the normal mode, with the message application icon 5057q” displayed as a user-arranged application icon on the user-arranged home screen 5350, and the reminders application icon 5057s displayed in the suggested applications widget 5354 as a new system-suggested application icon. The platter 5361 of the suggested applications widget 5354 ceases to be displayed, and the system-suggested application icons 5057 currently within in the suggested applications widget 5354 and the user-arranged application icons 5008a-5008k and — application icon 5057q become aligned in the normal mode.
[00398] [00398] Figures 5G23-5G24 follow Figure 5G19, and illustrate that, instead of dropping the message application icon 5057q on to the user-arranged home screen 5350”, the message application icons 5057q is dragged away from the user-arranged home screen 5350’ and dropped to a location on the adjacent user-arranged home screen 5364” in the first reconfiguration mode (as shown in Figure 5G24). In Figure 5G24, the existing suggested applications widget 5368 is displayed with a platter 5369, and the system-suggested application icons 50631 and 5063b-5063h within the suggested applications widget 5368 are displayed with appearance characteristics similar to the system-suggested application icons within the suggested applications widget 5354 in the first reconfiguration mode as described with respect to Figure 5G3. In Figure 5G24, the application icons 5063i and 5063b-5063h are not aligned with the user-arranged application icons 5008m-5008p and 5057q.
[00399] [00399] In Figure 5G24, the computer system further detects two distinct inputs in two separate scenarios — an input that corresponds to a request to exit the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., an upward edge swipe input by a contact 6332) and an input that corresponds to a request to navigate to the system-arranged home screen or the application library user interface (e.g., a leftward swipe input by a contact 6334, given that the currently displayed page is the last user-arranged home screen in the home screen user interface).
[00400] [00400] Figure 5G25 illustrates that in response to the input that corresponds to a request to exit the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., the upward edge swipe input by the contact 6332 in Figure 5G24), the computer system displays the user-arranged home screen 5364 in the normal mode. The message application icon 5057q is displayed as a last application icon on the user-arranged home screen 5364 with an appearance that corresponds 168
[00401] [00401] Figure 5G26 follows Figure 5G24 and illustrates that, in response to the input that corresponds to a request to navigate to the system-arranged home screen or the application library user interface (e.g., the leftward swipe input by the contact 6334 on the — last user-arranged home screen 5364”), the computer system displays a system-generated application library user interface 5054”. The application library user interface 5054” includes a suggested applications widget 5055, and a plurality of representations for various system- generated groupings of application icons (e.g., grouping representations 5020a-5020d, etc.), and a plurality of widgets (e.g., widgets 5022a-5022b, etc.). In this example, the grouping representation 5020d includes an application icon 5391a and an application icon 5391b, among two other application icons for the applications included in the grouping corresponding to the grouping representation 5020d. As shown in Figure 5G26, the computer system further detects a selection input (e.g., a tap-and-hold input by a contact 6336) directed to the application icon 5391a, and in response to the selection input, the computer system selects the application icon 5391a. In Figure 5G27, the computer system detects a drag input (e.g., movement of the contact 6336) after the selection input, and in response to the drag input, the computer system moves a copy of the application icon 5391a in accordance with the drag input (e.g., away from the grouping representation 5020d). In some embodiments, the application library user interface 5054” is not editable by user input, and the application icon 5391a remains within the grouping representation 5020d when a copy thereof is dragged away by the contact 6336. In some embodiments, as the application icon 5391a’ is dragged across the display 112, the computer system gradually cease to display the application library user interface 5054” (e.g., fade out or slide away) to reveal a user-arranged user interface for inserting the application icon (e.g., the last displayed user-arranged page, or the page on which the application icon is currently residing, etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system starts to cease to display the application library user interface 5054’ (e.g., fade out, slide out, etc. the application library user interface 50547) when the user drags the application 169
[00402] [00402] Figures 5G28-5G29 illustrates that the copy 53912” of the application icon —5391a has been dragged onto the user-arranged page 5364” in the first reconfiguration mode, and dropped onto (e.g., due to the lift-off of the contact 6336) the user-arranged home screen 5364” in the first reconfiguration mode. When the copy 5391a’ of the application icon 5391a is dropped onto the user-arranged home screen 5364”, the suggested applications widget 5368 is updated to replace a system-suggested application icon 5063b within the suggested application widget 5368 with another system-suggested application icon 5063) (e.g., for the clock application), in accordance with a determination that the copy 5391a' of application icon 5391a and the application icon 5063b both correspond to the same application (e.g., the calculator application), to avoid displaying duplicate application icons on the same home screen. In Figure 5G30, the computer system then detects an input that corresponds to a request to exit the first reconfiguration mode and return to the normal mode (e.g., an upward edge swipe input by a contact 6338 on the user-arranged home screen 5364).
[00403] [00403] Figure 5G30 illustrates that in response to the input that corresponds to the request to return to the normal mode (e.g., the upward edge swipe input by the contact 6338), the computer system displays the user-arranged home screen 5364 in the normal mode. The calculator application icon 5391a is now displayed on the user-arranged home screen 5364 as —auser-arranged application icon, the suggested applications widget 5368 will no longer display the calculator application icon 5063b. In Figure 5G30, the computer system then detects a rightward swipe input by a contact 6340 on the fifth user-arranged home screen
[00404] [00404] Figure 5G31 illustrates that, in response to the rightward swipe input by the contact 6340, the computer system displays the user-arranged home screen 5350 including the suggested applications widget 5354. Comparing to the suggested applications widget 5354 illustrated in Figure 5G17, the suggested weather application icon 5057p in the suggested applications widget 5354 is replaced with a suggested document application icon 5057b as a result of automatic updating based on a change in context.
[00405] [00405] Figures SH1-5H76 illustrate various ways that existing user interface objects corresponding to different applications (e.g., application icons, widgets, etc. of various sizes) on a page of a home screen user interface are moved and/or rearranged during a reconfiguration mode (e.g., in accordance with repositioning, deletion, addition, passing through, removal, etc. of one or more user interface objects corresponding to different — applications), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00406] [00406] Figures SH1-5HS illustrate the movement of a 2x2 widget within a respective page 5210' of a multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00407] [00407] Figure SH1 illustrates a respective user-arranged page 5210' of a multipage home screen user interface (also referred to as "user-arranged home screen 5210°,” "home screen 5210°,” or "page 5210°”) currently displayed in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., an icon reconfiguration mode, where placement locations of application icons and widgets on the user-arranged page 5210” can be adjusted by dragging and dropping the application icons and widgets). In some embodiments, a page navigation element 5004 on the respective user- arranged page 5210” is highlighted when the page 5210’ is in the first reconfiguration mode, indicating that it now serves as an affordance for entering a second reconfiguration mode 171
[00408] [00408] The movement of various application icons 5008 and widgets 5022 is — described below. In some embodiments, the application icons present in a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface are organized into sets or blocks, where the number of application icons included in any respective set is predetermined based on the size(s) of widget(s) present in (e.g., existing, being inserted, and/or being dragged over, etc.) the respective page. For reference, a single application icon occupies a single unit of space in the respective page (e.g., a single placement location for application icon, a single grid location in a layout grid of the page, etc.)), and the sizes of a widget or widget stack is specified in terms the number of rows and columns that the widget or widget stack would occupy when placed into the layout grid of the page. For example, a 2x2 widget occupies a placement location that has a height of two rows and a width of two columns in the layout grid of the page, while an application icon occupies a placement location that has a height of one row and a width of one column in the layout grid of the page. In some embodiments, application icons move in blocks based on the respective size of widget(s) being moved within a 172
[00409] [00409] While displaying the respective page 5210” of the multipage home screen user interface in Figure SH1, the computer system detects a drag input by a contact 6600 at a placement location on the user-arranged page 5210” corresponding to the widget 5022g (e.g., movement of the contact 6600 starts at the location of the widget 5022g and moves toward the right of the display). As shown in Figure 5H2, widget 5022g moves within the respective page of the multipage home screen interface in accordance with the movement of contact
[00410] [00410] Figure 5H2 illustrates an animated transition showing the widget 5022g moving from the left side of the home screen 5210 to the right side of the home screen 5210. In some embodiments, as the widget 5022g is dragged toward the right side of the page 5210’ in accordance with movement of contact 6600, a 2x2 block of application icons 5008a-5008d moves to the left to vacate space for the widget 5022g on the right side of the home screen (e.g., the computer system determines an intended placement location for the widget 5022g based on the location and speed of the contact, and moves the application icons at a possible intended placement location to make room for the widget 5022g). In some embodiments, as shown in Figure SH2, the widget 5022g moves on a layer above the application icons 5008a- 5008d (e.g., the widget 5002g is at least partially transparent or translucent and the 173
[00411] [00411] Figure 5H3 illustrates that the widget 5022g and the set of application icons 5008a-5008d have exchanged placement locations on the page 5210”. Also in Figure SH3, a drag input by a contact 6602 (e.g., either a new contact that is detected after termination of contact 6600 or a continuation of contact 6600) is detected at a location corresponding to the placement location of the widget 5022g. As shown in Figures 5H3-5H6, the widget 5022g moves downward in accordance with the movement of the contact 6602 within the respective page 5210 of the multipage home screen user interface. Figures 5H4 and SHS illustrate the animated transition showing widgets and the application icons moving within the page 5210’ in response to the movement of the contact 6602.
[00412] [00412] In Figure 5H4, the widget 5022g is dragged downward (e.g., along a vertical axis of touch screen 112) in accordance with the downward movement of the contact 6602. At the same time, the 2x2 block of application icons 5008a-5008d is also moving downwards, following the movement of the widget 5022g. In some embodiments, the individual 174
[00413] [00413] Figure 5H6 illustrates the result of movement of the widget 5022g in the page 5210’ in accordance with the downward movement of the contact 6602. The widget 5022h exchanged placement locations with the widget 5022g and the 2x2 block of application icons 5008a-5008d, even though the 2x2 block of application icons 5008a-5008d are not explicitly selected or touched by the contact 6604 or any other input. The computer system automatically organizes the application icons into a 2x2 block and moved them in concert with the movement of the widget 5022g in accordance with preset rules for arranging application icons and/or widgets on the same layout grid. In Figure SH6, a drag input by a contact 6604 (e.g., either a new contact that is detected after termination of contact 6602 or a continuation of contact 6602) is detected at a placement location on the user-arranged page 5210’ corresponding to the widget 5022g.
[00414] [00414] As shown in Figure 5H7, the widget 5022g moves further downward in the page 5210’ in accordance with the downward movement of the contact 6604. In contrast with the movement displayed in Figures SH4 and 5HS, in Figure 5H7, the neighboring 2x2 block of application icons 5008-5008d does not follow the movement of widget 5022g within page 5210’ this time. Since the 2x4 widget 5022h moved to the top of page 5210” as a result of the earlier movement of the contact 6602 and the widget 5022g, the widget 5022h no longer serves to impede the downward movement of widget 5022g by itself within the page 5210’ (e.g., the widget 5022g is able to move alone as a single 2x2 block without being accompanied by the 2x2 block in the same rows as itself, as long as the movement is below the 2x4 widget 5022h in the page 5210’). In Figure SH7, multiple 2x2 blocks of application icons are reflowed to fill vacated spaces in the page 5210' as the widget 5022g is dragged in the region below the 2x4 widget 5022h. For example, the 2x2 block of application icons 5008e-5008f and 50081-5008] is reflowed to fill the space vacated by the widget 5022g in response to movement of the contact 6604. In addition, 2x2 block of application icons 5008g- 5008h and 5008k-5008]1 is reflow to the left to fill the space vacated by the reflow of the 2x2 block of application icons 5008e-5008f and 50081-5008j. In some embodiments, the widget 5022g appears as translucent or transparent during movement (e.g., to reveal the locations of application icons moving on lower layers). In some embodiments, the widget 5022g is not translucent or transparent (e.g., widget 5022g is opaque and/or blurred) so as not to visually confuse a user with multiple layers of overlapping user interface objects moving simultaneously. In some embodiments, any application icon(s) or widget(s) being moved 176
[00415] [00415] Figures SH8-5H10 collectively illustrate the movement of a 2x4 widget (e.g., widget 5022h) within a respective page of a multipage home screen user interface (e.g., page 5210’), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00416] [00416] In Figure SH8, a drag input by a contact 6606 is detected at a placement location corresponding to the 2x4 widget 5022h. In some embodiments, movement of a 2x4 widget within a respective page causes application icons to be organized into 2x4 blocks and results in the movement of one or more 2x4 blocks of application icons in the respective — page. In accordance with downward movement of the contact 6606, the widget 5022h moves downward in the page 5210”, as shown in Figure 5H9. Concurrent with the movement of the widget 5022h, application icons 5008a-5008j move as a 2x4 block upwards to fill the space vacated by the widget 5022h. As shown in Figure SHO, the widget 5022h moves in a layer above application icons 5008a-5008j. In some embodiments, the widget 5022h is translucent or transparent, thereby revealing the current locations of the application icons 5008a-5008] as they move on a layer below the widget 5022h. As described above with regards to the widget 5022g, in some embodiments, the widget 5022h is opaque and optionally blurred, thereby obscuring the current locations of application icons 5008a-5008j as they move on a layer below the widget 5022h. Upon termination of the drag input by contact 6606 (e.g., in — response to detecting lift-off of the contact 6606 while the widget 5022h is over the third and fourth rows of the layout grip in the page 5210”, upon cessation of the movement of the contact for more than a threshold amount of time, etc.), the widget 5022h is moved to a new 177
[00417] [00417] Figures SH10-5H19 illustrate the removal of application icons from a respective page of a multipage home screen user interface that includes one or more widgets.
[00418] [00418] In Figure 5H10, a tap input by a contact 6608 is detected at a location corresponding to a delete badge (e.g., also called “deletion affordance) 5012f corresponding to application icon 5008f. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6608, the computer system deletes the application icon 5008f (e.g., removes the application icon 5008f from the page 5210”). As shown in Figure 5H11, as a result of the removal of the application — icon 5008f from the page 5210”, the remaining application icons 5008g-50081, and 5008a- 5008d reflow on an individual basis (e.g., not in blocks) to fill the newly vacated spaces (e.g., application icon 5008a moves from below the 2x4 sized widget 5022h into the last placement location for application icons in the 2x4 block above the widget 5022h). In some embodiments, when the remaining application icons 5008e, 5008g-50081, and 5008a-5008d — were organized into blocks, no reflow would occur between blocks, until enough application icons from the 2x4 block for the smaller block to merge with the larger block into a single 2x4 block.
[00419] [00419] In Figures SH11-5H19, additional application icons are removed one by one from the home screen 5210’, e.g., in response to receiving additional tap inputs on delete — badges of those application icons. In Figure SH11-5H17, remaining application icons on the page 5210' are reflowed on an individual basis (e.g., skipping over the intervening 2x4 widget 5022h) as a subset of the application icons in the top 2x4 block are removed one by 178
[00420] [00420] In Figure SH11 a tap input by a contact 6610 is detected at a location corresponding to delete badge 5012a corresponding to the application icon 5008a. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6610, the computer system deletes the application icon 5008a (e.g., removes the application icon 5008a from the page 5210”). As shown in Figure 5H12, as a result of the removal of the application icon 5008a from the page 5210’, the remaining application icons 5008b-5008d reflow to fill the newly vacated space (e.g., application icon 5008b moves from below the 2x4 widget 5022h into the 2x4 block of application icons above the widget 5022h, while the widgets 5022h and 5022 remain at their respective locations on the page).
[00421] [00421] In Figure 5H12, another tap input by a contact 6612 is detected at a location — corresponding to the delete badge 50121 corresponding to the application icon 50081. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6612, the computer system deletes the application icon 50081 (e.g., removes the application icon 50081 from the page 5210’). As shown in Figure 5H13, as a result of the removal of the application icon 50081 from the page 5210’, the remaining application icons 5008b-5008d reflow to fill the newly vacated space —(e.g., application icon 5008c moves from below 2x4 sized widget 5022h into the 2x4 block of application icons above the widget 5022h).
[00422] [00422] In Figure 5H13, another tap input by a contact 6614 is detected at a location corresponding to delete badge 5012k corresponding to application icon 5008k. In response to detecting tap input by the contact 6614, the computer system deletes the application icon 5008k (e.g., removes the application icon 5008k from the page 5210”). As shown in Figure SH14, as a result of the removal of the application icon 5008k from page 5210’, the remaining application icons 5008b-5008d reflow to fill the newly vacated space (e.g., application icon 5008d moves from below the 2x4 sized widget 5022h into the 2x4 block of application icons above the widget 5022h). With the reflow of the application icon 5008d up to above the widget 5022h, the 2x2 sized placement location below the widget 5022h that had been occupied by the application icon 5008d is vacated, and the widget 5022g reflows to fill the newly unoccupied placement location below the widget 5022h.
[00423] [00423] In Figure 5H14, another tap input by a contact 6612 is detected at a location corresponding to the delete badge 5012d corresponding to the application icon 5008d. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6616, the computer system deletes the application icon 5008d (e.g., removes the application icon 5008d from the page 5210”). As shown in Figure SH15, as a result of the removal of the application icon 5008d from page 5210’, no application icon on the page 5210” moved because the deleted application icon 5008d is the last application icon on the page 5210".
[00424] [00424] In Figure SH15, another tap input by a contact 6618 is detected at a location corresponding to the delete badge 5012c corresponding to the application icon 5008c. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6618, the computer system deletes the application icon 5008c (e.g., removes the application icon 5008c from the page 5210”). As shown in Figure 5H16, as a result of the removal of the application icon 5008c from page 5210’, no application icon on the page 5210” moved because the deleted application icon 5008c is the last application icon on the page 5210’.
[00425] [00425] In Figure 5H16, another tap input by a contact 6620 is detected at a location corresponding to the delete badge 5012b corresponding to the application icon 5008b. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6620, the computer system deletes the application icon 5008b (e.g., removes the application icon 5008b from the page 5210”). As shown in Figure 5H17, as a result of the removal of the application icon 5008b from page 5210’, no application icon on the page 5210” moved because the deleted application icon 5008c is the last application icon on the page 5210’.
[00426] [00426] In Figure 5H17, another tap input by a contact 6622 is detected at a location corresponding to the delete badge 5012j corresponding to the application icon 5008;. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6622, the computer system deletes the application icon 5008) (e.g., removes the application icon 5008j from the page 5210’). As shown in Figure 5H18, as a result of the removal of the application icon 5008j from the page 5210’, only four application icons remain above the 2x4 widget the in page 5210’. In accordance with a determination that only a single row of application icons remains above the 2x4 widget, the computer system moves the single row of application icons 5008e and 5008g-5008i downward (e.g., to switch places with the widget 5022h). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that there is a 2x2 widget on the page (e.g., below the 2x4 widget), the computer system organizes the remaining single row of 180
[00427] [00427] In Figure 5H18, another tap input by a contact 6624 is detected at a location corresponding to the delete badge 5013g corresponding to the widget 5022g. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6624, the computer system deletes the 2x2 widget 5022g (e.g., removes the widget 5022g from the page 5210’). As shown in Figure SH19, as a result of the removal of the 2x2 widget 5022g from the page 5210”, the application icons 5008e and 5008g-5008j reflow to fill the remaining space immediately below the 2x4 widget 5022h. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5H19, as a result of removing widget 5022g from the page 5210’, the application icons 5008e and 5008g-5008i resolve into a single row (e.g., application icons 5008e and 5008g-5008i reflow from the 2x2 grid in Figure SH18 into a single row in Figure 5H19, where application icons 5008h and 50081 move up to the same row as that occupied by application icons 5008e and 5008g).
[00429] [00429] As shown in Figure 5H20, the page 5210” includes a plurality of application icons 5008e and 5008g-5008j and widgets 5022g and 5022h, where the plurality of application icons are located in a 2x4 block above the 2x4 widget 5022h. In Figure SH20, a user input 5120 adds an application icon 25 to the page 5210’ (e.g., the computer system detects an input that drops the application icon 25 into the page 5210’). In some 181
[00430] [00430] As shown in Figure SH22, the page 5210” includes a plurality of application icons 5008b-5008e and 5008g-5008j, and widgets 5022g and 5022h, where the plurality of application icons are located in a 2x4 block above the 2x4 widget 5022h. In Figure 5H22, a user input 5122 adds the application icon 25 to the page 5210' without explicitly specifying an insertion location for the application icon 25. When the application icon 25 is released into the page 5210' without the user explicitly specifying the insertion location of the application icon 25, the computer system automatically identifies the first available (e.g., presently empty) placement location for application icons in the page 5210' and inserts the application icon 25 there (e.g., application icon 25 is inserted into a 2x2 block below the widget 5022h right after the widget 5022g), e.g., without reflowing any application icons or widgets on the page, as shown in Figure 5H23.
[00431] [00431] As shown in Figure 5H24, the page 5210” includes a plurality of application icons 5008e and 5008g-50081, and widgets 5022g and 5022h (e.g., in the same layout as shown in Figure 5H18), where the plurality of application icons are located in a 2x2 block below the 2x4 widget 5022h, adjacent to the 2x2 widget 5022g. In Figure 5H24, a user input 5120 adds the application icon 25 to page 5210” without explicitly specifying an insertion location for the application icon 25. When the application icon 25 is released into the page 5210” without the user explicitly specifying the insertion location of the application icon 25, the computer system automatically identifies the first available (e.g., presently empty) placement location for application icons in the page 5210 and inserts the application icon 25 there (e.g., application icon 25 is inserted into the 2x2 block or single row right after the widget 5022g), e.g., without reflowing any application icons or widgets on the page, as shown in Figure SH25.
[00432] [00432] Figures SH26-5H31 illustrate movement of a 2x4 widget from a respective page of a multipage home screen user interface to a different page of the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00433] [00433] In Figure 5H26 (which is in the same configuration at Figure 5H10) a drag input by a contact 6626 is detected at a location corresponding to the placement location of the widget 5022h (e.g., a 2x4 widget). In accordance with a determination that the movement of the contact 6626 has reached an edge of the user interface 5210’ in the first reconfiguration mode or in response to another navigation input detected while the widget 5022h is held by the drag input by the contact 6626, the computer system displays an another user-arranged page 5212” while the widget 5022h is dragged by the contact 6626. Figures SH27, SH28, and SH29 show example intermediate states of the widget 5022h moving from being held over the page 5210’ to being held over the page 5212”. In Figure SH28, as a result of changing the displayed user-arranged home screen, the page navigation element 5004 is updated with the page indicator icon 5004a de-highlighted and page indicator icon 5004b highlighted.
[00434] [00434] In Figure 5H29, when the widget 5022h is displayed over the user-arranged page 5212 which includes a single row of application icons 1-4, the single row of application icons 1-4 begin to move downwards, vacating space in anticipation of the user placing the widget 5022h in the page 5212’ (e.g., in anticipation of the drag input by the contact 6626 being terminated while the widget 5022h is hovering over the page 5212”). It is notable that, in neither Figure 5H29 nor 5H30, the computer system has not detected an explicit user input that is indicative of the user's intent to place the widget 5022h at the top of the page 5212’ or any other insertion locations on the page (e.g., the contact 6626 is not near the top of the display, or any other potential insertion locations for the widget). The single row of application icons 1-4 would move by the same amount (e.g., two rows down) irrespective of where the widget 5022h is held over the page 5212” (e.g., bottom of the page, top of the page, middle of the page, etc.). In some embodiments, if, instead of just four application icons, page 5212” included between five to eight application icons, then the application icons would form a 2x4 block, and none of the block of application icons would move downward when the widget 5022h is held over the page at any location below the 2x4 block. The 2x4 block of application icons would only move downward, if the user explicitly drags the 2x4 widget over the placement locations of the application icons to trigger the computer system to move the entire 2x4 block out of the top rows to make room for the 2x4 widget 5022h. The 183
[00435] [00435] In Figure 5H30, after the widget 5022h is dropped onto the page 5212’ (e.g., — the computer system detects a termination of the input that had dragged the widget 5022h from the page 5210’ to the page 5212’; and in response to detecting the termination of the input while the contact 6626 is away from the top of the page 5210’), the widget 5022h is inserted into the top placement location vacated by the reflow of the single row of application icons 1-4.
[00436] [00436] Also in Figure SH30, a tap input by a contact 6628 is subsequently detected at a location corresponding to the deletion affordance 5013h corresponding to the widget 5022h. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6628, the computer system removes the widget 5022h from the page 5212’ (e.g., the widget 5022h is deleted from the page 5212”). As shown in Figure SH31, the removal of the widget 5022h results in the movement of — application icons 1-4 back to the top of page 5212”.
[00437] [00437] Figures SH32-5H45 continues from Figure 5H26, and illustrate movement of a 2x2 widget from a respective page of a multipage home screen user interface to other pages of the multipage home screen user interface.
[00438] [00438] In Figure 5H26, a drag input by a contact 6630 is detected at a location corresponding to the placement location of the widget 5022g. Figure SH32-5H35 show intermediate stages of the pages as the widget 5022g is moved from being displayed over the page 5210' to being displayed over the page 5212”. For example, the computer system navigates from the page 5210’ to the page 5212” while the widget 5022g is held by the contact 6630, when the contact 6630 is moved and held near an edge of the display, or when another navigation input is detected while the widget 5022g is held by the contact 6630. In Figures SH33-5H34, when the widget 5022g is displayed over the page 5212’ in accordance 184
[00439] [00439] Figure 5H38 continues from Figure 5H35, where the drag input by the contact 6630 continues without dropping the widget 5022¢ into the page 5212’. In Figures SH38- S5H39, the computer system transitions from displaying the widget 5022g over the page 5212' (Figure 5H38) to displaying the widget 5022g over another page 5214” of the multipage home screen user interface (Figure 5H39). In some embodiments, the computer system navigates to the page 5214” in response to the contact 6630 being held near the edge of the display while holding the widget 5022g, or in response to another navigation input that is detected while the widget 5022g is held by the contact 6630. Figure 5H38 illustrates that, as the widget 5022g is dragged away from the page 5212”, the application icons 1-4 resolve from being in a 2x2 block back into being a single row. In addition, in Figure 5H39, as a result of changing the displayed user-arranged home screen, the page navigation element 5004 is updated with page indicator icon 5004b de-highlighted and page indicator icon 5004c highlighted.
[00440] [00440] In Figures SH39-5H41, as the widget 5022g is dragged on the page 5214” of the multipage home screen user interface, and while the widget 5022g is outside of the area occupied by any existing application icons 5-16 on the page 5214”, the computer system automatically organizes the application icons on the page 5214 into 2x2 blocks and the last odd numbered row of application icons (e.g., application icons 13-16) is organized into a 2x2 block to create a potential placement location for the widget 5022g. In Figure 5H41, the widget 5022g is dragged upwards in accordance with movement of the contact 6630. As the widget 5022g moves upwards into the areas occupied by application icons, the application icons are reflowed as 2x2 blocks to make space for the widget 5022g at the current location of the widget 5022g. For example, as shown in Figures SH42-5H44, when the widget 5022 is dragged toward the upper right corner of the page 5214’ and hovers over near that location, the computer system determines that a desired insertion of the widget 5022g is in the upper right corner occupied by the 2x2 block of application icons 7-8 and 11-12; and accordingly, the computer system moves the 2x2 block of application icons 7-8 and 11-12 out of their placement locations and reflow them to the next 2x2 placement location on the page, pushing other 2x2 blocks of application icons further right and/or down on the page. As shown in Figure 5H43, the different blocks of application icons simultaneously on the page 5214’ below a layer occupied by the widget 5022g. The block of application icons 7-8 and 11-12 reflows diagonally (e.g., into the respective next adjacent potential placement location) to vacate space for the widget 5022g. Concurrently, another block of application icons 13-14 and 15-16 reflows horizontally (e.g., into the respective next adjacent potential placement location) to vacate space for the block of application icons 7-8 and 11-12. When the termination of the drag input (e.g., the liftoff of the contact, the cessation of movement of the contact for more than a threshold amount of time, etc.) is detected while the widget is held over or near the upper right corner of the page 5214'(e.g., liftoff of the contact 6630 is detected while over or near the upper right corner of the page 5214”), the widget 5214' is inserted into the placement location vacated by the 2x2 block of application icons 7-8 and 11- 12, and the two 2x2 blocks of application icons (e.g., a block formed by application icons 2-8 and 11-12, and another block formed by application icons 13-16) are arranged side by side on the page below the widget 5022g.
[00441] [00441] In Figure 5H44, a page navigation input is detected (e.g., a rightward swipe input a contact 6632, a swipe on the page navigation element 5004, etc.) on the user-arranged 186
[00442] [00442] In Figure 5H45, another page navigation input is detected (e.g., a leftward swipe input by a contact 6634 is detected on the user-arranged page 5212”, or a leftward swipe on the page navigation element 5004, etc.). In response to detecting the page navigation input, the computer system returns to the previously-displayed user-arranged page 5214’ as shown in Figure 5H46.
[00443] [00443] Figures 5H46-5H60 illustrate movement of a 2x4 widget together with one or more user interface objects corresponding to different applications (e.g., application icons and/or additional widgets) from a respective page of a multipage home screen user interface to additional pages of the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00444] [00444] In Figure 5H46, a drag input by a contact 6636 is detected at a location corresponding to the placement location of the widget 5022g. In accordance with the movement of the contact 6636, the widget 5022g is moved over another placement location on the page 5214” (e.g., the user drags widget 5022g to the potential placement location — previously occupied by the block of application icons 7-8 and 11-12). Concurrent with the movement of the contact 6636 and the widget 5022g, the block of application icons 7-8 and 11-12 reflow to occupy the newly-vacated placement location in the top right corner of the page 5214”, where the reflow of the application icons 7-8 and 11-12 occurs in a manner substantially similar to the reflow described with regards to Figures SH42-5H44 above.
[00446] [00446] In Figure 5H48, while the drag input by the contact 6638 is maintained, another tap input by the contact 6644 is detected at a location corresponding to the application icon 7. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6644, the application icon 7 flies to join the flock of the widget 5022g, application icon 9, and application icon 10, as shown in Figure 5H49. In accordance with application icon 7 joining the flock, flocking indicator 5023 is updated to indicate that there are now four user interface objects in the flock. Also shown in Figure SH49, the remaining application icons not flocking with widget 5022g individually reflow to occupy the space vacated by application icons 7, 9, and 10.
[00447] [00447] Figure 5H50-5H52 illustrate intermediate states showing the widget 5022g and the flocked application icons 7, 9, and 10 being dragged together to another user- arranged page of the multipage home screen user interface. During the movement of the contact 6638, the individual objects in the flock are loosely coupled, and may have slightly different speed and/or direction relative to one another while moving together in accordance with the movement of the contact. For example, a larger object (e.g., another widget) may lag farther behind from the top widget that is dragged than a smaller object (e.g., an application — icon); and optionally, an object that joined the flock earlier may follow more the top widget more closely than other objects that joined the flock later.
[00448] [00448] Figures SH52-5H54 illustrate intermediate states as the widget 5022g and flocked application icons 7, 9, and 10 are dragged through the user-arranged page 5216’ without being dropped into the page 5216’. Similarly to the reflow observed with regards to Figures 5H33-5H35, the plurality of application icons 25-28 are automatically organized into S —2a2x2 block to vacate a potential placement location for the widget 5022g in Figures SH52- SHS3, as the widget 5022g is dragged across the area that is not occupied by any application icons (e.g., similar to that shown in Figure 5H33). In accordance with a determination that a page navigation input is detected (e.g., detecting the movement of the contact 6638 halting at an edge of the page 5216”, or detecting a leftward swipe by another contact on the page 5216’ — or the page navigation element 5004 while the contact 6638 is maintained, etc.), the computer system navigates to another user-arranged page 5218”, as shown in Figure SHSS. Figure SH54 illustrates that, as widget 5022g and the flocked application icons are dragged away from the page 5216’, the application icons 25-28 resolve back into a single row.
[00449] [00449] In Figure SH55, the page 5218” includes a 2x2 widget 50221 and a 2x2 block of application icons 17-20 arranged side by side. Upon termination of the drag input by the contact 6638 (e.g., liftoff of the contact, cessation of movement of the contact for more than a threshold amount of time, etc.) while the contact is away from the existing widget and application icons on the page 5218’ (e.g., the drag input does not explicitly specifies an insertion location of the dragged objects), the widget 5022g is moved to a new placement — location as shown in Figure 5H56, and application icons 7, 9, and 10 are organized into a block and added to the first available placement location (e.g., the 2x2 block adjacent to widget 5022g). In some embodiments, the 2x2 block of application icons 7-10 is placed after the widget 5022g in the page 5218’.
[00450] [00450] Also in Figure SH56, a new drag input by a contact 6646 is detected at a — location corresponding to the placement location of the widget 5022g in the page 5218’. While the drag input by the contact 6646 is maintained, an additional tap input by a contact 6648 is detected at a location corresponding to the placement location of the widget 50221 and another tap input by a contact 6650 is detected at location corresponding to the application icon 10. In response to detecting the tap inputs by the contacts 6648 and 6650, the application icon 10 and the widget 5022i move toward the widget 5022g and join the widget 5022g to be dragged by the contact 6646 as a group, as shown in Figures 5H57-5H58. The flocking indicator 5023 appears next to the widget 5022g to indicate that there are three user 189
[00451] [00451] In Figure SH58, in accordance with movement of the contact 6646, the widgets 5022g and 5022i and the application icon 10 are dragged to a placement location indicated by the user (e.g., the top right corner of the page 52187); concurrently, application icons 7 and 9 (e.g., as a partially filled 2x2 block) reflow to vacate space for the widget 5022g, as shown in the intermediate states in Figures 5H59-5H60. If, instead of dragging widget 5022g to the top right corner of page 5078, the user had simply terminated the drag input by lifting off the contact 6646 while the contact and the flock is entirely in the area below the area occupied by the application icons 17-20 and 7-8 (e.g., in the state shown in Figure 5H58), the first available placement location for the widget 5022g would have been below the 2x2 block of application icons 17-20 and the widget 5022g would be inserted there, with the application icon 10 filling in the space below application icon 7 and the widget 50221 filling in the space to the right of the widget 5022g. In some embodiments, if, instead of dragging widget 5022g to the top right corner of page 5078, the user had simply terminated the drag input by lifting off the contact 6646 while the contact and the flock is entirely in the area below the area occupied by the application icons 17-20 and 7-8 (e.g., in the state shown in Figure 5H58), the icons and widgets (e.g., all, a predetermined set of the icons and widgets, etc.) would fly back to where they were (e.g., in the state shown in Figure SH56).
[00452] [00452] As shown in Figure SH61, upon termination of contact 6648 while the contact has dragged the widgets 5022g and 50221 and the application icon 10 to the upper right corner of the page 5218’, the widget 5022g is placed in the placement location in the upper right corner of the page 5218” as indicated by the user. In addition, the application icon 10 is placed into the first empty slot in the 2x2 block comprising the application icons 7 and 9, and the widget 50221 is added to the first available placement location to the right of the 2x2 block that now includes the application icons 7-10, as shown in Figure 5H61.
[00453] [00453] Figures 5H61-5H76 illustrate movement of a 2x4 widget from a respective page of a multipage home screen user interface to adjacent pages of the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00454] [00454] In Figure 5H61, a drag input by a contact 6652 is detected at a location corresponding to the widget 5022i. While the widget 50221 is being held by the contact 6652, the computer system detects a page navigation input (e.g., the contact 6652 is held near the side edge of the page 5218’ for at least a threshold amount of time, a swipe input by another contact is detected on the page 5218’, a swipe input by another contact is detected on the page navigation element 5004, etc.). In response to detecting the page navigation input, the computer system navigates to another user-arranged page 5220”, as shown in Figures SH62- SH63. As a result of changing the displayed user-arranged home screen, navigation element 5004 is updated with page indicator icon 5004e de-highlighted and page indicator icon 5004f highlighted; and the computer system switches from displaying the widget 50221 over the page 5218’ to displaying the widget 5022i over the page 5220” while the widget 5022i is being dragged by the contact 6652. In Figure SH62, it is shown that, as the widget 5022i is moving away from the page 5218’, the application icons 7, 9, and 10 in the 2x2 block are resolving into a single row. As shown in Figure SH63, the page 5220’ includes a plurality of — application icons 30-44. Figure 5H63 illustrates that, as widget 5022i is dragged onto the page 5220' (e.g., due to movement of the contact 6652 and/or due to shifting of the pages on the display, etc.), the plurality of application icons 30-44 do not reflow (e.g., as the application icons on the page 5220 are already in 2x2 blocks (e.g., application icons 30-31 and 34-35 form a respective 2x2 block, application icons 32-33 and 36-37 form an additional respective 2x2 block, etc.), and that there is leftover odd numbered row at the end of the layout).
[00455] [00455] As shown in Figure SH64, upon termination of the contact 6652 when the contact 6652 is over an unoccupied area of the page 5220’ below the existing application icons on the page 5220’, the widget 50221 is placed in the first available placement location — right below all or a predetermined set of the application icons on the page 5020.
[00456] [00456] In Figure 5H65, a drag input by a contact 6654 (e.g., the contact 6654 can be a new contact detected after the liftoff of the contact 6652 or a continuation of the contact 6652 in Figure SH63) is detected at a location corresponding to the placement location of widget 5022i. In some embodiments, upon selection of the widget 5022i (e.g., from a tap input, a tap — and hold input, a drag input, etc.), the widget 50221 becomes visually distinguished (e.g., the widget 50221 has s darkened boarder, and is blurred, etc.). 191
[00457] [00457] In Figure 5H66, the widget 50221 is dragged upwards in accordance with movement of the contact 6654, and the 2x2 block of application icons 40-41 and 44 are reflowed (e.g., are moved to the bottom of the page 5220 to vacate space for the widget 50221, as shown in Figure SH67).
[00458] [00458] In Figure SH68, in accordance with the movement of the contact 6654 towards the upper left corner of the page 5220”, additional blocks of application icons (e.g., the 2x2 block of application icons 30-31 and 34-35, etc.) are reflowed to vacate space for the widget 5022i. In some embodiments, as described above, the widget 5022i moves on a layer above the plurality of application icons. In some embodiments, the widget 50221 is translucent or transparent to provide visibility of the locations of any application icons moving beneath the widget 50221. In some embodiments, respective 2x2 blocks of application icons occupy different layers (e.g., the 2x2 block of application icons 30-31 and 34-35 moves on a first respective layer, the 2x2 block of application icons 32-33 and 36-37 moves on a second respective layer, etc.).
[00459] [00459] In Figure 5H69, the drag input by the contact 6654 has terminated (e.g., liftoff of the contact 6654 is detected while the contact 6654 and the widget 5022i is near the upper left corner of the page 5220”). In response to detecting the termination of the drag input by the contact 6654 (e.g., liftoff of the contact, cessation of the movement of the contact for more than a threshold amount of time, etc.), the widget 5022i is snapped to the closest available placement location (e.g., the placement location vacated by the 2x2 block of application icons 30-31 and 34-35), as shown in Figure SH70. In addition, as there is no longer a moving widget in Figure 5H70, the blocks of the application icons are dissolved. This is evinced by the application icon 44 moving to join application icons 40 and 41 on a single row (e.g., their 2x2 block was dissolved). In some embodiments, the placement — location occupied by widget 50221 in Figure SH70 is the default insertion location for the ‘add widget’ affordance 5094. Therefore, the same configuration of application icons and a widget in Figure 5H70 can also be arrived at by selecting the ‘add widget’ affordance 5094 (e.g., while a widget selection and configuration user interface or while in a widget-specific configuration user interface was displayed). As shown in Figure SH70, when widget 5022i is — not selected, there are no visible distinguishing markers of widget 50221 (e.g., no darkened boarder, and no blurring, etc.).
[00460] [00460] In Figure 5H71, the page 5220’ is shown in the same state as that shown in Figure 5H65. In Figure SH71, if the drag input by the contact 6654 does not move toward the upper right corner of the page (e.g., in the scenario shown in Figures SH65-5H70), and the compute system detects a page navigation input while the contact 6654 is in the unoccupied area of the page 5220’ below the existing application icons on the page 5220’ (e.g., the contact 6654 simply moves towards an edge of the user interface 5220' or a swipe input by another contact is detected on the page 5220” or on the page navigation element 5004, etc.), the computer system navigates to the user-arranged page 5218” while the widget 50221 is dragged or held stationary by the contact 6654. As shown in Figures SH71-5H72, the computer system switches from displaying the widget 50221 over the page 5220' to displaying the widget 5022i over the page 5218’ (e.g., the page as shown in Figure 5H62).
[00461] [00461] As shown in Figure 5H72, the application icons on the page 5218” organize into blocks upon the entrance of the widget 5022i onto the page 5218’. In Figures SH72- SH74, the widget 50221 is dragged by the contact 6654 over the widget 5022g, and dropped onto the widget 5022g upon liftoff of the contact 6654 at a location over the widget 5022g. In accordance with a determination that widget 5022g and the widget 50221 are of the same size (e.g., are both 2x2 widgets), a widget stack 5024a is created as seen in Figure 5H75 at the placement location of the widget 5022g, with the widget 5022i is shown on top.
[00462] [00462] In Figure 5H76, upon termination of contact 6654 and formation of widget stack 5024a, application icons 7, 9, and 10 resolve into a single row (e.g., are no longer organized in a 2x2 block since there are no longer moving widgets in the page 5218”).
[00463] [00463] In some embodiments, when a widget (e.g., widget 5022i, or widget 5022g) is being moved together with other application icons and/or other widgets of a different size (e.g., in a "flock”), when the widget is dropped onto another widget of the same size, no widget stack is created and individual widgets and application icons in the flock are respectively inserted into available placement locations in the page. In some embodiments, a widget can also be dropped onto an existing widget stack and be merged into the existing widget stack if they are of the same size (or in some embodiments, of a smaller size than (e.g., half the size, quarter of the size, etc. of) the widget stack).
[00464] [00464] In some embodiments, the existing widget remains in place for a longer period of time when a widget of the same size is dragged onto the page to make it more convenient 193
[00465] [00465] Figures 511-5118 illustrate user interfaces for configuring user interface objects containing application content (e.g., widgets, mini application objects, etc.) and adding the same to another user interface (e.g., a page of a home screen), in accordance with — some embodiments.
[00466] [00466] Figure 511 illustrates a respective user-arranged page 5230’ of a multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode), 194
[00467] [00467] In Figure 512, the widget selection and configuration user interface 5250 is displayed overlaid on deemphasized user-arranged page 5230’ of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., where page 5230’ is blurred or darkened or otherwise deemphasized). In some embodiments, the top of the widget selection and configuration user interface is offset from the top of the display, revealing the top portion of the visually deemphasized page 5230’ underneath. In some embodiments, the widget selection and configuration user interface provides a search input field 5260 which accepts search criteria and returns search results including preconfigured widgets that are relevant to the search criteria and/or applications that have widgets that are relevant to the search criteria. In some embodiments, the widget selection and configuration user interface 5250 includes a plurality of preconfigured and/or recommended widgets 5022 (e.g., 5022m, 5022h, 5022p, 50220, 5022q, etc.) and/or widget stacks 5024 (e.g., 50244, etc.) that can be directly added to another user interface (e.g., a user- arranged home screen, a widget screen user interface, etc.) in accordance with user request (e.g., by dragging the widget/widget stack from the widget selection and configuration user interface 5250 and dropping it onto another user interface, or by selecting a widget/widget — stack in the widget selection and configuration user interface using a selection affordance associated with the widget/widget stack and tapping an add button in the widget selection and configuration user interface, or by tapping a selection affordance associated with a desired widget/widget stack in the widget selection and configuration user interface, etc.). In some embodiments, the preconfigured and/or recommended widgets and/or widget stacks are of — various sizes, and correspond to different applications. In the example embodiment shown in Figure 512, one or more preconfigured widgets and/or widget stacks are associated with respective widget selection affordances 5312 that indicate the selected/unselected states of 195
[00468] [00468] Figure 512 shows various contacts and touch inputs that are detected on the user-arranged home screen 5230” in different example scenarios, including respective tap inputs by contacts 6804, 6806, 6808, and 6810. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a contact on the touch-screen 112, the device determines the type of the input, the — starting location of the input, the movement direction and movement distance of the input (if any), current location and movement characteristics of the input, and/or the termination of the input, etc.; and based on the type, location, movement direction, movement distance, termination state, etc. of the input, performs a corresponding operation. In some embodiments, the device distinguishes between tap and tap-hold inputs by determining whether an input is held in place substantially stationary for at least a preset threshold amount of time.
[00469] [00469] Figures 512-516 collectively illustrate the addition of a widget from widget selection and configuration user interface to a respective page of multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00470] [00470] In Figure 512, a tap-hold input by the contact 6804 is detected at a location corresponding to the location of widget 5022n in the widget selection and configuration user interface 5250. In some embodiments, after tap-hold threshold is met by the contact 6804 (e.g., contact 6804 is held substantially stationary for at least a threshold amount of time), the widget 5022n is visually distinguished (e.g., where the outline of widget is highlighted, appear to be lifted off the background of the widget selection and configuration user interface 5250, and/or expanded in size, etc.), as shown in Figure 513.
[00471] [00471] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 513, a drag input by the contact 6804 is detected after the widget 5022n is selected by the touch-hold input by the contact
[00472] [00472] Figures 517-5112 following Figure 512 collectively illustrate configuration of a widget in widget-specific configuration user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00473] [00473] Returning to Figure 512, a tap input by the contact 6806 is detected at a location corresponding to the location of preconfigured widget 5022n in the widget selection — and configuration user interface 5250. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6806, the computer system displays a widget-specific configuration user interface 5270 for the preconfigured widget 5022n, as shown in Figure 5T7. The widget-specific configuration 199
[00474] [00474] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 517, the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270 for a respective widget (e.g., widget 5022n) includes different options for configuring the respective widget. For example, widget-specific configuration user interface 5270 includes a size selector region (e.g., region 5272 “Widget sizes” with selectable controls corresponding to different sizes (e.g., 2x2, 2x4 ,4x4, etc.) for the respective widget (e.g., radio buttons 5274a, 5274b, and 5274c correspond to three different widget sizes, or other controls that correspond to different sizes, etc.). In some embodiments, selection of one of the selectable controls 5274 changes the size of the widget — (e.g., the widget 5022n) as reflected in the changed size of the preview 5022n in the widget preview region 5280. In some embodiments, different widget types are associated with different widget previews (e.g., showing different application content, and/or provide 200
[00475] [00475] In some embodiments, the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270 includes a control for enabling or disabling the currently presented widget (e.g., widget preview 5022n” "News: Today”) to be included in the system-generated recommended widget stack (e.g., widget stack 5024i in Figure 512) (e.g., a toggle option 5290 "Add widget to Recommended stack”, or other types of controls (e.g., checkbox, radio button, etc.), etc.) in the system-recommended widget stack 50241 (e.g., as shown in Figure 512). In some embodiments, the device adds widget preview 5022n” to the widget stack 50241 (e.g., when control 5290 is enabled) upon exiting the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270 (e.g., upon detection of a tap input on the cancel button 5282 or outside of the widget-specific configuration user interface, etc.). In some embodiments, the control 5290 is only made available when the widget preview 5022n” is of a same size (e.g., 2x2) as the size of widgets in the system-generated widget stack 50241 (e.g., 2x2). In some embodiments, when control 5290 is enabled, only the widget size option corresponding to the size of widgets in the — widget stack 50241 (e.g., 2x2) is available (e.g., widget size option radio button 5274a). In some embodiments, when control 5290 is enabled, the computer system automatically select the size of the widget 5022n for inclusion in the widget stack 5024i based on the size of the widget stack 50241, independent of the widget size that is selected for the preview 5022” shown in the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270.
[00476] [00476] In some embodiments, the widget 5022n with the configuration shown in the widget preview area 5280 can be added directly to a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface. For example, in Figure 517 tap input by a contact 6814 is detected at a 201
[00477] [00477] In some embodiments, in Figure 517, a swipe input by a contact 6816 is detected at a location corresponding to the location of widget preview 5022n”-1 (e.g., 2x2- sized “News: Today” widget preview) in the widget preview region 5280. In response to detecting the swipe input by the contact 6816, the computer system switches to display the preview of another available widget type (e.g., widget preview 5022n”-2 (e.g., “News: Sports” widget of a 2x2 size)), as shown in Figure 518 and as indicated by the highlighting of widget type indicator 5278b (e.g., “Topic 17). In some embodiments, at least a portion of other available widget previews (e.g., widget preview 5022n”-1, and widget preview 5022n”- 3) corresponding to other sizes and/or types is visible adjacent to the currently selected widget preview (e.g., widget preview 5022n”-2) displayed in the central region of the widget display region 5280.
[00478] [00478] In Figure 518, a tap input by a contact 6818 is detected at a location corresponding to the radio button 5274b (e.g., for widget size 2x4) in the widget size region
[00479] [00479] In Figure 519, a swipe input by a contact 6820 is detected at a location corresponding to the widget preview 5022n”-4 (e.g., 2x4-sized “News: Sports” widget preview). Figures 5110 and 5111 illustrate alternative responses to the swipe input by the contact 6820. For example, in some embodiments, in Figure 519, in response to detecting the swipe input by the contact 6820, the computer system returns to display the widget preview 5022n”-1 (e.g., the 2x2 "News: Today” (e.g., type "Today”) preview), as shown in Figure 5110 (e.g., widget type and widget size are changed in concert). In some embodiments, in Figure 519, in response to detecting the swipe input by the contact 6820, the computer system switches to display an updated widget preview 5022n”-5 (e.g., updated from 2x4-sized version of the "Today” widget type to a 2x4-sized version of the "Topic 1” widget type), as shown in Figure 5I11 (e.g., the widget size selector remains active for the newly displayed widget type). In some embodiments, the widget preview configuration in Figure 5I11 can — also be reached from Figure 5110. For example, in Figure 5110, a tap input by a contact 6822 is detected at the location of a radio button 5274b in the widget size region 5272. In response to detecting the tap input by contact 6822 at radio button 5274b, widget type for widget preview 5022n” remains the same, while widget size is updated to 2x4, as shown in Figure SI11.
[00481] [00481] Figures 5112-5116 collectively illustrate the addition of a widget from widget- specific configuration user interface into a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 5111 precedes Figure 5112, and illustrates that a leftward swipe input by a contact 6824 is detected in the widget preview display region 5280. In response to detecting the leftward swipe input by the contact 6824 in the widget preview display region 5280, the computer system displays the preview 5022n”-4 (e.g., a 2x4 widget of the “Topic 1” type) in the central region of the widget preview display region 5280, as shown in Figure 5112.
[00482] [00482] In Figure 5112, a tap-hold input by a contact 6826 is detected at a location corresponding to the location of widget preview 5022n”-4 in the widget preview display region 5280. In response to detecting the tap-hold input by the contact 6826, the widget preview 5022n”-4 becomes selected (e.g., is lifted out of widget-specific configuration user interface 5270, and becomes movable in accordance with the movement of the contact 6826). In response to movement of the contact 6826 after the widget preview 5022n”-4 is selected by the contact 6826, the widget preview 5022”-4 is moved relative to the widget-preview 5022n”-4 in accordance with the movement of the contact 6826 and the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270 is visually deemphasized, as shown in Figure 5113. As movement of the contact 6826 continues, the device ceases to display the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270, as shown in Figure 5114, where the underlying user- arranged page 5230” of the multipage home screen user interface is gradually restored from the deemphasized appearance. In Figure 5114, the widget representation 5022n”-4 (e.g., — relabeled as widget 5022n after leaving the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270) hovers over the user-arranged page 5230” under the contact 6826.
[00483] [00483] In Figure 5I15, where the user-arranged page 5230' has become fully restored, in accordance with movement of the contact 6826, the widget 5022n is moved upwards in the user-arranged page 5230’ and application icons 9-16 are reflown (e.g., moved downwards in a 2x4 block) to make space for the widget 5022n’. Upon termination of the drag input by the contact 6826 (e.g., upon liftoff of the contact 6826 while the widget 5022n is hovered over the third and fourth row of the layout grid of the application icons on the page 5230’, or 204
[00484] [00484] Figures 5117 and 5118 separately illustrates the addition of widgets or widget stacks to a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface using the widget selection and configuration user interface 5250 or the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00485] [00485] In some embodiments, the configuration of page 5230' shown in Figure 5117 can also be achieved directly from an input detected in the widget selection and configuration — user interface 5250 as shown in Figure 512. For example, in Figure 512, a tap input by the contact 6808 is detected at a location corresponding to widget selection affordance 5312n corresponding to the widget 5022n. In response to detecting the tap input by the contact 6808, the computer system adds the widget 5022n directly to the page 5230' at a default location (e.g., an upper left corner in the layout grid of the page), as shown in Figure 5117. In some embodiments, the widget selection affordances 5312 are replaced with selection affordances that do not directly add the corresponding widgets upon selection. Instead, one or more widgets can be selected in the widget selection and configuration user interface using their corresponding selection affordances, and the widget selection and configuration user interface includes a separate add button that, when activated by a tap input, causes the currently selected widgets to be added to default positions in a respective page. In some embodiments, adding multiple widgets to the same page at the same time may cause existing application icons to overflow to a preset location (e.g., a new folder on the page, a new page or next page adjacent to the page to which the widgets are added). In some embodiments, deletion of an added widget causes some or all of the overflowed application icons and/or widgets (e.g., application icons and/or widgets that were moved off the page when additional application icons or widgets were placed on the page) to flow back to the original page (e.g., as long as they have not been repositioned manually since being overflowed to the respective location, or as long the widget is deleted in the same reconfiguration session in which the widget was added to the page, etc.).
[00486] [00486] In some embodiments, widget stacks can also be automatically added to a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface. Returning to Figure 512, a tap or tap-hold input by a contact 6810 is detected at a location corresponding to the widget 205
[00487] [00487] Figures 6A-6K are flow diagrams illustrating a method 6000 of displaying an interacting with user interface objects corresponding to different applications, in accordance with some embodiments. The method 6000 is performed at computer system (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A) with a display generation component (e.g., a touch-screen 112) and one or more input devices (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface). In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch- sensitive surface and the display generation component are integrated into a touch-sensitive display. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 6000 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.
[00488] [00488] Method 6000 relates to providing access to a system user interface that includes representations of different automatically-generated groupings of applications that 206
[00490] [00490] In some embodiments, the plurality of automatically-generated groupings included on the respective user interface (e.g., the last page of the multipage home screen user interface or the overlay that is displayed overlaying the last page of the multipage home screen user interface) include (6016) one or more groupings that are generated based on respective categories for applications (e.g., productivity, gaming, lifestyle, social networking, communications, etc.) as defined by a source of the applications (e.g., a publisher of applications, an app store, an application download portal, etc.). In some embodiments, when an application is downloaded from a source of the applications, its category used at the source of the application is used as the basis to assign it to an existing automatically generated grouping included on the system-arranged home screen, or used as a basis to create a new grouping and include the application in the new grouping. In some embodiments, a respective grouping is represented as a folder icon on the system-arranged home screen with a folder label attached to the folder, and the folder label includes text specifying the name of the 212
[00491] [00491] In some embodiments, the plurality of automatically-generated groupings included on the respective user interface include (6018) a grouping (e.g., a “Recent” folder) that includes applications that are installed within a preset time window (e.g., installed within the past week, or past 30 days, etc.). In some embodiments, folder icon for the automatically- — generated grouping for the recently installed applications includes reduced scale images of application icons for a few most-recently installed applications. The newly installed applications also have application icons on the user-arranged home screens and optionally in other automatically generated groupings on the system-arranged home screen (e.g., groupings selected based on the application categories of the newly installed applications, or user — specified tags, etc.). In some embodiments, the automatically-generated grouping for the recently installed applications are automatically updated when a new application is installed on the computer system. Including applications that are installed within a preset time window in an automatically-generated grouping performs an operation (e.g., generating a grouping) when a set of conditions has been met (e.g., determining that the applications are installed within a preset time window) without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SA4 and 5A34, where a grouping for recently added applications is presented on the system-arranged home screen 5054 and the application library user interface 5054”.
[00492] [00492] In some embodiments, the plurality of automatically-generated groupings included on the respective user interface include (6020) at least a first representation of a first grouping for a first subset of applications that are installed on the computer system, a second representation of a second grouping for a second subset of applications that are installed on the computer system, wherein the first subset of applications and the second subset of applications include at least one application in common (e.g., the application icon for the at least one application is included in both the folder for the first grouping and the folder for the second grouping). For example, the application icon for a text messaging application is optionally included in the folder for a first grouping for communication-related applications, — and the folder for a second grouping for social-networking applications, and the folder for a third grouping for recently installed applications, etc. The text messaging application is automatically included in the first grouping based on its app store category (e.g., communications), and in the second grouping based on its functions or user-specified tags, and in the third grouping based on its installation time. Automatically including an application icon in both the first and the second groupings performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SA4 and 5A34, for example, where an application icon for the mail application is included in multiple groupings 5020a, 5020b, and 5020c.
[00493] [00493] In some embodiments, the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping (e.g., the folder icon for a respective grouping that is displayed on the system-arranged home screen, or another type of grouping representation — such as a platter, etc.) includes (6022) a first sub-portion and a second sub-portion (e.g., the first sub-portion includes areas occupied by application icons, and the second sub-portion includes areas not occupied by application icons; or the first sub-portion includes areas occupied by application icons, and the second sub-portion includes area occupied by a folder launch icon, etc.), wherein the first sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping includes a respective representation of a first application that belongs to the respective automatically-generated grouping, the second sub- portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping 214
[00494] [00494] In some embodiments, while displaying the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping including the first sub-portion and the second sub-portion of the respective representation (e.g., while displaying the folder icon for the respective automatically-generated grouping), the computer system detects (6024) an input directed to the first sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping (e.g., detecting a tap input on the first sub-portion of the folder icon for the communications grouping that shows a reduced scale application icon for the messages application; detecting a gaze input on the first sub-portion of the folder icon for 215
[00495] [00495] In some embodiments, the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping includes (6026) reduced-scale versions of application icons for at least some of the third set of application icons (e.g., the reduced scale versions of application icons are displayed on a folder launch icon for the respective grouping). In some embodiments, the second sub-portion of the representation of a respective grouping includes a folder icon, and the folder icon includes miniature versions of the application icons for at least a subset of the applications included in the respective grouping.
[00496] [00496] In some embodiments, the first sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping includes (6028) respective representations of one or more applications, including the first application, that belong to the respective — automatically-generated grouping, wherein the respective representations of the one or more applications are select for inclusion in the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping in accordance with a measure of frequency of use associated with the applications belonging to the respective automatically-generated grouping (e.g., the frequency of use data includes optionally frequency of use by a respective user of the computer system, and/or frequency of use across a large number of users (e.g., users of similar demographic as the user of the computer system, or users of various characteristics)). In some embodiments, if the folder icon for the communications grouping has three 217
[00497] [00497] In some embodiments, the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping includes (6030) an affordance (e.g., a graphical icon, a button, a folder launch icon, etc.) (e.g., an affordance that has the same size as the mini application icons shown on the folder icon) separate from the respective representation of the first application that belongs to the respective automatically-generated grouping (e.g., separate from the mini application icons for one or more applications that are selectively represented on the folder icon for the respective automatically-generated grouping). In the method 6000, while displaying the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping including the first sub-portion and the second sub-portion of the respective representation, the computer system detects an input directed to the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically- generated group. In response to detecting the input directed to the second sub-portion of the — respective representation of the respective automatically-generated group and in accordance with a determination that the input directed to the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the automatically-generated group meets preset criteria (e.g., icon activation 218
[00498] [00498] In some embodiments, the computer system detects (6032) that a new application is installed on the computer system (e.g., installed and having its application icon added to one of the user-arranged home screen user interface at a user-specified location or an available default location). In response to detecting that the new application is installed on the computer system, the computer system automatically includes an application icon for the 219
[00499] [00499] In some embodiments, the computer system replaces (6034) display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of the respective user interface (e.g., the system-arranged home screen, an application library user interface, etc.) includes displaying a first portion of the respective user interface that includes representations of a first subset of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings for the plurality of applications (e.g., the system-arranged home screen or the application library user interface has an adjustable size in at least one dimension (e.g., vertically, or horizontally)) and is scrollable in that dimension, while user-arranged home screens have fixed dimensions that are fully displayed and are not scrollable). In the method 6000, while displaying the first portion of the respective user interface, the computer system detects an input that meets scrolling criteria (e.g., including movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface in a direction that corresponds to the dimension that has adjustable size based on the number of groupings that need to be accommodated in the respective user interface that includes the representations of the automatically-generated groupings). In response to detecting the input that meets the scrolling criteria, the computer system scrolls the respective user interface to 220
[00501] [00501] In some embodiments, displaying the respective user interface includes (6038) displaying, in a first preset portion of the respective user interface (e.g., the top row, the upper left corner, etc.), respective application icons for a selected subset of the plurality of applications that are automatically identified (e.g., without requiring user input) by the computer system based on one or more characteristics of the selected subset of the plurality of applications that correspond a currently detected context (e.g., one or more contextual conditions existing at the current time at the computer system (e.g., current time, location, recent user inputs, recently used applications, recent notifications, etc.)). For example, in some embodiments, the selected subset of the plurality applications that are automatically identified (e.g., without requiring user input or request for such identification) from multiple (e.g., all, a predetermined set of, etc.) the applications installed on the computer system based on the current context includes at least one recently used application (e.g., last used application), at least one frequently used application, at least one application that is frequently used together with a last used application, at least one application that has pending requests for user input, at least one application that has new notifications, at least one application that has upcoming events (e.g., calendar application with scheduled events that 222
[00502] [00502] In some embodiments, displaying the respective user interface includes (6040) displaying a search input area in a second preset portion of the respective user interface (e.g., the search input area is optionally displayed above the first row of the representations for the plurality of automatically-generated groupings, and optionally is initially hidden and only revealed after a short downward swipe on the last page of the multipage home screen user interface), where a search performed in the search input area returns search results that are application icons for a subset of applications from the plurality of applications that correspond to the search criteria (e.g., keyword, app name, tag, category, grouping name, etc.) entered using the search input area without returning search results that include other — types of information (e.g., search results of types that are returned when searches are performed in other contexts on the device such as calendar events, messages, webpages, music, map locations, photos, news stories, settings, podcasts, notes, contact information, etc.). In some embodiments, the search results optionally also include user-configured mini application objects or widgets that are included on the user-arranged homes screens, in — addition to the application icons for applications that are installed on the computer-system. In some embodiments, in response to detecting an activation input (e.g., a tap input, a gaze input detected concurrently with an in-air tap input, etc.) directed to a respective application icon 223
[00503] [00503] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (6042) one or more filters for search results (e.g., toggle selector, selection radio buttons, etc.) concurrently with displaying the search input area in the preset portion of the last page of the multipage home screen user interface. A request to apply a first filter (e.g., a filter for applications with unread notifications, a filter for applications that are archived for not having been used for a long time, a filter for applications that require updating, etc.) of the one or more filters causes application icons for a first subset of applications that include notifications that meet predefined criteria (e.g., notifications that give rise to an indicator (e.g., a numbered badge on the application icon of the corresponding application, or floating banner on a currently displayed user interface, etc.)). A request to not apply the first filter causes application icons for a second subset of applications from the subset of applications that correspond to the search criteria using the search input area to be displayed as the search results, the second subset of applications includes the first subset of applications that include the active notifications and one or more applications that do not have the notifications that meet the 225
[00504] [00504] In some embodiments, the computer system detects (6044) input of one or — more search criteria in the search input area displayed at the preset portion of the respective user interface (e.g., detecting textual input or voice input specifying the search criteria when the search input area has input focus, followed by a confirmation input submitting the search 226
[00505] [00505] In some embodiments, while displaying a second application icon corresponding to a second application that is responsive to search criteria provided using the search input area displayed at the preset portion of the respective user interface, the computer system detects (6046) an input that meets preset criteria for triggering deletion of the second application icon from the search result display area (e.g., a touch-hold input on the second application icon followed by activation of a deletion affordance associated with the second 228
[00506] [00506] In some embodiments, while displaying the third subset of application icons in response to activation of the respective representation of the respective automatically- generated grouping in accordance with the first criteria, including displaying at least a first application icon corresponding to a first application that belong to the respective — automatically-generated grouping at a first location, the computer system detects (6048) an input that drags the first application icon from the first location to a second location different from the first location (e.g., the second location is an edge of the respective user interface, or the search result interface). In response to detecting the input that that drags the first application icon from the first location to the second location: the computer system ceases — display of the respective user interface; and the computer system displays a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., one of the user-arranged home screen user interface that is selected based on the location and duration of the drag input) that is different from the respective user interface. While displaying the first application icon over the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, the computer system detects a termination of the input that had dragged the first application icon from the first location to the second location. In response to detecting the termination of the input that had dragged the first application icon from the first location to the second location: the computer system moves the first application icon from an original location of the first application icon on the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., an original location on one of the user-arranged — home screen, as opposed on the system-arranged home screen) to a new location on the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, the new location being selected in accordance with a final location of the first application icon at termination of the input that had dragged the first application icon from the first location to the second location. In some embodiments, the user will have difficulty locating an application icon for an installed application on the many pages of the user-arranged home screen user interface. In such a scenario, the user can locate the grouping of the application and find the application icon on the system-arranged home screen, and directly drag and drop the application icon from the system-arranged home screen to a new desired location on one of the user-arranged home screens. This adjustment of location on the user-arranged home screens do not alter the — placement location of the application icon on the system-arranged home screen. In some embodiments, dragging an application icon (e.g., touch-hold on the application icon until the application icon is selected and then move to drag the application icon) causes the user- arranged home screen user interface to enter a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon 230
[00507] [00507] In some embodiments, while displaying the third subset of application icons in response to activation of the respective representation of the respective automatically- generated grouping in accordance with the first criteria, including displaying at least a second application icon corresponding to a second application that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping at a third location, the computer system detects (6050) an input that meets preset criteria for triggering deletion of the second application icon from the respective user interface (e.g., a touch-hold input on the second application icon followed by activation of a deletion affordance associated with the first application icon, a swipe input on the second application icon to show an option to delete the second application icon followed by activation of the option). In response to detecting the input that meets the preset criteria 231
[00508] [00508] In some embodiments, the plurality of automatically-generated groupings — include (6052) a first automatically-generated grouping, the first automatically-generated grouping includes respective application icons for a subset of applications corresponding to a category associated with the first grouping, and one or more user interface objects containing application content (e.g., mini-application objects, widgets, etc.) from the subset of applications corresponding to the category associated with the first grouping. For example, in some embodiments, the folder icon for a grouping of applications is implemented as a mini application object for the grouping, and shows notifications and/or information (e.g., availability of updates, new levels for games, new features for download, etc.) extracted from the applications included in the grouping. Including the one or more user interface objects containing application content in the first automatically-generated grouping provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., allowing the user to view content from respective applications). Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
[00510] [00510] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (6056) a first user interface object (e.g., a page navigation element (e.g., a slider, a series of page indicator icons, a wheel, a virtual spring, etc.)) that is persistently at a respective location during navigation through the multipage home screen user interface. While displaying the first user interface object, the computer system detects a movement input (e.g., a swipe input by a contact on a touch-sensitive surface, an in-air swipe input while a gaze input is detected on the first user interface object, etc.) that corresponds to movement along the first user interface object. In response to detecting the movement input: in accordance with a determination that a movement input meets first movement criteria, wherein the first movement criteria require the movement input to meet a first value of a movement metric (e.g., first speed, and/or first amount of movement, etc. instead of or in addition to the termination location of the input) in — order for the first movement criteria to be met, the computer system displays a first page of the multipage home screen user interface that corresponds to the first value of the movement metric; and in accordance with a determination that a movement input meets second movement criteria, wherein the second movement criteria require the movement input to meet a second value of the movement metric (e.g., second speed, and/or second amount of movement, etc. instead of or in addition to the termination location of the input) in order for the second movement criteria to be met, the computer system displays a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that corresponds to the second value of the movement metric, wherein the second value of the movement metric is different from the first value of the movement metric, and the second page is different from the first page. For example, in some embodiments, a quick and short swipe input on the page navigation element causes the computer system to navigate further through the multipage home screen user interface, e.g., as much as a slow and long swipe input on the page navigation element that started at the same position as the quick and short swipe input. Displaying a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, depending on whether the movement input meets respective movement criteria, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, 235
[00511] [00511] In some embodiments, the respective user interface is (6058) the last page of the multipage home screen user interface. For example, in some embodiments, the last page of the multipage home screen user interface has a corresponding page indicator in the sequence of page indicators in the page navigation element. In some embodiments, a widget screen is the first page of the multipage home screen user interface and also has a corresponding page indicator in the sequence of page indicators in the page navigation element. Placing the respective user interface as the last page of the multipage home screen user interface performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. This is illustrated in Figures SA1-5A4, for example, where the respective user interface is a system-arranged page 5054 of a multipage home screen user interface and the system-arranged page 5054 is the last page in a sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface and has a corresponding page indicator icon along the page indicator icons shown in the page navigation element 5004.
[00512] [00512] In some embodiments, the respective user interface is (6060) overlaid on the last page of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., the second page is the last page of the multipage home screen user interface, and the second page is blurred and darkened and optionally pushed backward away from the user when the system-arranged user interface is displayed on top). In some embodiments, the system-arranged user interface is not represented by a corresponding page indicator in the sequence of page indicators in the page 236
[00513] [00513] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 6A-6K have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 7000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 11000, 12000, 13000, and 14000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 6000 described above with respect to Figures 6A-6K. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and/or configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method 6000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection 237
[00514] [00514] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.
[00515] [00515] The operations described above with reference to Figures 6A-6K are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B. For example, detection operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.
[00516] [00516] Figures 7A-7H are flow diagrams illustrating a method 7000 of reconfiguring the multipage home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00517] [00517] Method 7000 relates to providing access to a page editing user interface that displays representations of user-arranged pages of a multipage home screen user interface in a manner that allows a user to rearrange, hide, delete, and/or restore selected ones of the user- 238
[00518] [00518] The method 7000 is performed at a computer system (e.g., a computer, an electronic device, a handheld electronic device, a portable electronic device, a tablet device, a mobile phone, etc.) in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a touch- sensitive display, a display, a projector, a head mounted display (HMD), etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more processors and memory that are enclosed in the same housing, while the display generation component is enclosed in a different housing from the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system including one or more processors and memory is enclosed in the same housing as the display generation component. In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with 239
[00519] [00519] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (7017), while the first page of the multipage home screen user interface is displayed in the first reconfiguration mode, a first user interface object (e.g., a page editing affordance (e.g., the page indicators with a modified appearance, or a new affordance, etc.)) for activating a second reconfiguration mode (e.g., the page editing mode) associated with the multipage home screen user interface, wherein the second input that meets the second criteria activates the first user interface object in a first manner (e.g., tapping on the first user interface object, touch and hold on the first user interface object, etc.). In some embodiments, the first user interface object includes multiple portions respectively corresponding to different pages (e.g., all pages, some pages, each page, etc.) of the multipage home screen user interface, and an input directed a respective portion of the multiple portions of the first user interface object (e.g., an input is directed to the respective portion when the contact is touching the portion (e.g., a tap, or a swipe)) in the non-reconfiguration mode, or the first reconfiguration mode causes navigation to the page that corresponds to the respective portion of the multiple portions of the first user interface object. In some embodiments, a swipe input on the first user interface object causes navigation through the multipage home screen user interface, and a speed and/or duration of the swipe input, along with the distance and/or starting and ending locations of the swipe input are used to determine which page of the multipage home screen user interface is displayed in response to the swipe input. In some embodiments, in response to an input detected on the first user interface object, the computer system: in accordance with a determination that the input is a first type of input (e.g., swipe, tap on a page indicator icon, etc.), performs a navigation operation through the multipage home screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the input is a second type of input (e.g., a tap input (e.g., tap to navigate is disabled) anywhere on the first user interface object, a tap input — on an area not occupied by a page indicator icon, a touch and hold input, a press input, etc.), activates the second configuration mode (e.g., when the first configuration mode is activated, and/or when the first configuration is not activated). In some embodiments, the first user 243
[00520] [00520] In some embodiments, while displaying the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces in first user interface (e.g., the page editing user interface), the computer system detects (7018) a third input that meets third criteria (e.g., criteria for moving the representations relative to each other in a first portion of the page editing user interface, criteria for detecting a drag input (e.g., a horizontal drag input, a drag and drop input that start and ends at different positions in the same first portion (e.g., upper portion showing the representations of currently included home screens, as opposed to lower portion showing the representations of the hidden pages of the home screens) of the page editing user interface, etc.) directed to a respective representation of a home screen, — etc.). In response to detecting the third input that meets the third criteria: the computer system reorders the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces in accordance with the third input (e.g., moving a first representation for a first user-arranged home screen from a position preceding that of a second representation for a second user-arranged home screen to a position succeeding that of the second representation for the second user-arranged home screen, or moving a third representation for a third user- arranged home screen from a position succeeding that of the second representation for the second user-arranged home screen to a position preceding that of the second representation 244
[00521] [00521] In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface including the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface, the — computer system detects (7020) a fourth input that meets fourth criteria and corresponds to a request to exit the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., the fourth input is a upward swipe directed to the page editing user interface (e.g., started from the bottom of the upper portion of the page editing user interface, started from the bottom of the whole page editing user interface, etc.) as opposed to a particular selected representation of a page shown in the page — editing user interface, the fourth input is a tap input on a done button shown in the page editing user interface, etc.). In response to detecting the fourth input that corresponds to the request to exit the second reconfiguration mode: in accordance with a determination that the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface are arranged in accordance with a first order in the first user interface at a time when the fourth input is received, the computer system displays the multipage home screen user interface with the pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces arranged in accordance with the first order (e.g., the pages of the multipage home screen user interface are displayed one by one in 245
[00522] [00522] In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface including the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface, the computer system detects (7022) a fourth input that meets fourth criteria and corresponds to a request to exit the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., the fourth input is a upward swipe directed to the page editing user interface (e.g., started from the bottom of the upper portion of the page editing user interface, started from the bottom of the whole page editing user interface, etc.) as opposed to a particular selected representation of a page shown in the page editing user interface, the fourth input is a tap input on a done button shown in the page editing user interface, etc.). In response to detecting the fourth input that corresponds to the request to exit the second reconfiguration mode: the computer system ceases displaying of the first user interface including the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface; and the computer system displays a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., the page is a new page added to the multipage home screen from among the hidden pages, the page that is moved during the second reconfiguration mode, the page that was displayed prior to entering the second reconfiguration mode, the beginning page of the multipage home screen user interface, etc.) in the first reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, while displaying the respective page in the first reconfiguration mode, the computer system detects a drag input on a respective application icon on the respective page, and dropping it onto a different page that succeeds the respective page in accordance with a new order of the pages that was specified during the second reconfiguration mode. Displaying the respective page of the multipage home screen — user interface in the first reconfiguration mode and ceasing displaying of the first user interface, in response to detecting the fourth input, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5B11-5B13 and Figures 5B14-5B16, for example, where upon exiting the second reconfiguration mode in response to an input that corresponds to a 247
[00523] [00523] In some embodiments, in the second reconfiguration mode, the representations of the plurality of pages are (7024) displayed with (e.g., on the same page editing user interface, concurrently displayed, etc.) a preset holding area for displaying reduced representations of hidden pages that are not currently included in the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, the preset holding area are displayed concurrently with the first portion of the page editing user interface in the first user interface (e.g., the page editing user interface). In some embodiments, the first user interface includes a primary page for the representations of the plurality of pages currently included in the multipage home screen user interface, and a secondary page for the representations of zero or more pages that were included in the multipage home screen user interface in the past, and are not currently — included in the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, the secondary page of the page editing user interface is displayed in response to a preset input detected on the primary page of the page editing user interface (e.g., a tap input detected on a graphical image or affordance corresponding to the secondary page of the page editing user interface). Displaying reduced representations of hidden pages that are not currently included in the multipage home screen user interface in the second configuration mode in the preset holding area reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., viewing and accessing previously hidden pages). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by — enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 5B11, for example, where representations of pages that are currently hidden (e.g., representations 5064” and 5066” for the hidden pages 5064 and 5066) are displayed in a 248
[00524] [00524] In some embodiments, in the second reconfiguration mode, the representations of the plurality of pages are (7026) displayed, in an ordered sequence, with (e.g., on the same page editing user interface, concurrently displayed, etc.) representations of one or more hidden pages that are not currently included in the multipage home screen user interface, wherein the representations of the one or more hidden pages are visually distinguished from the representations of the plurality of pages (e.g., the representations of the one or more hidden pages are displayed with a first visual characteristic that distinguish the representations of the one or more hidden pages from the representations of the plurality of pages) (e.g., representations of the hidden pages are displayed with a reduced visual prominence (e.g., shrunken, dimmed, more translucent, etc.) as compared to the representations of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface). In some embodiments, the representations of pages that are currently included in the multipage home screen user interface and not hidden are displayed with a deletion affordance, and when the deletion affordance is activated, the corresponding page is hidden, and the representation of the hidden page no longer has the deletion affordance, but instead has a restore affordance. Activation of the restore affordance un-hides the corresponding page so it will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface again once the device exits — the second reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, selection of a representation of a page in the second reconfiguration mode causes display of the page in the second reconfiguration mode so the user can inspect the page before deciding whether to restore the page or continue to keep it as a hidden page. In some embodiments, the hidden pages are displayed among the unhidden pages in a sequence, and can be reordered relative to the — unhidden pages in the second reconfiguration mode. Displaying the one or more hidden pages in a visually distinguishing manner from the representations of the plurality of pages provides improved visual feedback to the user. Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the — user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SF10, for example, where the representations of pages that are currently hidden (e.g., representations 5302” and 5310” for the hidden pages 5302 and 5310) are displayed in the 249
[00525] [00525] In some embodiments, while displaying the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces in the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., while displaying the page editing user interface), the computer system detects (7028) a fifth input that meets fifth criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a sequence of one or more inputs for selecting a representation of a user-arranged home screen and marking it as hidden, or moving it into the preset holding area on the page editing user interface, etc.). In response to detecting the fifth input that meets the fifth criteria: in accordance with a determination that the fifth input is directed to the first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface, the computer system ceases to display the first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interfaces (e.g., when in the normal/non-reconfiguration mode of operation) (e.g., changing appearance of the first representation relative to the other representations, removing the first representation from the area that displays the other representations, marking the first representation as hidden while not marking the other representations, etc.). In accordance with a determination that the fifth input is directed to the second representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface, the computer system ceases to display the second representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interfaces (e.g., changing appearance of the second representation relative to the other representations, removing the second representation from the area that displays the other representations, marking the second representation as hidden while not marking the other representations, etc.). In some embodiments, the representations of the pages selected by the inputs meeting the fifth criteria are grayed out in the page editing user interface, rather than moved to a preset holding area for hidden pages. Ceasing to display the respective representation of the page of the multipage home screen user interface, in response to detecting the fifth input that meets the fifth criteria directed to the respective representation of the page, performs an operation when — a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and 250
[00526] [00526] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the fifth input that meets the fifth criteria (7030): in accordance with a determination that the fifth input is directed to the first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface, the computer system displays a reduced representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface in a preset holding area in the first user interface (e.g., the lower portion of the page editing user interface), and in accordance with a determination that the fifth input is directed to the second representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface, the computer system displays a reduced representation of the second page of the multipage home screen interface in the preset holding area in the first user interface (e.g., the lower portion of the page editing user interface). Displaying the respective reduced representation of the page of the multipage home screen interface in the preset holding area in the first user interface, in — response to detecting the fifth input that meets the fifth criteria directed to the respective representation of the page, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling — the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5B11-5B16, for example, where the pages 5064 and 5066 become hidden in response to user inputs that drag the representations 5064” and 5066” into the preset holding area 5100 251
[00527] [00527] In some embodiments, after ceasing to display the first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface or the second representation of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., while displaying a reduced representation of a respective page (e.g., a reduced representation of the first page, or the reduced representation of the second page) of the multipage home screen user interface in the preset holding area), the computer system detects (7032) a sixth — input that meets sixth criteria and corresponds to a request to exit the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., criteria for detecting an upward swipe gesture on the touch-screen while the page editing user interface is displayed, a tap input on a “done” button shown in the page editing user interface, etc.). In response to detecting the sixth input that meets the sixth criteria and corresponds to the request to exit the second reconfiguration mode: in accordance with a determination that the first representation of the first page was no longer displayed as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface when the sixth input was detected (e.g., that the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface that has its reduced representation in the preset holding area is the first page of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface, when the sixth input was detected), the computer system displays the multipage home screen user interface without including the first page among the plurality of pages that are in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., the first page is not displayed when the user browses through the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface using inputs that meet page navigation criteria); and in accordance with a determination that the second representation of the second page was no longer displayed as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface when the sixth input was detected (e.g., the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface that has its reduced representation in the preset holding area is the second page of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface, when the sixth input was detected), the computer system displays the multipage home screen user interface without including the second page of the plurality of pages that are in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., the second page is not displayed when the user browses 252
[00528] [00528] In some embodiments, while displaying (e.g., in the first reconfiguration mode, or some other mode that allows direct activation of the second reconfiguration mode, etc.) the multipage home screen user interface without including a respective page (e.g., the — first page or the second page) that were previously displayed in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., the respective page that was removed from the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the page editing user interface earlier) (e.g., the respective page that had a corresponding reduced representation in the preset holding area right before the second reconfiguration mode was exited), the computer system detects — (7034) a request to enter the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., the selection of the highlighted page indicators shown in the first reconfiguration mode). In response to detecting the request to enter the second reconfiguration mode while displaying the multipage home 253
[00529] [00529] In some embodiments, while displaying the reduced representation of the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., in a preset holding area or dimmed out or otherwise visually distinguished from reduced representations of other pages in the multipage home screen interface that are currently active), the computer system detects (7036) an eighth input that meets eighth criteria (e.g., criteria for dragging the reduced representation of the respective page (e.g., the first page or the second page, or another previously hidden page, etc.), or tapping a restore — button associated with the respective page). In response to detecting the eighth input that meets the eighth criteria: the computer system displays the representation of the respective page as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., the eighth input is a drag and drop input that moves the respective page from the hidden page area of the page editing user interface to a location among the representations of the set of pages that are currently included in the multipage home screen user interface, or an input that restores the appearance of the reduced scale representation of the page such that it is no longer visually distinguished from other pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface). In some embodiments, once the respective page is moved back to the area showing the representations of the set of pages that are currently included in the multipage home screen user interface or restored in appearance, the respective page will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface and accessible by a page navigation input after the device has exited the second reconfiguration mode. Displaying the representation of the respective page as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen — user interface, in response to detecting the eight input that meets the eight criteria while displaying the reduced representation of the respective page of the multipage home screen interface, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated, for example, in Figures 5B11 followed by Figure 5B13, where a previously hidden page (e.g., 255
[00530] [00530] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (7038), in the second reconfiguration mode, one or more reduced representations of pages that are will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., the representations of the hidden pages are displayed in a preset holding area (e.g., the preset holding area is a designated area — thatis concurrently displayed in the page editing user interface with the representations of the pages that are currently included in the multipage home screen user interface) or visually marked to distinguish them from other pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface outside of the second reconfiguration mode), respective reduced representations of the pages correspond respective pages of the home screen user interface that have been previously excluded from being displayed in the multipage home screen user interface while the second reconfiguration mode was active (e.g., the pages were optionally removed from the multipage home screen user interface or marked as hidden during a single page editing session, or multiple separate page editing sessions). While displaying, in the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., in the preset holding area or marked as hidden), the one or more reduced representations of pages that will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface, the computer system detects a ninth input that meets ninth criteria (e.g., detecting activation of a deletion affordance associated with the preset holding area, detecting a predefined deletion gesture directed to the preset holding area, etc.). In response to detecting the ninth input that meets the ninth criteria, the computer system ceases display of the one or more reduced representations of pages that will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., while maintain display of representations of other pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration 256
[00531] [00531] In some embodiments, the one or more reduced representations of pages that — will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface include (7040) multiple reduced representations corresponding to multiple pages that will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface, and the multiple reduced representations are deleted from the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., deleted form preset holding area) by a single input that meets the eighth criteria. For example, in some embodiments, the preset holding — area for the hidden pages contain reduced representations of pages that were removed from the multipage home screen user interface in several different page editing sessions, and multiple (e.g., all, some, etc.) of the hidden pages are optionally deleted at the same time in response to a single input, such as selecting a deletion affordance displayed in the page editing user interface (e.g, in the preset holding area). In some embodiments, the hidden pages are automatically deleted individually or in batches based on the time that they have been held in the preset holding area (e.g., deleted after 30 days, a week, etc.). In some embodiments, the hidden pages in the preset holding area can be individually added back to 257
[00532] [00532] In some embodiments, the multipage home screen user interface includes (7042) one or more user-arranged pages and one or more system-arranged pages, and wherein the representations of the plurality of pages concurrently displayed in the second reconfiguration mode does not include representations of the one or more system-arranged pages. In some embodiments, features of the system-arranged pages of the multipage home screen are as those described with respect to Figures SA1-5A36 and accompanying descriptions. For example, in some embodiments, the system-arranged pages of the home — screen user interface includes representations for different groupings of application icons that are also shown on the user-arranged pages of the home screen user interface, and the system- arranged pages have fixed positions relative to the user-arranged pages, and cannot be deleted or moved around using the page editing user interface. Removing the display of the representations of the one or more system-arranged pages when displaying the representations of the plurality of pages concurrently displayed in the second reconfiguration mode performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring 258
[00533] [00533] In some embodiments, multipage home screen user interface displayed in the first reconfiguration mode includes (7044) a first predefined user interface object for activating the second reconfiguration mode, and the second input that meets the second criteria includes an input that activates the first predefined user interface object. In some embodiments, the first predefined user interface object is displayed in response to the activation of the first reconfiguration mode. Including the first predefined user interface object for activating the second reconfiguration mode reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., entering into page reconfiguration mode). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 5B2, for example, wherein the first predefined user interface object for activating the second reconfiguration mode is the highlighted page navigation element 5004 , and the input that activates the first predefined — user interface object is a tap input on the highlighted page navigation element 5004. These features are also illustrated in Figure 5F3, for example, where the first predefined user interface object for activating the second reconfiguration mode is the highlighted page navigation element 5004, and the input that activates the first predefined user interface object is a tap input on the highlighted page navigation element 5004.
[00534] [00534] In some embodiments, the first predefined user interface object is (7046) displayed at a location corresponding to a plurality of page indicators corresponding to the plurality of pages that are currently included for display in the multipage home screen user 259
[00535] [00535] In some embodiments, the first predefined user interface object is (7048) displayed on multiple pages (e.g, all pages, some pages, each page, user-arranged pages, — etc.) of the plurality of pages that are currently included in the multipage home screen user interface and includes a plurality of page indicators for the plurality of pages with a changed appearance. For example, the individual page indicators are enclosed in a single user interface object and highlighted. The single user interface object is activated by an input directed to the single user interface object (e.g., a tap input on the user interface object, a gaze input directed to the user interface object followed by an in air tap input, etc.). In some embodiments, the page indicators still function as a navigation element in the first reconfiguration mode with the changed appearance, as they do in the non-reconfiguration 260
[00536] [00536] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input that meets the first criteria (e.g., a touch-hold input on an application icon, a touch-hold and drag input on an application icon, a press input on an application icon, a predefined reconfiguration gesture, atouch-hold input on an unoccupied area on the home screen, etc.) (7050): the computer system displays a second predefined user interface object (e.g., an “add” button, a link to an object editing user interface, etc.) on the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, wherein activation of the second predefined user interface object in accordance with preset criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a tap input, a — press input, etc.), causes display of an object-editing user interface for selecting and configuring user interface objects that include application content for inclusion into one or more pages of the multipage home screen user interface. In some embodiments, the user interface object that include application content are also referred to as mini application objects or widgets in this specification. More features and descriptions of the user interface object that includes application content are provided with respect to Figures 5C1-5C73 and 5D1-5D12 and accompanying descriptions. In some embodiments, the second predefined user interface object is displayed irrespective of which user-arranged page of the multipage 261
[00537] [00537] In some embodiments, while concurrently displaying, in the first user interface (e.g., the page editing user interface), the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces, the computer system detects (7052) a tenth input that meets tenth criteria (e.g., an upward swipe gesture that starts from the bottom portion of the — touch-screen, a tap input on a “done” button, a tap on an empty area of the page editing user interface, etc.). In response to detecting the tenth input that meets the tenth criteria: the computer system terminates the second reconfiguration mode, including ceasing to display the first user interface; and the computer system redisplays a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., the respective page is a restored hidden page, the page from which the second reconfiguration mode was started, the beginning page of the multipage home screen user interface, a page corresponding to a currently selected representation in the first user interface, the system-arranged page, etc.). Terminating the second reconfiguration mode and redisplaying the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, in response to detecting the tenth input that meets the tenth criteria, reduces the number of — inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., leaving the second reconfiguration mode). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces 262
[00538] [00538] In some embodiments, redisplaying the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface includes (7054) redisplaying the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, the redisplaying includes displaying the respective page in a normal mode (e.g., application icons are functional with positions that are not adjustable in response to user inputs), rather than the first reconfiguration mode. Terminating the second reconfiguration mode and redisplaying the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, in response to detecting the tenth input that meets the tenth criteria, reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., leaving the second reconfiguration mode). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures —5B9-5B10, for example, where a tap input by the contact 5555 on an unoccupied area of the page editing user interface 5062 or an upward edge swipe input by the contact 5554 causes the computer system to exit the second reconfiguration mode, and redisplay a page (e.g., user-arranged page 5050”) of the home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode.
[00539] [00539] In some embodiments, while the respective page of the multipage home screen — user interface is displayed in the first reconfiguration mode, the computer system detects (7056) an eleventh input that meets the tenth criteria (e.g. an upward swipe gesture that starts from the bottom portion of the touch-screen, a tap input on a “done” button, a tap on an empty area of the page editing user interface, etc.). In response to detecting the eleventh input that meets the tenth criteria, the computer system terminates the first reconfiguration mode, and redisplays the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface (e.g., in a normal mode of operation). Terminating the first reconfiguration mode and redisplaying the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, in response to detecting the 263
[00540] [00540] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 7A-7H have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 6000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 11000, 12000, 13000, and 14000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 7000 described above with respect to Figures 7A-7H. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and/or configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method — 7000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- 264
[00541] [00541] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.
[00542] [00542] The operations described above with reference to Figures 7A-7H are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B. For example, detection operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a — user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.
[00543] [00543] Figures 8A-8M are flow diagrams illustrating a method 8000 of inserting a user interface object containing application content (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) in a page of a home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00544] [00544] Method 8000 relates to accommodating displaced application icons and/or widgets that do not fit within the current page of a multipage home screen user interface when inserting a new widget into the page. As described herein, different sets of application icons and optionally widgets are moved to the same preset respective when a new widget is dragged around to different placement locations on the current page. In some embodiments, the respective location is a new folder that is created on the current page. The user can later inspect the folder and be prompted about the actions that should be taken with respect to the displayed application icons. In some embodiments, the respective location is a newly created page in the multipage home screen user interface. In either case, it is not necessarily the case that the application icons and widgets located at the bottom of the page are always displaced and moved onto a next existing page, but rather the user provided with some control over which set of application icons and/or widgets should be displaced and moved to the folder or new page. Providing a way to consistently accommodate displaced application icons and/or widgets when inserting a new widget on a page of the multipage home screen user interface and allowing the user control over which set of application icons and widgets are moved to a predictable preset respective enhances the operability of the device (e.g., by reducing user mistakes when operating the device) and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which improves battery life of the — device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently).
[00545] [00545] The method 8000 is performed at a computer system (e.g., a computer, an electronic device, a handheld electronic device, a portable electronic device, a tablet device, a mobile phone, etc.) in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a touch- sensitive display, a display, a projector, a head mounted display (HMD), etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more processors and memory that are enclosed in the same housing, while the display generation component is enclosed in a different housing from the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system including one or more processors and memory is enclosed in the same housing as the display generation component. In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with — one or more input devices (e.g., touch sensitive surfaces, touch-screen display, cameras, joysticks, motion detectors, etc.). In some embodiments, at least some of the one or more input devices are integrated with the display generation component (e.g., a touch-sensitive 266
[00546] [00546] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface (8014): in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a second location (e.g., the drag input is maintained over the second location for at least a threshold amount of time without being terminated, or the drag input terminates while the first user interface object is over the second location, etc.) corresponding to a second set of application icons (e.g., two or more application icons displayed at the second placement location that can accommodate the user interface object that includes application content) on the first user interface, the second location being different from the first location and the second set of application icons being different from the first set of application icons: the computer system moves the second set of application icons from the second location to the — respective location where the second set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location (e.g., into the newly created folder or newly created page of the multipage home screen user interface or 269
[00547] [00547] In some embodiments, the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface includes (8016) an input that drags the first user interface object across the first user interface, and the first user interface object is inserted into the first user interface upon termination of the first input. For example, as the first user interface object that includes application content is dragged across different portion of the first user interface, different sets of application icons are displaced to make room for the first user interface object, and different sets of displayed application icons (and/or other widgets) are moved to the same respective location, such as a folder displayed in the lower right corner of the first user interface or a new page of the multi- page home screen. Respective sets of application icons (e.g., some, all, each of the sets of application icons that were placed into the respective location, etc.) are restored to their respective original locations, if the first user interface object is not dropped at their respective original locations. Only the set of application icons that are located at the final drop off — location of the first user interface objects remain at the respective (e.g., in the folder or new page of the multipage home screen user interface) at the end of the drag and drop input (e.g., in addition to zero or more other icons that were placed at the respective (e.g., in the folder or 270
[00548] [00548] In some embodiments, after the termination of the first input is detected, while the first user interface object that includes application content is displayed at the first location 271
[00549] [00549] In some embodiments, the first set of application icons are (8020) moved into a folder (e.g., a newly created folder on the first user interface). In the method 8000, in response to detecting the first input and prior to detecting a termination of the first input: the computer system displays a first animated sequence illustrating movement of the first set of application icons into the folder when the first user interface object containing application content is dragged over the first location (e.g, after the first user interface object hovers over the first location for at least a threshold amount of time with less than a threshold amount of movement). The computer system displays a second animated sequence illustrating movement of the second set of application icons into the folder (and optionally, the first set of application icons moving out of the folder and back to the first location) when the first user interface object containing application content is dragged over the second location (e.g, after the first user interface object hovers over the second location for at least a threshold amount of time with less than a threshold amount of movement). Displaying the second animated sequence illustrating the movement of the second set of the application icons into the folder, when the first user interface object containing the application content is dragged over the second location, and in response to detecting the first input, provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., animation of the application icons). Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated — in Figures 5C37-5C42, where the computer system displays an animation showing the displaced application icons 5008ai and 5008aj flying out of the placement location near the 273
[00550] [00550] In some embodiments, the respective location (e.g., the folder on the first user interface, or a page of the multipage home screen user interface) is (8022) newly created in response to the first input. In some embodiments, the computer system displays an animated sequence showing the creation of a new folder for the displayed application icons in response to the first input. Displaying the first user interface object at the second location, in response to the second input, after the first set of application icons have been moved from the first location to a newly added location, when the performs an operation (e.g., repositioning the application icons after the first user interface object has been replaced) when a set of conditions has been met (e.g., the first user interface object has been replaced) without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the — user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SC2-5C4, for example, where the application icons 5008am-5008ao that are displaced by the insertion of the widget 5322 is placed onto a new page 5324” that is created in response to the tap input by the contact 5570 on the “add” button 5318 in the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304. These features are illustrated in Figures 5C38-5C39, for > example, where the application icons 5008ai-5008aj that are displayed by the insertion or hovering of widget 5310h are placed into a folder 5390a that is newly created in response to the drag (and optionally hover) input by the contact 5626.
[00551] [00551] In some embodiments, the respective location (e.g., the folder on the first user interface, or the page of the multipage home screen user interface) is (8024) an existing location (e.g., an existing folder on the first user interface or an existing page that has been created for displayed application icons, etc.). For example, in some embodiments, once a folder or page of the multipage home screen user interface is created to accommodate displaced application icons (or optionally, other user interface objects containing application content) due to insertion of a respective user interface object containing application content, it persists on the page or in the multipage home screen user interface, and is used to accommodate additional displaced application icons when additional user interface objects containing application content are inserted into the fully occupied page. Displaying the first 274
[00552] [00552] In some embodiments, the first set of application icons are (8026) moved into a folder (e.g., a newly created folder on the first user interface). In the method 8000, while displaying the first user interface including the folder that includes the first set of application — icons after detecting the termination of the first input, the computer system detects a third input that is directed to the folder (e.g., detecting a tap input by a contact at a location corresponding to the folder, detecting a gaze input directed to the folder in conjunction with an in-air tap input, etc.). In response to detecting the third input that is directed to the folder: the computer system displays at least a portion of content of the folder (e.g., including — displaying the first set of application icons in a folder window corresponding to the folder); and the computer system displays a prompt including one or more selectable options for performing respective operations with respect to the content of the folder (e.g., options for moving the application icons and user interface objects containing application content into a new page of the multipage home screen, renaming the folder, and/or deleting the application — icons and user interface objects containing application content, etc.). Displaying the prompt for performing respective operations with respect to the content of the folder, in response to detecting the third input that is directed to the folder, provides improved visual feedback to 275
[00553] [00553] In some embodiments, the one or more selectable options include (8028) a — first option to delete the first set of application icons. Including the first option to delete the first set of application icons in the one or more selectable options reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation. Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are also illustrated in Figure 5C56 following Figure 5C52, for example, where a tap input by the contact 5650 on the folder 5390a (Figure 5C52) cause the folder to be opened (Figure 5C56) with options to rename the folder, to delete some or all application icons in the folder (option 5398), and to create a new page for the application icons in the folder (option 5400).
[00554] [00554] In some embodiments, the one or more selectable options include (8030) a second option to create a new page that includes the first set of application icons, wherein the new page is to be included with the first user interface as separate pages in a multipage home screen user interface. Including the second to create a new page that includes the first set of application icons in the one or more selectable options reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation. Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are also illustrated in Figure 5C56 following Figure 5C52, for example, where a tap input by the contact 5650 on the folder 5390a (Figure 5C52) cause the folder to be opened (Figure 5C56) with options to rename the folder, to delete some or all application icons in the folder (option 5398), and to create a new page for the application icons in the folder (option 5400).
[00555] [00555] In some embodiments, the one or more selectable options include (8032) a third option to rename the folder. Including the third option to rename the folder in the one or more selectable options reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation. Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of — the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are also illustrated in Figure 5C56 following Figure 5C52, for example, where a tap input by the contact 5650 on the folder 5390a (Figure 5C52) cause the folder to be opened (Figure 5C56) with options to rename the folder, to delete some or all application icons in the folder (option 5398), and to create a new page for the application icons in the folder (option 5400).
[00556] [00556] In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface including the first user interface object (and optionally the folder containing the first set of application icons displaced by the first user interface object) (e.g., during the same user interface reconfiguration session), the computer system detects (8034) a fourth input (e.g., a second drag input that drags the second user interface object containing application content across the first user interface) corresponding to a request to insert a second user interface object that includes application content (e.g., a second widget or mini application object) into the first user interface. In response to detecting the fourth input corresponding to the request to insert — the second user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the input is directed to a fourth location corresponding to a fourth set of application icons on the first user interface: the computer system moves the fourth set of application icons from the fourth location to the respective location where the fourth set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first — user interface once they have been moved to the respective location; and the computer system displays the second user interface object that includes application content at the fourth location. Displaying the second user interface object that includes application content at the fourth location and moving the fourth set of application icons from the fourth location to the respective location, in accordance with the determination that the input is directed to the fourth location corresponding to the fourth set of application icons, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls 277
[00557] [00557] In some embodiments, prior to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface (8036): the computer system displays the first user interface in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., an icon reconfiguration mode), wherein positions of application icons in the first user interface are adjustable in response to user inputs during the first reconfiguration mode, and wherein the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode includes an affordance (e.g., an “add” button, a link to a widget selection and configuration user interface, etc.) that, when activated, causes display of an object-editing user interface (e.g., a widget selection and configuration interface) that includes a plurality of user interface objects respectively containing application content corresponding to different applications installed on the computer system. Causing the display of the object-editing user interface, in response to the activation of the affordance of the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the — user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are also illustrated in Figures 5C57-5C58 following Figure 5C52, for example, where a tap input by the contact 5644 on the add widget button 5094 (Figure 5C52) shown in the page 5302’ in the first 278
[00558] [00558] In some embodiments, the object-editing user interface includes (8038) a set of one or more preconfigured user interface objects containing application content corresponding to different applications of at least a subset of all applications installed on the computer system. In some embodiments, the object-editing user interface has a first portion that displays the listing of applications and a second portion that displays preconfigured widgets for a number of frequent used applications or preinstalled applications. Including the set of one or more preconfigured user interface objects containing application content corresponding to different applications of at least the subset of all application installed on the computer system reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., viewing different applications). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are also illustrated in Figure 5C57, for example, wherein the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 includes one or more preconfigured widgets (e.g., widget 5310f corresponding to application "App 17, widget 5310k corresponding to application “App 3”, etc.).
[00559] [00559] In some embodiments, the object-editing user interface includes (8040) respective representations of a plurality of applications installed on the computer system, and activation of the representation of a respective application in the object-editing user interface in accordance with preset activation criteria (e.g., a tap input on the respective representation of the respective application) causes display of a plurality of configuration options (e.g., size, selected application functions, update trigger, update frequency, etc.) associated with a respective user interface object that includes application content of the respective application (e.g., weather application, calendar application, messaging application, etc.). Causing the display of the plurality of configuration options associated with the respective user interface object, in response to activation of the representation of the respective application in the object-editing user interface, reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., viewing different configuration options for a user interface object). Reducing the 279
[00560] [00560] In some embodiments, the plurality of configuration options include (8042) a set of one or more object sizes for the respective user interface object that includes application content of the respective application. In some embodiments, a size selector is presented when a respective application is selected from a listing of applications that have associated widgets, and the size selector lists available sizes for widgets of the selected application. The available size is optionally given in units based on application icon size (e.g., how many rows or columns of application icons can be placed into the placement location of the widget (e.g., 2x4, 1x3, 1x4, 2x2, 2x4, 4x4, etc.)). Causing the display of the plurality of configuration options, including different object size options, associated with the respective user interface object, in response to activation of the representation of the respective application in the object-editing user interface, reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., viewing different configuration options for an user interface object). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5C57-5C58, for example, where a size selector with selectable options corresponding to different sizes of the calendar widget (e.g., up next widget 53101) is included in the application-specific widget selection and/or configuration user interface 5304” for the calendar application.
[00561] [00561] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (8044) a preview of a currently selected user interface object containing application content of the respective application in accordance with user-selected values for the plurality of configuration options.
[00562] [00562] In some embodiments, the object-editing user interface includes (8046) a plurality of recommended user interface objects respectively containing application content corresponding to different applications of at least a subset of applications installed on the computer system. For example, in some embodiments, the object-editing user interface includes at the top a small set of recommended widgets that are selected based on the user’s usage pattern for applications by the user and/or usage patterns for applications aggregated across multiple users, optionally followed by a listing of applications that leads a configuration user interface for configuring widgets for that application, and optionally followed by a listing of preconfigured user interface objects for different applications. Including the plurality of recommended user interface objects corresponding to different applications in the object-editing user interface reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., viewing different application content options). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 5C33-5C34, for example, where the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 (Figure 5C34) that is displayed in response to the tap input on the add widget button 5094 (Figure 5C33) includes a plurality of 281
[00563] [00563] In some embodiments, while the object-editing user interface is displayed, the computer system detects (8048) a fifth input selecting the first user interface object containing application content for inserting into the first user interface. In response to detecting the fifth input selecting the user interface object containing application content for inserting into the first user interface: the computer system ceases to display the object- editing user interface; and the computer system concurrently displays the first user interface object and the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode. For example, in some embodiments, after the object-editing user interface is dismissed by the selection of the first user interface object, the first user interface object containing application content is displayed hovering over a portion of the first user interface, waiting to be picked up by a drag input provided by the user to move the first user interface object to a desired placement location on the first user interface or, alternatively, the first user interface object is placed at a default location such as an upper right corner or an upper left corner of the first user interface and can be repositioned with a drag input directed to the first user interface object. In some embodiments, the fifth input includes a selection input followed by a drag input that moves the user interface object containing application content from its location on the object-editing user interface, and in response to the drag input that meets preset criteria (e.g., moved to the — side of the display, or by more than a threshold amount from the original location of the user interface object containing application content), the computer system ceases to display the object-editing user interface and displays the first user interface underneath the first user interface object before termination of the drag input (e.g., liftoff of the contact, cessation of the movement of the contact for more than a threshold amount of time, etc.). In some embodiments, the drag input positions the first user interface object and drops the first user interface object onto the first user interface at a desired location. In some embodiments, if the drag input does not meet the preset criteria before termination, the dragged user interface object is dropped back to its original location in the object-editing user interface. Concurrently displaying the first user interface object and the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode and ceasing to display the object-editing user interface, in response to detecting the fifth input selecting the user interface object, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation 282
[00564] [00564] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object including application content corresponds to a first application and has a first size, the first set of application icons include (8050) a first number of application icons. In accordance with a determination that the first user interface object including application content corresponds to a second application (e.g., different from the first application) and has asecond size different from the first size, the first set of application icons include a second number of application icons that is different from the first number of application icons, wherein the first number of application icons and the second number of application icons are respectively based on the first size and the second size of the first user interface object containing application content. Including different sets of application icons in the first set of application icons, depending on the size of the respective user interface object, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5C34-5C51, for example, where when a widget 5310h of 1x2 size is dragged from the widget selection and configuration user interface 5304 and dropped into the page 5302’ of the home screen user 283
[00565] [00565] In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode after the first user interface object containing application content has been inserted at the first location following the termination of the first input, the computer system detects (8052) a sixth input directed to the first user interface object containing application content (e.g., detecting a tap input directed to the first user interface object, while the first user interface is in the first reconfiguration mode). In response to detecting the sixth input directed to the first user interface object containing application content: in accordance with a determination that the sixth input meets preset criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a tap input, e.g., the input is a substantially stationary touch input with less than a threshold duration at a location of the first user interface object containing application content), the computer system displays a first object-specific object-editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content, wherein the first object-specific object-editing user interface displays a plurality of options for configuring the first user interface object containing application content. Displaying a first object-specific object- editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application — content, in accordance with a determination that the sixth input meets preset criteria, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 5C55 following Figure 5C52, for example, where after the widget 5310g is inserted into the page 5302’ in the first reconfiguration mode, a tap input by the contact 5648 on the widget 5310g (Figure 5C52) causes display of the widget configuration platter 5352 which includes configuration options 5394a-5394d for configuring the widget 5310g.
[00566] [00566] In some embodiments, displaying the first object-specific object-editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content includes (8054) rotating the first user interface object containing application content to reveal 284
[00567] [00567] In some embodiments, displaying the first object-specific object-editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content includes (8056) visually deemphasizing (e.g., darkening, blurring, otherwise obfuscating, etc.) regions of the first user interface outside of the first object-specific object-editing user interface (e.g., outside of the reverse side of the first user interface object containing — application content relative to the reverse side of the first user interface object containing application content). Visually deemphasizing regions of the first user interface outside the first object-specific object-editing user interface provides improved visual feedback to the user. Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 5C55, for example, where when the widget configuration platter 5352 is displayed, the underlying page 5302 is blurred and darkened relative to the widget configuration platter 5352.
[00568] [00568] In some embodiments, the first user interface includes (8058) multiple user interface objects containing application content that correspond to a first application, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object, where the second user interface object includes different information than the first user interface object. For 285
[00569] [00569] In some embodiments, the first user interface includes (8060) multiple user interface objects containing application content, the multiple user interface objects respectively containing application content from different applications. Including multiple user interface objects in the first user interface reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., selecting and adding different user interface objects containing application content). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure SC11, where widgets from different applications (e.g., App 17 and App 19) are included in — the same page 5302’. These features are illustrated in Figure 5D2, for example, where widgets from different applications (e.g., App 1 and App 2) are included in the same page
[00570] [00570] In some embodiments, the first user interface object contains (8062) first application content from the application corresponding to the first user interface object at a first time, and the first user interface object contains second application content from the application corresponding to the first user interface object that is different from the first application content at a second time different from the first time (e.g., the first user interface 286
[00571] [00571] In some embodiments, the first user interface object containing application content includes (8064) a visual indication of the application from which application content — contained in the first user interface object is obtained. For example, the widget or mini application object for a particular application includes a thumbnail image of the application icon and the title of the application, in addition to content from the application. Including a visual indication of the application from which application content contained in the first user interface object is obtained in the first user interface object provides improved visual feedback to the user. Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. This is illustrated in Figure 5C60, for example, where a widget 53101 that is added t to a page 5302’ includes an indication (e.g., application name, mini application — icon, etc.) that indicates that the widget 53101 is a widget of the calendar application.
[00572] [00572] In some embodiments, the first user interface is (8066) a respective page of a multipage home screen user interface. In the method 8000, while displaying the first user 287
[00573] [00573] In some embodiments, after displaying the first user interface object containing application content at the first location in response to detecting termination of the first input (8068): while the first user interface remains in the first reconfiguration mode, the computer system detects a seventh input removing (e.g., deleting or moving to a different page of the multipage home screen user interface) the first user interface object containing 288
[00574] [00574] In some embodiments, the first set of application icons are (8070) redisplayed at the first location following removal (e.g., deletion or move to a different page) of the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface. In some embodiments, if the first user interface object has been moved around the first user interface after insertion at the first location, when the first user interface object is removed from the first user interface, one or more other application icons that are currently on the first user interface are also moved back to their original locations on the first user interface. Restoring the first set of application icons from the respective location onto the first user interface at the first location, in response to detecting the seventh input removing the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and 289
[00575] [00575] In some embodiments, the respective location is folder that was created to store the first set of application icons when the first set of application icons were (8072) removed from the first location, and the new folder is deleted following removal of the first — user interface object containing application content from the first user interface and restoration of the first set of application icons back to the first location (e.g., presuming that the folder was created to accommodate the first set of application icons and containing no other application icons). Restoring the first set of application icons from the respective location onto the first user interface, and deleting the new folder, in response to detecting the seventh input removing the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
[00576] [00576] In some embodiments, the respective location is (8074) a new page of a multipage home screen user interface that was created to store the first set of application icons when the first set of application icons were removed from the first location, and the new page is deleted following removal of the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface and restoration of the first set of application icons back to the first location (e.g., presuming that the new page was created to accommodate the first set of application icons and containing no other application icons). Restoring the first set of application icons from the respective location onto the first user interface, and deleting the new folder and the new page, in response to detecting the seventh input removing the first — user interface object containing application content from the first user interface, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user 290
[00577] [00577] In some embodiments, the first set of application icons or the second set of application icons are (8076) moved to the respective location in accordance with a determination that there is insufficient space on the first user interface to accommodate insertion of the first user interface object containing application content. In the method 8000, before termination of the first input, the computer system displays (e.g., in response to the drag input reaching an edge of the first user interface before the first user interface object is dropped, in response to a tap input on a page indicator of the second user interface while the first user interface is being dragged by the first input) a second user interface different from the first user interface, including displaying a second plurality of application icons in accordance with a second layout in the second user interface, wherein there is sufficient space on the second user interface object to accommodate the second plurality of application icons — and the first user interface object containing application content. While displaying the second user interface including the second plurality of application icons in accordance with the second layout: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a fifth location corresponding to a fifth set of application icons on the second user interface: the computer system shifts one or more of the second plurality of application icons, including the fifth set of application icons, on the second user interface, to create space for inserting the first user interface object containing application content at the fifth location on the second user interface (e.g., maintaining display of the one or more of the second plurality of application icons on the second user interface, without moving them into any folder on the second user interface).In some embodiments, none of the second plurality of application icons is moved into a folder or new page as a result of the shifting. In some embodiments, one or more of the second plurality of application icons are moved into a folder or new page as a result of the shifting. Shifting one or more of the second plurality of application icons to create space for inserting the first user interface object, in accordance with the determination that the first input is directed to the fifth location and while displaying the second user interface, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, 291
[00578] [00578] In some embodiments, the respective location is (8078) a folder that is located at a predefined location (e.g., bottom right corner, top left corner, etc.) on the first user interface (e.g., as shown in Figure 5C39, the folder 5390a is in the lower right corner of the page 5302”, the last placement location for folders on the page 5302”). Moving the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location where the folder is located and displaying the first use interface object, in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to the first location corresponding to the first set of application icons, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation (e.g., reorganizing the set of application icons) when a set of conditions has been met (e.g., the first input is directed to the first location) without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device — more quickly and efficiently.
[00579] [00579] In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface including the first user interface object containing application content at the first location and a third user interface object that includes application content at a sixth location different from the first location (e.g., the third user interface object containing application content were added at a different time before or after the first user interface object containing application content was added to the first user interface), the computer system detects (8080) a seventh input that corresponds to a request to drag the third user interface object containing application content from the sixth location to the first location. In response to detecting the seventh input corresponding to the request to move the third user interface object that includes application — content to the first location: in accordance with a determination that a size of the third user interface object containing application content is greater than a size of the first user interface object containing application content, the computer system moves the first user interface object away from the first location (e.g., into a folder, onto a new page, or to another location on the first user interface, etc.) to create space for the third user interface object containing application content at the first location; and in accordance with a determination that the size of the third user interface containing application content is equal to (or smaller) the size of the first user interface object containing application content, the computer system forgoes 292
[00580] [00580] In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface including the first user interface object containing application content at the first location, the computer system detect (8084) an eighth input that corresponds to a request to drag and drop a fourth user interface object containing application content (on the same page of the multipage home screen user interface as the first user interface object containing application content or on a different page of the multipage home screen user interface) to the first location. In response to detecting the eighth input corresponding to the request to drag and drop the fourth user interface object containing application content to the first location: the computer system displays the fourth user interface object at the first location; and the computer system switches to displaying the first user interface object at the first location at a later time (e.g., automatically switched (e.g., without user input, and according to changing context, or according to a schedule, etc.), or in response to a user's request (e.g., a swipe input, a gaze input, etc.)). Displaying the fourth user interface object at the first location and switching to displaying the first user interface object at the first location at the later time, in response to detecting the eight input, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5C16-5C19, for example, where the 2x4 widget 5326 is dragged by the contact 5588 to a location over another 2x4 widget 5322 on the page 5302’, and dropped onto the 2x4 widget 5322; and the computer system creates a widget stack 5328 at the location of the widget 5322 that includes both the widget 5326 and the widget 5322, and the two widgets can be switched in response to swipe inputs by the contact 5592. In some embodiments, if automatic switching is enabled for the widget stack 5328, the computer system also automatically switches between displaying the widget 5322 and 5328 at the placement location of the widget stack 5328.
[00581] [00581] In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location on the first user interface, the computer system detects (8086) a user input that corresponds to a request to display, on the first user interface, a plurality of selectable options corresponding to the first user interface object (e.g., a user input that meets the criteria for displaying a quick action menu associated with the first 294
[00582] [00582] In some embodiments, while displaying the plurality of selectable options corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content, the computer system detects (8088) a user input that selects the second size of the one or more available 295
[00583] [00583] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the user input that selects the second size using the set of selectable controls, the computer system moves (8090) one or more application icons on the first user interface relative to the first location (and optionally, moving the first user interface object and/or one or more other user interface object containing application content on the first user interface from their original placement locations, as a result of the resizing of the first user interface object containing application content). For example, in some embodiments, when the widget is resized to a larger size (e.g., from a 2x2 size to 2x4 size, from a 2x4 to a 4x4 size, etc.), a block of application icons — adjacent to the widget (e.g., a 2x2 block of application icons on the left or right of the 2x2 widget, a 2x4 block of application icons above or below the 2x4 widget) are reflowed as a block to another location to make room for the widget on the user interface. In some embodiments, the resized widget expands at its original location which causes reflow of application icons and/or widgets to create room for the expanded widget. In some embodiments, the expanded widget itself is moved to a different location on the page which causes reflow of application icons and/or widgets to fill the location vacated by the expanded widget. Moving one or more application icons on the first user interface relative to the first location, in response to detecting the user input that selects the second size using the set of selectable controls, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, 296
[00584] [00584] In some embodiments, the second size of the first user interface object containing application content is (8092) greater than the first size of the first user interface object containing application content. In response to detecting the user input that selects the second size using the set of selectable controls: in accordance with a determination that a size of vacant placement locations on the first user interface does not correspond to a difference between the second size and the first size (e.g., individual vacant placement locations are smaller than the second size of the first user interface object containing application content; — an aggregate size of the vacant placement locations is smaller than the expansion of the first user interface object containing application content, as is or after reflowing and reorganization of the application icons and/or user interface objects containing application content on the first user interface, etc.), the computer system moves a set of one or more application icons (and optionally one or more user interface objects containing application content) existing on the first user interface to a predetermined location (e.g., a newly created page, a predetermined folder (e.g., existing or newly created) on the first user interface, the respective location that holds other overflowed application icons and widgets when the first user interface object was initially inserted into the page, etc.). Some aspects of how application icons and/or widgets can be overflowed into a predetermined location in response to expansion of an existing user interface object containing application on a page of the home screen user interface are analogous to that described with respect to insertion of one or more application icons or user interface object(s) containing application content (e.g., by dragging and dropping a single application icon, a single user interface object containing application content, a single widget stack, dragging and dropping a group of application icon(s), user interface objects containing application content, and/or widget stacks, by using an “add widget” button, an “add widget stack” affordance, etc. in a widget selection or configuration user interface, etc.) into a page that does not have sufficient amount of space to accommodate all or a preset set of existing application icons and user interface objects containing application content on the page and the newly inserted application icon(s) and user interface object(s) containing application content, and are not repeatedly described herein the interest of brevity. More details of how overflow application icons and/or widgets are moved to a predetermined location are described with respect to Figures 5C1-5C73 and Figures 7A-7H 297
[00585] [00585] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in conjunction with displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location, the computer system displays (8094) a visual feedback that includes an animated visual effect (e.g., motions of objects, shimmering visual effect, etc.) that propagates from the first location in different directions across the first user interface (e.g., application icons move on the first user interface as if under the influence of an invisible waves or rippling effect that originated from the first location, application icons change shape, color, etc., as if being illuminated by a propagating light wave that originated from the first location, etc.). In some embodiments, depending on the position of the insertion location of the first user interface object that includes application content on the first user interface, the starting location of the propagating visual effect are different, and consequently, the visual effect is applied to different application icons on the first user interface in different temporal orders depending on the relative positions of the application icons and the first location. In some embodiments, the visual effect is only applied a user interface object containing application content is dragged into the user interface and dropped on the user interface, and the visual effect is not applied if the user interface object containing application content is already residing in the user interface (e.g., already existing before the start of the reconfiguration mode, or having been dropped into the page earlier during the reconfiguration — mode of the home screen user interface, etc.). In some embodiments, the visual effect is also not applied, if the user interface object containing application content is added to a default position on the user interface using an “add widget” button, rather than dragged and dropped 298
[00586] [00586] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 8A-8M have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 6000, 7000, 9000, 10000, 11000, 12000, 13000, and 14000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 8000 described above with respect to Figures 8A-8M. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and 299
[00587] [00587] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information — processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.
[00588] [00588] The operations described above with reference to Figures 8A-8M are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B. For example, detection operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill 300
[00589] [00589] Figures 9A-9H are flow diagrams illustrating a method 9000 of selection for display and updating user interface objects (e.g., mini application objects, widgets, etc.) that — are associated with a placement location in a page of a home screen user interface, in accordance with some embodiments.
[00590] [00590] Method 9000 relates to allowing updating which widget from a plurality of widgets associated with a placement location is displayed at the placement location at a given time automatically without user input (e.g., based on context) and also at a different time in response to user input. Providing widgets for different applications at the same placement location improves the utilization efficiency of screen space without increasing visual clutter. Providing access to different widgets based on changing context as well as manual input in the manner described herein enhances the operability of the device (e.g., by automatically performing an operation when condition is met) and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which improves battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently).
[00591] [00591] Method 9000 is performed at a computer system (e.g., a computer, an electronic device, a handheld electronic device, a portable electronic device, a tablet device, a — mobile phone, etc.) in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a touch- sensitive display, a display, a projector, a head mounted display (HMD), etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more processors and memory that are enclosed in the same housing, while the display generation component is enclosed in a different housing from the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system including one or more processors and memory is enclosed in the same housing as the display generation component. In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with one or more input devices (e.g., touch sensitive surfaces, touch-screen display, cameras, joysticks, motion detectors, etc.). In some embodiments, at least some of the one or more input devices are integrated with the display generation component (e.g., a touch-sensitive — surface is integrated with a display in a touch-screen display, a camera is integrated with a display in a head-mounted display, etc.). In some embodiments, at least some of the input devices are enclosed in the same housing as the computer system, and optionally, the display 301
[00592] [00592] In some embodiments, the different user interface object is (9016) the first user interface object. For example, the computer system automatically switches between the first user interface object and the second user interface object for display at the placement location based on the current context or based a preset time-share schedule, and the computer — system also allows the user to manually switch between the first user interface object and the second user interface object at any time by providing a required input of the first type. Automatically switching between the first user interface object and the second user interface object for display at the placement location, based on the current time, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and 305
[00593] [00593] In some embodiments, the different user interface object is (9018) a user interface object that is different from the first user interface object and the second user interface object. For example, in some embodiments, the different user interface object corresponds to a third application that is different from the first application and the second application, or optionally, the different user interface object is a placeholder user interface object that is replaced by a system-selected user interface containing application content of a system-selected application at the time that the placeholder user interface object is called up to be displayed at the placement location. In some embodiments, depending on the direction of the user input (e.g., swipe left versus swipe right, swipe up versus swipe down, swipe clockwise versus swipe counterclockwise, etc.) that computer system redisplays the first user interface object, or displays a third user interface object that is different from the first user interface object and the second user interface object. Automatically switching between the different user interface object and the first/second user interface object for display at the placement location, based on the current time, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
[00594] [00594] In some embodiments, the second user interface object is (9020) displayed at the placement location on the first user interface in response to detecting a context change (e.g., new user interaction is detected, new location is detected, new notification is received, etc.) at the computer system, while the first user interface is displayed with the first user interface object at the placement location (e.g., the first user interface is displayed with the first user interface object at the placement location from the first time to the second time). Switching from the first user interface to the second user interface at the placement location in response to detecting the context change performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are 306
[00595] [00595] In some embodiments, the second user interface object is (9022) displayed at the placement location on the first user interface in response to detecting a request to redisplay the first user interface after the computer system has ceased to display the first user interface with the first user interface object at the placement location (e.g., in response to navigating back to the first user interface from another user interface, in response to turning on the display generation component or waking the display generation component from a low power state, etc.). Displaying the second user interface object at the placement location in response to detecting the request to redisplay the first user interface, after the first user interface object was ceased to be displayed at the placement location, performs an operation — when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5D5-5D7, for example, where widget 5412c was displayed at the placement location 5410b on page 5404 before the computer system is locked (Figure 5D5); after the computer system was locked the page 5404 ceases to be displayed, a request to redisplay the page 5404 is detected (e.g., device is unlocked by an upward widget swipe by the contact 5692 (Figure 5D6)); and in response to the request to redisplay the page 5404, the computer system redisplays the page 5404 and automatically (e.g., without further user intervention or without an explicit user input directed to the placement location that is associated with multiple widgets) switches the widget in the placement location 5410b from widget 5412c to 5412e.
[00596] [00596] In some embodiments, the placement location is (9024) further associated with a third user interface object that displays application icons for a set of contextually selected applications (e.g., the third user interface object is automatically displayed the placement location by the computer system or in response to a user's swipe input directed to the placement location, replacing another user interface object containing application content 307
[00597] [00597] In some embodiments, at a fourth time, the computer system concurrently displays (9026) respective user interface objects for a first number of applications (e.g., respective widgets for different applications from the first number of applications (e.g., one, 308
[00598] [00598] In some embodiments, respective sizes of the respective user interface objects displayed at the placement location are (9028) adjusted based on a total number of the respective user interface objects concurrently displayed at the placement location. For example, in some embodiments, when there are four widgets concurrently displayed at the placement location because the context is less clear, the four widgets are displayed with a small size (e.g., simply reduced in scale, or simplified versions of the widgets are displayed), and when there are two widgets concurrently displayed at the placement location because the context is more clear, the two widgets are displayed with a larger size (e.g., simply increased in scale, or more extended versions of the widgets are displayed). In some embodiments, the user interface object containing application content for a respective application can have multiple displayable versions, some are simple and small, and offer a more limited set of functions from the application than another version that is larger, more complex, and offering 310
[00599] [00599] In some embodiments, the plurality of user interface objects corresponding to the different applications that are associated with the placement location are (9030) selected in accordance with previously received user configuration inputs (e.g., user inputs that selects the widgets or mini application object for the placement location, or add the widgets or mini application objects one by one to the placement location (e.g., user inputs dragging and dropping multiple widgets or mini application object to the same placement location)). Providing widgets for different applications at the same placement location, as previously- selected by the user, based on the current context, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
[00600] [00600] In some embodiments, the placement location is (9032) further associated with a placeholder user interface object that is automatically substituted (e.g., without user input) by a system-selected user interface object containing application content from a system- selected application, wherein the system-selected user interface object containing application content is dynamically selected from a group of available user interface objects outside of the plurality of user interface objects that are associated with the placement location. For 311
[00601] [00601] In some embodiments, the computer system dynamically selects (e.g., automatically, without user input) (9034) the system-selected user interface object containing application content (e.g., the widget that is actually displayed) to replace the placeholder user interface object (e.g., the wildcard widget) in the placement location based on the current context. For example, in some embodiments, at a third time, the computer system automatically without user input selects and displays a third widget containing application — content from a third application that is not already associated with the placement location in accordance with a determination that a value of the relevance metric for the third widget as determined based on the current context is above a threshold value and above the relevance 312
[00602] [00602] In some embodiments, the plurality of user interface objects corresponding to the different applications that are associated with the placement location are (9036) arranged in a stack (e.g, a linear stack, a cyclic stack, a virtual carousel, etc.). In the method 9000, the computer system detects a sequence of one or more first inputs that is directed to the placement location (e.g., a swipe input on the touch screen at the placement location) and includes one or more first movement inputs in a first direction (e.g., a direction that is perpendicular to a page navigation direction through a plurality of pages of a multipage home — screen user interface (e.g., the page navigation direction is a horizontal direction, the first direction is an upward direction)). In response to detecting a respective one of the sequence of one or more first inputs, the compute system switches to displaying a next user interface object in the stack at the placement location. For example, in some embodiments, the widgets in the stack are manually switchable at the placement location in response to swipe inputs (or — other equivalent inputs for scrolling through content or objects displayed in a window, list, or stack) in a first direction while maintaining the display of application icons on the first user interface (e.g., up or down, left or right, clockwise or counter-clockwise etc.). In some 313
[00603] [00603] In some embodiments, while displaying, at the placement location, a respective user interface object (e.g., the first user interface object containing application content from the first application, the second user interface object containing application — content from the second application, etc.) of the plurality of user interface objects corresponding to the different applications that are associated with the placement location, the computer system detects (9038) a tap input directed to the respective user interface object 314
[00604] [00604] In some embodiments, the first user interface is (9040) a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, and the multipage home screen user interface further includes a second page adjacent to the first page. In the method 9000, while displaying, at the placement location, a respective user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects corresponding to the different applications that are associated with the placement location, the computer system detects a swipe input directed to the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location. In response to detecting the swipe input directed to the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location, in accordance with a determination that the swipe input is in a second direction (e.g., different from the first 315
[00605] [00605] In some embodiments, the plurality user interface objects corresponding to different applications that are associated with the placement location are (9042) arranged in a — stack in accordance with an estimated priority based on the current context. For example, in response to a request to display the first user interface, the computer system ranks the user interface objects associated with the placement location in accordance with their relevance (determined by the computer system) to the current context, and displays the top ranked user interface object in the stack first at the placement location, and then in response to a swipe input in a first direction that is directed to the placement location while the top ranked user interface object is displayed at the placement location, the computer-system displays the second-ranked user interface object in the stack at the placement location; and then, in 316
[00606] [00606] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (9044) an indication at a location proximate to the placement location in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location has been automatically changed in accordance with a changed context. In some embodiments, a plurality of widget indicators are displayed on the edge of the widget that visually indicate which widget in a widget stack is the currently displayed widget (e.g., the widget indicators have a fixed sequential order that corresponds to the order of the widgets in the stack, and the widget indicator for the currently displayed widget is visually distinguished relative to the widget 317
[00607] [00607] In some embodiments, the first user interface includes (9046) multiple placement locations, a respective placement location of the multiple placement locations is associated a respective set of user interface objects that respectively contain application content from different applications (e.g., each user interface object contains application content from a corresponding application, different user interface object contain application content from different applications, etc.), and wherein the user interface object currently displayed at a first placement location of the multiple placement locations is updated (e.g., automatically without user input, based on a rotation schedule for the placement locations and/or changing context) independently from the user interface object currently displayed at a second placement location of the multiple placement locations. Updating the user interface object currently displayed at the first placement location independently from the user interface object currently displayed at the second placement location performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an — operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and 318
[00608] [00608] In some embodiments, the computer system automatically (e.g., without user — inputs) selects (9048), from the plurality of user interface objects associated with the placement location, a respective user interface object for display at the placement location in accordance with closing of an application on the computer system prior to displaying the first user interface (e.g., a page of the home screen user interface). Automatically selecting the respective user interface object for display at the placement location, in accordance with the — closing of an application, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in — Figures 5D8-5D10, for example, where the currently displayed widget(s) in the widget stack at placement location 5410c is automatically updated (e.g., the widget 5414a for the messages application shown in Figure 5D8 ceases to be displayed at the placement location 5410c in Figure 5D10) after the messages application is closed (Figure 5D9). .
[00609] [00609] In some embodiments, the computer system automatically selects (e.g., — without user input) (9050), from the plurality of user interface objects associated with the placement location, a respective user interface object for display at the placement location in response to navigating from a screen lock user interface (e.g., wake screen or lock screen) to the first user interface (e.g., a page of the home screen). Automatically selecting the respective user interface object for display at the placement location, in response to the navigation from the screen lock user interface to the first user interface, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5D6-5D7, for example, where the currently displayed widgets at the placement locations 5410b and 5410c are respectively updated (Figure 5D6) after the device is unlocked (Figure 5D7).
[00610] [00610] In some embodiments, the first user interface includes (9052) multiple placement locations, a respective placement location of the multiple placement locations is associated a respective set of user interface objects respectively containing application content from different applications (e.g., each placement location is associated with a respective set of user interface objects, different user interface objects in the respective set contain application content from different applications, etc.), and wherein computer system takes into account of which user interface object is currently displayed at a first placement location of the multiple placement locations when updating a user interface object currently displayed at a second placement location of the multiple placement locations or switching to — a different user interface object for display at the second placement location. For example, if the computer system switches from displaying a weather widget for a first city to displaying a calendar widget showing upcoming events at the second placement location, the computer system automatically (e.g., without user inputs) adds more weight to the option for displaying another weather widget at the first location. But if the weather widget remains displayed at the second placement location, the computer system optionally reduces the weight for the option for displaying a weather widget at the first location. In some embodiments, the computer system automatically prevents displaying widgets from the same application at the same time at different placement locations on the same page, even if the relevance values of the widgets for the application are highest for both placement locations. Takes into account of — which user interface object is currently displayed at a first placement location when updating a user interface object currently displayed at a second placement location performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5D3-5D12, for example, where even though the widget stacks at placement location 5410b and 5410c both include the weather widgets, the weather widget is not displayed at both placement locations at the same time, even if the weather widget is determined to be relevant to the current context.
[00611] [00611] In some embodiments, while displaying a respective user interface object of the plurality of user interface object at the placement location on the first user interface, the computer system detects (9054) an input that corresponds to a request to display a plurality of 320
[00612] [00612] In some embodiments, displaying the plurality of selectable options includes (9056) displaying a second selectable option (e.g., a toggle switch, a check box, a radio button, a drop down menu, etc.) that, when activated, enables a placeholder user interface object at the placement location (e.g., toggles from a disabled state to an enabled state), wherein the placeholder user interface object is automatically substituted (e.g., without user input) by a system-selected user interface object containing application content from a system-selected application when the placeholder user interface object is selected (e.g., 321
[00613] [00613] In some embodiments, while displaying a respective user interface object of the plurality of user interface object at the placement location on the first user interface, the — computer system detects (9058) an input that is directed to the placement location and that meets preset criteria (e.g., a touch-hold input by a contact at the placement location for at least a threshold amount of time with less than a threshold amount of movement of the contact, optionally, followed by liftoff of the contact, etc.). In response to detecting the input that is directed to the placement location and that meets the preset criteria, the computer system displays (e.g., in a quick action menu concurrently displayed with the respective user interface object on the first user interface), a first set of one or more selectable options associated with the placement location and a second set of one or more selectable options associated with the respective user interface object. In some embodiments, the first set of one or more options associated with the placement location includes one or more of an option to delete the entire widget stack from the placement location, an option to display an editing user interface for the widget stack, etc. In some embodiments, the second set of one or more options associated with the respective user interface object that is currently displayed at the 322
[00614] [00614] In some embodiments, displaying the first user interface with the second user interface object displayed at the placement location includes (9060): concurrently displaying, within the second user interface object, first application content from the second application and second application content from the second application; and in accordance with a determination that the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on correspondence between the first application content and the current context of the computer system at the second time, visually emphasizing (e.g., highlighting, circling with a line, etc.) the first application content relative to the second application content in the second user interface object (e.g., visually emphasizing the first content without visually emphasizing the second application content). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on correspondence between the second application content and the current context of the computer system at the second time, the computer system visually emphasizes (e.g., highlighting, circling with a line, etc.) the second application content relative to the first application content in the second user interface object (e.g., visually emphasizing the second application content without visually emphasizing the first application content). Visually emphasizing the first application content relative to the second application content in the second user interface object, in accordance with a determination that the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on correspondence between the first application content and the current context of the computer system at the second time, provides improved visual feedback to the user. Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more — quickly and efficiently.
[00615] [00615] In some embodiments, visually emphasizing the first application content relative to the second application content includes (9062) applying visual marking (e.g., callout, circle, underlying, drawing mark, highlighting, etc.) to the first application content in the second user interface object without applying the visual marking to the second application content in the second user interface object. In some embodiments, visually emphasizing the second application content relative to the second application content includes applying a visual marking (e.g., callout, circle, underlying, drawing mark, highlighting, etc.) to the 324
[00616] [00616] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 9A-9H have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of — ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 6000, 7000, 8000, 10000, 11000, 12000, 13000, and 14000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 9000 described above with respect to Figures 9A-9H. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method 9000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other 325
[00617] [00617] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information — processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.
[00618] [00618] The operations described above with reference to Figures 9A-9H are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B. For example, detection operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In — some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.
[00619] [00619] Figures 10A-10H are flow diagrams illustrating a method 10000 of interacting — with a plurality of user interface objects containing application content that is associated with a common placement location (e.g., a widget or mini application object stack, etc.) (e.g., on a page of a home screen user interface and in a stack-specific configuration user interface, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00620] [00620] The method 10000 relates to providing a configuration user interface for a widget stack. Widgets stacks that includes multiple widgets that are associated with the same placement location on a page of a home screen user interface or widget screen, and that can 326
[00621] [00621] The method 10000 is performed at a computer system (e.g., a computer, an electronic device, a handheld electronic device, a portable electronic device, a tablet device, a mobile phone, etc.) in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a touch- sensitive display, a display, a projector, a head mounted display (HMD), etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more processors and memory that are 327
[00622] [00622] In the method 10000, the computer system displays (10002) a first user interface (e.g., a user-arranged page of a multipage home screen user interface, a single page home screen user interface, a widget screen, etc.) that includes a first placement location that is associated with a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications (e.g., a plurality of user interface objects containing application content corresponding to different applications, a plurality of widgets corresponding to different applications, a plurality of mini application objects corresponding to different applications, etc.) (e.g., the plurality of widgets include a set of two or more user-selected widgets and optionally a — wildcard widget that is automatically replaced by a system-selected widget not among the set of user-selected widgets based on a match between the system-selected widget and the current context). The plurality of user interface objects include (10004): a first user interface object (e.g., a first widget) that includes information (e.g., first application content, first application icon image, a first subset of application functions, etc.) from a first application (e.g., an instant messaging application, an email application, etc.), a second user interface object (e.g., a second widget) that includes information (e.g., second application content, second application icon image, a second subset of application functions, etc.) from a second application (e.g., a calendar application, a maps application, a weather application, a news application, etc.) that is different from the first application, and a third user interface object (e.g., a third widget) that includes information from a third application (e.g., one of the set of user-selected widgets for the first placement location, optionally, a widget that is automatically selected by the computer system based on the current context that replaces a 328
[00623] [00623] In some embodiments, after detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying the first user interface object at the second placement location in the — second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input (e.g., while displaying the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, and in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met again (e.g., a tap input is detected at the first placement location)), the computer system redisplays (10020) the configuration user interface, including displaying at least a portion of the second representation of the second — user interface object without concurrently displaying at least a portion of the first representation of the first user interface object. In some embodiments, the second representation of the second user interface object is concurrently displayed with at least a portion of a third representation of the third user interface object. In some embodiments, the first user interface object is no longer associated with the first placement location after the first user interface object is dragged away from the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and dropping into the second placement location different from the first placement location. In some embodiments, when redisplaying the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, in accordance with a determination that the second user interface is the same as the first user interface, the — computer system displays the configuration user interface without including the first representation of the first user interface object among respective representations of other user interface objects associated with the first placement location; and in accordance with a 331
[00625] [00625] In some embodiments, after detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement 333
[00626] [00626] In some embodiments, after detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying a respective user interface object of the first user interface object and — the second user interface object at the second placement location on the second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input, the computer system redisplays (10026) the first user interface (e.g., a user-arranged page of a multipage home screen user interface, a single page home screen user interface, a widget screen, etc.) that includes the first placement location. The computer system detects (10030) the occurrence of a condition corresponding switching which user interface object is to be displayed in the first placement location (e.g., a swipe input directed to the first placement location or a change in a context of the device, etc.) (e.g., an occurrence of another event that meets the respective condition). In response to detecting the condition, the computer system switches (10032) from displaying a current user interface object in the first placement location to displaying an updated user interface object in the first placement location, wherein the updated user interface object is selected from a subset of the plurality of user interface objects that does not include the respective user interface object of the first user interface object and the second user interface 335
[00627] [00627] In some embodiments, after displaying (e.g., while continuing to display, while displaying another user interface (e.g., another application, a lock screen, a wake — screen, etc.) after navigating away from, etc.) the first user interface object corresponding to the first application at the first placement location in the first user interface (e.g., while the first user interface object is identified by the computer system as the currently displayed widget at the first placement location), the computer system detects (10034) occurrence of a second respective condition (e.g., detecting a user input that meets preset widget switching criteria (e.g., a swipe input in a predetermined direction, etc.), an automatic switching condition, etc.) or detecting that automatic application switching is triggered according to a preset schedule, according to navigation to the first user interface from another user interface 336
[00628] [00628] In some embodiments, displaying the configuration user interface — corresponding to the first placement location includes (10040): before detecting a scrolling input directed to the configuration user interface (e.g., upon initial display of the configuration user interface in response to the tap input at the first placement location detected when the first user interface is in the first reconfiguration mode), concurrently displaying (10042) at least portions of respective representations of a first subset of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location; and after detecting the scrolling input directed to the configuration user interface, concurrently displaying (10044) at least portions of respective representations of a second subset of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location, the second subset being different from the first subset. For example, in some embodiments, the configuration user interface displays a scrollable list of representations of the plurality of user interface objects (e.g., widgets in the stack) associated with the first placement location, and only two or three of the user interface objects are concurrently visible in the configuration 339
[00629] [00629] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface (10046): in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets first criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a tap input, criteria for detecting a touch-hold input, etc.) when directed to the first representation of the first user interface object, the computer system displays (10048) a first plurality of selectable options corresponding to configuration options (e.g., size, type, etc.) associated with the first user interface object. In accordance with a determination that the first user input meets the first criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a tap input, criteria for detecting a touch-hold input, etc.) when directed to the second representation of the second user interface object, the computer system displays (10050) a second plurality of selectable options corresponding to configuration options (e.g., size, type, etc.) associated with the second user interface object. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input, in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets the first criteria when directed to the third representation of the third user interface object, the computer system displays a third plurality of selectable options corresponding to configuration options associated with the third user interface object. For example, in some embodiments, a tap input on a representation of a widget in the list of widgets associated with the first placement location that is displayed in the stack-specific configuration user interface causes display of a set of 340
[00630] [00630] In some embodiments, the first representation of the first user interface object in the configuration user interface is (10052) a reduced scale representation of the first user interface object, and the second representation of the second user interface object in the configuration user interface is a reduced scale representation of the second user interface object. In some embodiments, the third representation of the third user interface object in the configuration user interface is a reduced scale representation of the third user interface object. In some embodiments, the reduced scale representation for a respective user interface object is a visual replica of the respective user interface object with a reduced size relative to the respective user interface object displayed on the first user interface in a normal mode (e.g., not an icon reconfiguration mode). Having the first representation of the first user interface object in the configuration user interface being a reduced scale representation of the first user interface object, and the second representation of the second user interface object in the configuration user interface being a reduced scale representation of the second user interface object, provides improved visual feedback to the user. Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 341
[00631] [00631] In some embodiments, displaying the first representation of the first user interface object in the configuration user interface includes (10054): at a first time, displaying (10056) first information from the first application in the first representation of the first user interface object while the first representation of the first user interface is displayed in the configuration user interface; and at a second time later than the first time (e.g., after the reconfiguration user interface is redisplayed after the computer system displayed another user interface (e.g., the second user interface, a lock screen user interface, etc.), or while the reconfiguration user interface is continuing to be displayed since the first time, etc.), displaying (10058) second information from the first application in the first representation of the first user interface object while the first representation of the first user interface is displayed in the configuration user interface, wherein the second information is different from the first information. For example, in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the application content that is configured to be displayed in the first user interface object has been updated by the computer system (e.g., due to interaction with the first application, or events that occurred in the computer system, etc.), the computer system updates the first representation of the first user interface object to display the updated — application content while the first representation of the first user interface object is displayed in the configuration user interface associated with the first placement location. Displaying either the first information or the second information from the first application in the first representation of the first user interface object, depending on the current time, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.
[00632] [00632] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface (10060): in accordance 342
[00633] [00633] In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface (e.g., while not in the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode)), including displaying a — respective one of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location at the placement location (e.g., displaying the first user interface object, the second user interface object, the third user interface object, etc.), the computer system detects 344
[00634] [00634] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second user input that is directed to the first placement location (e.g., while displaying the first user interface outside of the first reconfiguration mode) (10072): in accordance with a determination that the 345
[00635] [00635] In some embodiments, displaying the second user interface object in response to detecting the occurrence of the respective condition includes (10076): displaying, within the second user interface object, first application content from the second application and second application content from the second application, wherein the first application content is displayed with a visual indication that the first application content contributed to selection of the second user interface object for display at the first placement location in response to the occurrence of the respective condition (e.g., the first application content is marked or highlighted to indicate why the second application is selected by the computer system for display at the first placement location in response to the occurrence of the respective condition). In some embodiments, displaying the second user interface object in response to detecting the occurrence of the respective condition includes: in accordance with a determination that the respective condition is a first condition, displaying, within the second user interface object, first application content and second application content, wherein the first application content is visually highlighted relative to the second application content to indicate the first application content made a larger contribution to the selection of the second user interface object for display at the first placement location relative to the second application content in response to the occurrence of the first condition; and in accordance with a determination that the respective condition is a second condition different from the first condition, displaying, within the second user interface object, the first application — content and the second application content, wherein the second application content is visually highlighted relative to the first application content to indicate the second application content made a larger contribution to the selection of the second user interface object for display at the first placement location relative to the first application content in response to the occurrence of the second condition. Displaying the first application content with a visual indication that the first application content contributed to selection of the second user interface object for display at the first placement location in response to the occurrence of the respective condition provides improved visual feedback to the user. Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SE8-5E9 for example, where after a respective widget on top of a respective widget stack is automatically switched, a visual indication of how the application corresponding to the respective widget contributed to the switching is displayed.
[00636] [00636] In some embodiments, the visual indication (e.g., a call out or visual marking) highlights (10078) the first application content relative to the second application content in the second user interface object. Highlighting, with the visual indication, the first application content relative to the second application content in the second user interface object provides improved visual feedback to the user. Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SE8-5E9 for example, where, for a respective widget that is automatically switched to the top of a widget stack, a visual indication of how the application corresponding to the respective widget highlights specific application content for the respective widget.
[00637] [00637] In some embodiments, in accordance with satisfaction of a first predetermined condition, the computer system displays (10080) an indicator object that indicates an ordinal position of a currently displayed user interface object at the first placement location among the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location. In accordance with a determination that a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since display of the indicator object, the computer system ceases to display the indicator object while maintaining display of the currently displayed user interface object at the first placement location. For example, in some embodiments, the indicator object includes respective widget indicator icons corresponding to the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location in an order that corresponds to the order of the user interface objects in the stack, and the respective widget indicator icon corresponding to the currently displayed user interface object at the first placement location is visually highlighted relative to the widget indicator icons corresponding to other user interface objects inthe stack. After a period of time, the respective widget indicator icons of the plurality of user interface objects cease to be displayed if the first predetermined conditions is not met again by anew event. Displaying the indicator object in accordance with satisfaction of a first predetermined condition, and ceasing to display the indicator object in accordance with a determination that a predetermined amount of time has elapsed, performs an operation when — a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and 348
[00638] [00638] In some embodiments, the first predetermined condition is satisfied (10082) in accordance with a determination that the first user interface is displayed in a first configuration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode). In some embodiments, the indicator object is displayed concurrently with the second user interface object when the second user interface object is the currently displayed user interface object at the first placement location and the first user interface enters into the first reconfiguration mode in response to a user — input that triggers the first configuration mode. Displaying the indicator object in accordance with a determination that the first user interface is displayed in a first configuration mode performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces — power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure SE8 for example, where widget indicators 5330 are displayed while user-arranged home screen user interface 5202” is in a first configuration mode.
[00639] [00639] In some embodiments, the first predetermined condition is satisfied (10084) in accordance with a determination that a currently displayed user interface object at the first placement location is automatically updated by the computer system (e.g., in accordance with satisfaction of the automatic switching criteria by the occurrence of the respective condition). In some embodiments, the indicator object is displayed upon replacement of the currently displayed widget at the first placement location with another widget in the widget stack associated with the first placement location, and ceases to be displayed after a preset amount of time after the update of the widget at the first placement location. Displaying the indicator object in accordance with a determination that a currently displayed user interface object at 349
[00640] [00640] In some embodiments, the first predetermined condition are satisfied (10086) in accordance with a determination that the first user interface is displayed in response to navigation from another user interface (e.g., another page of the home screen user interface, an application user interface, a lock screen user interface, a wake screen user interface, etc.) different from the first user interface. Displaying the indicator object in accordance with a determination that that the first user interface is displayed in response to navigation from another user interface different from the first user interface performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SE31-5E32 for example, where switching from home screen user interface 5204 to adjacent home screen user interface 5202, in response to swipe input by 6138, causes display of widget indicators 5330 for widget stack 5024b.
[00641] [00641] In some embodiments, the indicator object serves (10088) as a widget navigation element. While displaying the indicator object, the computer system detects (10090) a swipe input from a first position to a second position along the indicator object. In response to detecting the swipe input, the computer system navigates (10092), within the first placement location, from a currently displayed user interface object to another user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects in accordance with the swipe input (e.g., in — accordance with one or more movement characteristics (e.g., start and end locations, speed, duration, etc.) of the swipe input). Navigating, within the first placement location, from a currently displayed user interface object to another user interface object of the plurality of 350
[00642] [00642] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 10A-10H have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of — ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 11000, 12000, 13000, and 14000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 10000 described above with respect to Figures 10A-10H. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method 10000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other 351
[00643] [00643] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information — processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.
[00644] [00644] The operations described above with reference to Figures 10A-10H are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B. For example, detection operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In — some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.
[00645] [00645] Figures 11A-11D are flow diagrams illustrating a method 11000 for interacting with multiple pages of a home screen user interface (e.g., in an icon reconfiguration mode, in a page editing mode, and when transitioning between the two modes, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00646] [00646] The method 11000 relates to providing a page editing mode in which whole pages of a home screen user interface can be managed (e.g., hidden, unhidden, reordered, — etc.). As disclosed herein, the computer system allows easy transitions between an icon reconfiguration mode in which positions and/or availability of application icons can be 352
[00647] [00647] The method 11000 is performed at a computer system (e.g., a computer, an electronic device, a handheld electronic device, a portable electronic device, a tablet device, a mobile phone, etc.) in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a touch- — sensitive display, a display, a projector, a head mounted display (HMD), etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more processors and memory that are enclosed in the same housing, while the display generation component is enclosed in a different housing from the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system including one or more processors and memory is enclosed in the same housing as the display — generation component. In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with one or more input devices (e.g., touch sensitive surfaces, touch-screen display, cameras, joysticks, motion detectors, etc.). In some embodiments, at least some of the one or more input devices are integrated with the display generation component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface is integrated with a display in a touch-screen display, a camera is integrated with a display in a head-mounted display, etc.). In some embodiments, at least some of the input devices are enclosed in the same housing as the computer system, and optionally, the display generation component.
[00648] [00648] In the method 11000, the computer system displays (11002) a first page of a multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode), wherein respective positions of a first plurality of application icons in the first page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., application icons can be repositioned in the first page in response to drag inputs directed to the application icons, while the first page is in the first reconfiguration mode). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode in response to a user input that corresponds to a request to enter the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., a tap-hold input on an application icon, a tap-hold followed by a drag on an application icon, a tap-hold input on an unoccupied area of the first page, etc.) while the first page is displayed in the normal mode (e.g., a mode in which a tap input on an application icon launches the corresponding application, and positions of the application icons on the page are not adjustable, etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in response to a navigation input (e.g., a swipe input on a page navigation element, a swipe input on an application icon, a widget, or an unoccupied area of a currently displayed page, etc.) that is detected while another page of the multipage home screen user interface is displayed in the first reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, the computer system displays the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in response to a user input that corresponds to a request to enter the first reconfiguration mode from the second reconfiguration mode, where the user input (e.g., a tap input by a contact, an in-air tap input or a micro-tap input detected in conjunction with a gaze input) is directed to a representation of the first page while the user interface of the second reconfiguration mode is displayed. While displaying the first page of the multipage home — screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, the computer system detects (11004) a first input (e.g., a tap input on the highlighted page navigation element that is displayed in the first page in the first reconfiguration mode) that corresponds to a request to enter a second reconfiguration mode (e.g., page editing mode) from the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., the icon reconfiguration mode), wherein the availability of one or more pages in the multipage — home screen user interface (e.g., whether a page is displayed when the computer system navigates through the sequence of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in response to user inputs while the multipage home screen user interface is in the first reconfiguration mode or the normal mode) can be changed in accordance with user inputs in 354
[00649] [00649] In some embodiments, the respective representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface are (11012) displayed in accordance with a first sequential order that corresponds to a sequential order of the plurality of pages in the multipage home screen user interface displayed outside of the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., in the first reconfiguration mode and the normal mode, etc.). In response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input is directed to the second representation of the second page that is displayed in the second reconfiguration mode, and that the second input meets second criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a touch-hold and drag input, criteria for detecting a selection input (e.g., a tap-hold input or a gaze input) followed by a drag input (e.g., a swipe input by a contact, an in air swipe input, etc.) in a first direction along the sequence of representations, etc.) different from the first criteria, the — computer system adjusts (11014) a respective position of the second representation of the second page among the respective representations of the plurality of pages in accordance with the second input (e.g., moving the second representation from one side of the first 356
[00650] [00650] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input meets third criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a swipe input in a second direction (e.g., upward direction, downward direction, etc.) that is different from or transverse to the direction along (e.g., left to right, right to left, etc.) the sequence of representations of the pages (e.g., in an unoccupied area of the page editing user interface, anywhere on the page editing user interface, or from the bottom edge of the page editing user interface, etc.), criteria for detecting a tap input on an exit affordance of the page editing user interface, criteria for detecting a tap input on the first representation of the first page, etc.) that are different from the first criteria (and different from the second criteria), the computer system redisplays (11016) the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode. Redisplaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in response to detecting an input satisfying certain criteria reduces — the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., a returning to a specific home screen). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures —5F7 and 5F16, for example, where the page editing user interface 5305 (Figure 5F7) is replaced with the first user-arranged home screen 5302’ in the first reconfiguration mode (Figure 5F16), in response to an upward edge swipe input by a contact 6210 (Figure SF7).
[00651] [00651] In some embodiments, while redisplaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, the computer system detects (11018) a — third input that meets the third criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a swipe input in the second direction (e.g., upward direction, downward direction, etc.) that is different from or transverse to the direction along (e.g., left to right, right to left, etc.) the sequence of representations of the pages in the page editing user interface (e.g., in an unoccupied area of the first page, anywhere on the first page, or from the bottom edge of the first page, etc.), criteria for detecting a tap input on an exit affordance of the first page (e.g., same exit affordance shown on the page editing user interface), etc.). In response to detecting the third input that meets the third criteria, the computer system replaces display of the first page in the first 358
[00652] [00652] In some embodiments, replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of the respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., replacing display of the first page in the first reconfiguration mode with display of the page editing user interface) includes (11020): displaying (11022) an animated transition showing the first page of the multipage home — screen user interface shrinking down and moving toward a location occupied by the first representation of the first page in the second reconfiguration mode, and representations of one or more pages adjacent to the first page in the multipage home screen user interface 359
[00653] [00653] In some embodiments, replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of the respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., replacing display of the first page in the — first reconfiguration mode with display of the page editing user interface) includes (11024): in accordance with a determination that the multipage home screen user interface includes a first number of pages, displaying (11026) the respective representations of the first number of pages with a first size in the second reconfiguration mode; and in accordance with a determination that the multipage home screen user interface includes a second number of pages that is different from the first number of pages, displaying (11028) the respective representations of the second number of pages with a second size that is different from the first size. For example, in some embodiments, if there are two user-arranged pages in the 360
[00654] [00654] In some embodiments, replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of the respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode (e.g., replacing display of the first page in the first reconfiguration mode with display of the page editing user interface) includes (11030): in accordance with a determination that the multipage home screen user interface includes a third number of pages, displaying (11032) the respective representations of the third number of pages in accordance with a first arrangement (e.g., in a single row, in two rows, etc.) in the second reconfiguration mode; and in accordance with a determination that the multipage 361
[00655] [00655] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input corresponds to a request to hide the first page (e.g., a tap-hold input on the first representation of the first page (e.g., distinguished from a tap input on the first representation which causes navigation to the first page in the first reconfiguration mode) or a tap input an icon (e.g., show/hide affordance, a checkbox, etc.) associated with the first representation of the first page, etc.), the computer system visually distinguishes (11036) the first representation of the first page from the second representation of the second page that is displayed in the second reconfiguration mode. While displaying the first representation of the first page that is visually marked relative to the second representation of the second page in the second reconfiguration mode, the computer system detects (11038) a respective input (e.g., detecting an input that corresponds to a 362
[00656] [00656] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the respective input (11042): in accordance with a determination that the respective input corresponds to a request to cease hiding the first page (e.g., another tap-hold on the first representation of the first page, another tap on the icon (e.g., show/hide affordance, a checkbox, etc.) associated with the first representation of the first page, or a tap on the first representation of the first page (e.g., this does not cause navigation to the first page in the first reconfiguration mode, if the first page is currently hidden), etc.), the computer system ceases to visually distinguish the first representation of the first page from the second representation of the second page. In some embodiments, after exiting the second reconfiguration mode, in response to one or more 364
[00657] [00657] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the respective input (11044): in accordance with a determination that the respective input is directed to the first representation of the first page that is visually distinguished from the second representation of the second page, and that the respective input meets the first criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a tap input, a long tap, etc.), the computer system forgoes displaying the first page of the multipage — home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, once a page is marked as deleted or hidden in the second reconfiguration mode, a tap input on the representation of the page (e.g., visually marked to distinguish from other pages that are still 365
[00658] [00658] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input (11046): in accordance with a determination that the second input meets fifth criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a swipe input in a direction that is different from or transverse to the direction along — the sequence of representations of the pages (e.g., left to right, right to left)) and that a total number of pages in the multipage home screen user interface exceeds a preset threshold number (e.g., 9, 12, 16, etc.), the computer system scrolls the respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode to reveal respective representations of at least one additional page of — the plurality of pages that was not initially displayed in the second reconfiguration mode. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input meets the fifth criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a swipe 366
[00659] [00659] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 11A-11D have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 12000, 13000, and 14000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 11000 367
[00660] [00660] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.
[00661] [00661] The operations described above with reference to Figures 11A-11D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B. For example, detection operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a — user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses 368
[00662] [00662] Figures 12A-12F are flow diagrams illustrating a method 12000 for displaying and interacting with a user interface object (e.g., a suggested applications widget, a recommended applications widget, a recent apps widget, etc.) that presents application icons that are automatically selected by a computer system at a user selected location (e.g., a user- selected placement location on a page of a home screen user interface, on a widget screen, etc.), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00663] [00663] The method 12000 relates to providing a suggested applications widget that includes automatically selected application icons on a page of a home screen user interface. When a suggested applications widget is placed at a user selected location on a page of a home screen user interface and includes automatically selected application icons, it is advantageous to display the application icons within the suggested applications widget in a manner that does not disrupt the organization and visual consistency of the page that also includes other application icons displayed in accordance with a predefined arrangement. As disclosed herein, the automatically selected application icons of the suggested applications widget are displayed at a user-selected location on a page of a home screen user interface aligned with the predefined arrangement of other application icons on the page. In accordance with such a policy, it is ensured that, when the suggested applications widgets are displayed at a different user location, and when different sets of application icons are presented within the user-selected location, the page containing suggested application widget maintains an orderly and organized arrangement, such that it is less likely to cause confusion for the user when locating a desired application icons on the page, and/or it is less likely to cause issues with reflowing the application icons on the page when the configuration of the page is altered by subsequent changes (e.g., addition, deletion, and rearrangement of application icons and widgets on the page in accordance with additional user inputs). This feature enhances the operability of the device (e.g., by allowing users to select the placement location of the automatically selected application icons while maintaining an organized layout on the page of the user-selected location), and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by 369
[00664] [00664] The method 12000 is performed at a computer system (e.g., a computer, an electronic device, a handheld electronic device, a portable electronic device, a tablet device, a mobile phone, etc.) in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a touch- sensitive display, a display, a projector, a head mounted display (HMD), etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more processors and memory that are enclosed in the same housing, while the display generation component is enclosed in a different housing from the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system — including one or more processors and memory is enclosed in the same housing as the display generation component. In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with one or more input devices (e.g., touch sensitive surfaces, touch-screen display, cameras, joysticks, motion detectors, etc.). In some embodiments, at least some of the one or more input devices are integrated with the display generation component (e.g., a touch-sensitive — surface is integrated with a display in a touch-screen display, a camera is integrated with a display in a head-mounted display, etc.). In some embodiments, at least some of the input devices are enclosed in the same housing as the computer system, and optionally, the display generation component. In the method 12000, the computer system displays (12002) a respective page of a home screen user interface (e.g., a user-arranged page of a multipage — home screen user, a single page home screen user interface, etc.), wherein the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons in a first predefined arrangement (e.g., in a 4x3 grid, a 5x4 grid, etc.). (Optionally, after or while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface (e.g., while the home screen user interface is in a first reconfiguration mode)), the computer system detects (12004) a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to insert, into the respective page of the home screen user interface, a first user interface object containing a plurality of application icons for a plurality of applications that are automatically selected by the computer system (e.g., the first user interface object is a suggested applications widget). In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs (e.g., in response to detecting the an input selecting a location for placement of the first user interface object containing the plurality of application icons or after detecting the input selecting a location for placement of the first user interface object containing the plurality of application icons and another user 370
[00665] [00665] In some embodiments, the respective page of the home screen user interface is (12008) displayed in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., an icon reconfiguration mode in — which locations of the first user interface object and the existing application icons on the respective page are adjustable in accordance with user inputs) when the second plurality of application icons are displayed on the respective page of the home screen user interface in response to the sequence of one or more inputs. Displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode in response to the sequence of the one or more inputs displaying the second plurality of application icons on the respective page reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., viewing the second plurality of application icons in the first reconfiguration mode). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 5G3, for example, where when the suggested applications widget 5354 was being inserted on a home screen, the fourth user-arranged home screen 5350” is in the first reconfiguration mode.
[00666] [00666] In some embodiments, the second plurality of application icons are (12010) displayed in a container object corresponding to the first user interface object (e.g., the container object is a platter that separates the second plurality of application icons from other existing icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface) while the respective page of the home screen user interface is displayed in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., an icon reconfiguration mode in which locations of the first user interface object and the existing application icons on the respective page are adjustable in accordance with user inputs). Displaying the second plurality of application icons in the container object corresponding to the first user interface object while the respective page of the home screen user interface is displayed in the first reconfiguration mode provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., distinguishing the system-selected user application icons from the user-arranged application icons). Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly 372
[00667] [00667] In some embodiments, while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, including displaying the container object containing the second plurality of application icons, the computer system detects (12012) a second user input that corresponds to a request to exit the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., a request to enter the normal mode from the first reconfiguration mode). In response to detecting the second user input that corresponds to the request to exit the first reconfiguration mode: the computer system displays the respective page of the home screen user interface in a normal mode (e.g., in the normal mode, activation of an application icon using a tap input causes display of the corresponding application), including displaying the two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement and the second plurality of application icons in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement; and the computer system reduces a visual emphasis of the container object relative to the second plurality of application icons on the respective page while displaying the second plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement. For — example, in some embodiments, when the suggested applications widget is dragged around the home screen user interface (e.g., from another location or another page, or from the widget selection user interface) and after it is dropped into the respective page of the home screen user interface from a widget selection user interface, the widget is shown as a container object with respective application icons for a set of system-selected applications contained therein. The position of the suggested application widget and the positions of the existing application icons on the respective page are adjustable during the first reconfiguration mode; and while in the first reconfiguration mode, the container object is displayed with normal visibility, and the second plurality of application icons are visually separated from the individual application icons on the respective page by the container object.
[00668] [00668] In some embodiments, the second plurality of application icons are (12014) displayed with a first size when the respective page of the home screen user interface is displayed in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., an icon reconfiguration mode in which locations of the first user interface object and the existing application icons on the respective page are adjustable in accordance with user inputs). The second plurality of application icons are displayed with a second size different from (e.g., larger than, smaller than, etc.) the first size when the respective page of the home screen user interface is displayed outside of the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., in the normal mode (e.g., in the normal mode, activation of an application icon using a tap input causes display of the corresponding application)). In some embodiments, the first size is smaller than the size of the first plurality of application icons in the respective page, and the second size is the same as the size of the first plurality of 374
[00669] [00669] In some embodiments, the second plurality of application icons are (12016) displayed on the respective page of the home screen user interface in locations that are not aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons when the respective page of the home screen user interface is in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., an icon reconfiguration mode in which locations of the first user interface object and the existing application icons on the respective page are adjustable in accordance with user inputs). The second plurality of application icons are displayed on the respective page of the — home screen user interface in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons when the respective page of the home screen user interface is not in the first reconfiguration mode (e.g., in the normal mode (e.g., in the normal mode, activation of an application icon using a tap input causes display of the corresponding application)). Aligning or forgoing aligning the second plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons, depending on whether the respective page of the home screen user interface is in the first reconfiguration mode, provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., allowing the user to determine whether the respective page of the home screen user interface is in the first reconfiguration mode or not). Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These 375
[00670] [00670] In some embodiments, while concurrently displaying the two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement and the second plurality of application icons in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface (12018): the computer system displays respective textual identifiers of the two or more of the first plurality of application icons with a first set of display properties (e.g., first values of transparency, opacity, color, luminance, and/or saturation, without a first indicator, highlight, animated effect, etc.); and the computer system displays respective textual identifiers of the second plurality of application icons with a second set of display properties (e.g., second — values of transparency, opacity, color, luminance, and/or saturation, with the first indicator, highlight, animated effect, etc.), the second set of display properties being different from the first set of display properties. In some embodiments, the respective textual identifiers of the application icons include the application names of the applications corresponding to the application icons, and the textual identifiers of the application icons of the system-suggested applications in the suggested applications widget are displayed with more translucency (e.g., blending more with the background of the respective page), less saturated colors, with a shimmering visual effect, and so on, as compared to the textual identifiers of individual application icons that are already existing on the page (e.g., previously placed on the page by the user). In some embodiments, the first set of display properties and the second set of — display properties do not include the actual textual content of the textual identifiers (e.g., the appearance of the textual identifiers for the application icons within the suggested applications widget are different relative to the appearance of the textual identifiers of the application icons outside of the suggested application widgets, in addition to the differences in the text within the textual identifiers). Displaying the respective textual identifiers of the — second plurality of application icons with a set of display properties that is different from the set of display properties for the respective textual identifiers of the first plurality of application icons, provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., allowing the user to 376
[00671] [00671] In some embodiments, while displaying the second plurality of application icons in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface (e.g., while displaying the respective page outside of the first reconfiguration mode, in the normal mode, etc.), the computer system detects (12020) a third user input that is directed to a respective application icon displayed on the respective page of the home screen user interface. In response to detecting the third user input, the computer system displays a set of selectable options corresponding to the third user input, wherein: in accordance with a determination that the third user input is directed to an area occupied by the second plurality of application icons (e.g., that is directed to a first application icon of the second plurality of — application icons, a second application icon of the second plurality of application icons, an area between the first application icon and the second application icon, etc.), and that the third user input meets first criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a touch-hold input by a contact, criteria for detecting an input that, when detected on an application icon, corresponds to a request for displaying a contextual menu associated with an application corresponding to the application icon, and that, when detected on a widget of an application, corresponds to a request for displaying a contextual menu associated with the widget, etc.), displaying the set of selectable options includes (12022) displaying a first plurality of selectable options (e.g., in a contextual menu) associated with the first user interface object (e.g., options for triggering configuration and/or deletion of the first user interface object, as opposed to the selectable — options associated with an application corresponding to a respective one of the second plurality of application icons); and in accordance with a determination that the third user input is directed to a respective one of the two or more of the first plurality of application 377
[00672] [00672] In some embodiments, the first plurality of selectable options (e.g., in a contextual menu) associated with the first user interface object includes a first selectable option that, when activated, causes (12026) the computer system to perform a first operation (e.g., display a widget-specific configuration user interface for the first user interface object, — delete the first user interface object as a whole, displaying a plurality of selectable sizes for the first user interface object, etc.) with respect to the first user interface object as a whole (e.g., irrespective of which applications that the second plurality of application icons correspond to). Including, in the first plurality of selectable options, a selectable option that when activated causes a first operation with respect to the first user interface object as a — whole, reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., configuring the user interface object as a whole). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more 378
[00673] [00673] In some embodiments, the first plurality of selectable options (e.g., in a contextual menu) associated with the first user interface object includes (12028) a second selectable option that, when activated, causes the computer system to perform a second operation (e.g., display a widget-specific configuration user interface for the first user interface object, delete the first user interface object as a whole, displaying a plurality of selectable sizes for the first user interface object, etc.) with respect to a respective application represented by one of the second plurality of application icons (e.g., the respective application represented by the application icon that is displayed at the location of the third — user input). In some embodiments, the second selectable option, when activated, causes the computer system to perform an application-specific operation associated with the first application (e.g., launching the application, not automatically selecting the first application for inclusion in the first user interface object in the future, and/or replacing display the first application icon with another application icon that is not currently included among the second plurality of application icons, etc.)). Including, in the first plurality of selectable options, a selectable option that when activated causes a second operation with respect to a respective application represented by one of the second plurality of application icons, reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., launching/configuring a specific application represented within user interface object). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5G12-5G13, for example, where the first quick action menu 5374 includes selectable options specific to the message application icon 5057q (e.g, compose new message, hide message app, never show message app here). These features are similarly illustrated in Figure 5G15, where the second quick action menu 5376 includes selectable options specific to the fitness application icon 5057.
[00674] [00674] In some embodiments, displaying the set of selectable options includes (12030): in accordance with the determination that the third user input is directed to a first application icon of the second plurality of application icons, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, displaying (12032) the second selectable option includes an option that, when activated, causes the computer system to perform a first application-specific operation corresponding to a first application represented by the first application icon; and in accordance with the determination that the third user input is directed to a second application icon of the second plurality of application icons that is different from the first application icon, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, displaying (12034) the second selectable option includes an option that, when activated, causes the computer system to perform a second application-specific operation corresponding to a second application represented by the second application icon, wherein the first application-specific operation (e.g., sending a message, adding a new calendar event, etc.) is different from the second application-specific operation (e.g., drafting a new email, opening an inbox, etc.). Including in the selectable options an option that when activated, causes the computer system to perform an operation specific to either the first application or the second application, depending on whether the user input is directed to the first application icon or the second application icon, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met (e.g., the location of the user input) without requiring further user input. Performing an operation — when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5G12-5G13, and 5G15-5G16, for example, where the tap- and-hold input by the contact 6318 directed to the message application icon 5057q (Figure 5G12) causes the first quick action menu to be displayed with message-specific options (Figure 5G13), and the tap-and-hold input by the contact 6322 directed to the fitness application icon 5057j (Figure 5G15) causes the second quick action menu 5376 to be displayed with fitness-specific options (Figure 5G16).
[00675] [00675] In some embodiments, performing the first application-specific operation (e.g., options for "hide this application”, or “never show this application here”, etc.) corresponding to the first application represented by the first application icon includes (12036) ceasing to display of the first application icon and displaying a third application icon of a third 380
[00676] [00676] In some embodiments, performing the first application-specific operation (e.g., options for "hide this application”, or "never show this application here”, etc.) corresponding — to the first application represented by the first application icon does not (12038) prevent the first application icon from being automatically selected by the computer system for display among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page at a later time. 381
[00677] [00677] In some embodiments, performing the first application-specific operation (e.g., options for “hide this application”, or “never show this application here”, etc.) corresponding to the first application represented by the first application icon prevents (12040) the first application icon from being automatically selected by the computer system for display among — the second plurality of application icons on the respective page at a later time. Performing the second application-specific operation (e.g., options for “hide this application”, or “never show this application here”, etc.) corresponding to the second application represented by the second application icon prevents the second application icon from being automatically selected by the computer system for display among the second plurality of application icons — on the respective page at a later time. Preventing the first or the second application icon from being automatically selected by the computer system for display among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page at a later time, performs an operation (e.g., forgoing the display of the first or the second application icon) when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of — conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are 382
[00678] [00678] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third user input (12042): in accordance with a determination that that the third user input is directed to a first application icon of the second plurality of application icons, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, the computer system visually distinguishes the first application icon from other application icons of the second plurality of application icons (e.g., enlarging, shrinking, highlighting, lifting up, etc. the first application icon relative to other application icons of the second plurality of application icons (e.g., including the second application icon)). In accordance with a determination that that the third user input is directed to a second application icon of the second plurality of application icons that is different from the first application icon, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, the computer system visually distinguishes the second application icon from other application icons of the second plurality of application icons (e.g., enlarging, shrinking, highlighting, lifting up, etc. the second application icon relative to other application icons of the second plurality of application icons (e.g., including the first application icon)). Visually distinguishing the first or the second application icon from the other application icons of the second plurality of — application icons, depending on whether the user input is directed to the first or the second application icon, provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., allowing the user to determine which of the application icon are the application-specific selection options directed to). Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5G12-5G13 and 5G15-5G16, for example, where when the tap-and-hold input by the contact 6318 is directed to the message application icon 5057q (Figure 5G12), the message application icon 5057q is visually emphasized relative to the other application icons on the platter 5361 (Figure 5G13), and when the tap-and-hold input by the contact 6322 is directed to the fitness application icon 5057j (Figure 5G15), the fitness application icon 5057) is visually emphasized relative to the other application icons on the platter 5361 (Figure 5G16).
[00679] [00679] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third user input (12044): in accordance with a determination that the third user input is directed to the area occupied by the second plurality of application icons (e.g., that is directed to a first application icon of the second plurality of application icons, a second application icon of the second plurality of application icons, an area between the first application icon and the second application icon, etc.), and that the third user input meets the first criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a touch- hold input by a contact, criteria for detecting an input that, when detected on an application icon, corresponds to a request for displaying a contextual menu associated with an application corresponding to the application icon, and that, when detected on a widget of an application, corresponds to a request for displaying a contextual menu associated with the widget, etc.), the computer system changes two or more (e.g., less than all, or all) of the second plurality of application icons from respective first appearances to respective second appearances different from the respective first appearances, while displaying the first plurality of selectable options (e.g., in a contextual menu, in a control panel, etc.) associated with the first user interface object. Changing the two or more of the plurality of application icons from respective first appearance to respective second appearance, in accordance with the determination that the user input is directed to the area occupied by the second plurality of application icons and meeting certain criteria, provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., changing multiple application icons in appearance to indicate that whole widget is being edited).
[00680] [00680] In some embodiments, while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode (e.g., icon reconfiguration mode), including concurrently displaying the second plurality of application icons concurrently with the two or more of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, the computer system detects (12046) a 384
[00681] [00681] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the fourth user input (12048): in accordance with a determination that the fourth user input is directed to the first application icon of the second plurality of application icons, and that the fourth input meets the second criteria, the computer system ceases display of the first application icon among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface (e.g., replacing display of the first application icon among the second plurality of application icons with another application icon that is automatically selected by the computer system and that is not currently one the second plurality of application icons, or selecting a new group of application icons for display as the second plurality of application icons, wherein the new group of application icons do not include the first application icon, etc.). In some embodiments, displaying the first application icon at the new location outside of the area occupied by the second plurality of application icons includes changing the appearance of the 385
[00682] [00682] In some embodiments, displaying the first application icon at the new location — outside of the area occupied by the second plurality of application icons includes (12050): in accordance with a determination that the new location is on the respective page of the home screen user interface, ceasing display of the first application icon from among the second plurality of application icons and displaying an new application icon that is automatically selected by the computer system among the second plurality of application icons (e.g., replacing the first application icon at a location of the first application icon among the second plurality of application icons with another application icon that is automatically selected by the computer system and that is not currently one the second plurality of application icons, or replacing the second plurality of application icons with a new group of application icons that does not include the first application icon, etc.); and in accordance with a determination that — the new location is not on the respective page of the home screen user interface, maintaining the first application icon at the location among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface when the respective page is displayed.
[00684] [00684] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in — Figures 12A-12F have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10000, — 11000, 13000, and 14000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 12000 described above with respect to Figures 12A-12F. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method 388
[00685] [00685] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.
[00686] [00686] The operations described above with reference to Figures 12A-12F are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B. For example, detection operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler — 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in — Figures 1A-1B.
[00687] [00687] Figures 13A-13H are flow diagrams illustrating a method 13000 of moving and/or rearranging existing user interface objects corresponding to different applications 389
[00688] [00688] This method 13000 relates to various rules for providing visual feedback and reflowing application icons and/or user interface objects containing application content (e.g., widgets) on one or more pages of a home screen user interface when application icons and/or user interface objects containing application content are inserted into, deleted from, and/or moved relative to the one or more pages. In some embodiments, rules are implemented to — avoid one or more configurations of the page that are more likely to result in aggregation of alignment issues and/or more likely to contribute to disorganization of the pages and user confusion overtime. In some embodiments, rules are implemented to provide visual feedback (e.g. through automatic organization into blocks, reflowing and moving as blocks, etc.) about how a page will be organized if a user interface object containing application content is inserted into the page before the user input is ended and the user interface object containing application content is actually inserted into the page, and/or before the user input selects any specific placement location for the user interface object containing application content on the page. In some embodiments, rules are implemented to provide visual feedback about a suitable and/or required placement location in a page, as soon as the user interface object containing application content is dragged onto the page, such that the user becomes aware of such recommendation or limitation for the placement location without having to make any unsuccessful attempts to drop the user interface object at unpermitted placement locations. These feature enhance the operability of the device (e.g., by providing suitable visual feedback and guidance to the user when the user provides input to reorganize the pages of the home screen user interface), and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which improves battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently).
[00689] [00689] The method 13000 is performed at a computer system (e.g., a computer, an electronic device, a handheld electronic device, a portable electronic device, a tablet device, a — mobile phone, etc.) in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a touch- sensitive display, a display, a projector, a head mounted display (HMD), etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more processors and memory that are 390
[00690] [00690] In the method 13000, the computer system displays (13002), via the display generation component, a respective page of a home screen user interface (e.g., a user- arranged page of a multipage home screen user interface, a single page home screen user interface, etc.). The respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons and a first user interface object containing application content corresponding to a respective application displayed at a first placement location (e.g., a first widget corresponding to a first application at a first widget placement location, a suggested applications widget, etc.). In some embodiments, the first plurality of application icons and the first user interface object are displayed in accordance with a layout that includes icon placement locations for application icons and includes widget placement locations for user interface objects containing application content. In some embodiments, a widget placement location occupies roughly the same area occupied by a sub-grid of icon placement locations (e.g., a 1x4 sub-grid, a 2x2 sub-grid, a 2x4 sub-grid, etc. on a full 5x4 grid or 6x4 grid, etc.).
[00691] [00691] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input (13008): in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met (e.g., the first user interface object is moved within the respective page and not moved to a different page, the first user interface object is displayed side by side with a sub-grid of application icons, and/or there is another user interface object containing application content on the same page that is larger 393
[00692] [00692] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input (13010): in accordance with a determination that the second criteria are met (e.g., the first user interface 394
[00693] [00693] In some embodiments, the first criteria includes (13012) a first requirement that is met when the first user input corresponds to a request to move the first user interface 395
[00694] [00694] In some embodiments, the first criteria include (13014) a third requirement that is met when the respective page includes a second user interface object containing — application content at a second placement location different from the first placement location, and the second criteria include a fourth requirement that is met when the first user interface object containing application icon is not displayed concurrently with other user interface objects containing application content on the respective page (e.g., the first user interface object is the only user interface object containing application content (e.g., the only widget) — on the respective page). For example, in some embodiments, when a 2x2 widget that is placed side by side with a 2x2 sub-grid of application icons in the respective page is dragged away from its original placement location on the respective page, if there is another widget (e.g., a 1x4 widget, a 2x4 widget, a widget that is larger than the 2x2 widget, etc.) on the same respective page, the 2x2 sub-grid of application icons will follow the 2x2 widget as the 2x2 widget moves around the respective page; but the 2x2 sub-grid of application icons will remain their original locations and not follow the 2x2 widget as the 2x2 widget moves around the respective page if there isn’t another widget (e.g., a 1x4 widget, a 2x4 widget, a widget 397
[00695] [00695] In some embodiments, the first criteria include (13016) a fifth requirement that is met when the respective page includes a third user interface object containing application content and that the third user interface object containing application content is larger than a respective size (e.g., larger than the first user interface object containing application content); and the second criteria include a sixth requirement that is met when the respective page does not include a user interface object containing application content that is larger than the respective size (e.g., the first user interface object containing application icon is the largest or only user interface object containing application content on the respective page). For example, in some embodiments, when a 2x2 widget that is placed side by side with a 2x2 — sub-grid of application icons in the respective page is dragged away from its original placement location on the respective page, if there is another widget that is larger than the 2x2 widget (e.g., a 2x4 widget, a 4x4 widget, etc.) on the same respective page, the 2x2 sub- 398
[00696] [00696] In some embodiments, the first set of placement locations corresponds (13018) to a cluster of adjacent placement locations (e.g., a sub-grid in a full grid of icon placement locations in the respective page), and the first plurality of application icons are moved as a group to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content. Moving the first plurality of application icons to follow the direction of 399
[00697] [00697] In some embodiments, moving the first plurality of application icons to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content includes (13020) maintaining a relative position of the first plurality of application icons to each other when moving the first plurality of application icons to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content. Maintaining a relative position of the first plurality of application icons to each other when moving the first plurality of application icons to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SH2-5H3 for example, where application icons 5008a-5008d follow the movement of widget 5022g within user-arranged home screen 5210” in accordance with drag input by contact 6600. As widget 5022g and application icons 5008a-5008d exchange place, the ordering of the application icons is maintained (e.g., application icons 5008a-5008d are not rearranged with respect to each other) (Figures SH2-5H3).
[00699] [00699] In some embodiments, moving the first plurality of application icons to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content includes (13024) moving at least one of the first plurality of application icons with a different value for one or more respective movement characteristics (e.g., speed, acceleration, direction, etc.) from that of the first user interface object containing application content. Moving at least one of the first plurality of application icons with a different value for one or more respective movement characteristics, in response to detecting the first user input and in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SH43-5HS5 for example, where application icons follow the movement of widget 5022g. Application icons 5008a-5008d follow the movement of widget 401
[00700] [00700] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input (13026): in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object has been moved (or is in the process of being moved, as in the widget is still being dragged) to a second page of the home screen user interface, and that the second page of the home screen user interface — includes a third plurality of application icons in a first arrangement that meets third criteria (e.g., the first arrangement of application icons is in a single row of grid locations, the first arrangement of application icons occupy a sub-grid that is half the height and twice the width of the size of the first user interface object containing application content, etc.), the computer system rearranges the third plurality of application icons from the first arrangement into a second arrangement that is different from the first arrangement without the first user interface object being moved to a third set of placement locations of the third plurality of application icons in the first arrangement. For example, in some embodiments, as soon as the first user interface object containing application content appears on the second page of the home screen user interface, overlaying an unoccupied area of the second page of the home screen user interface, the computer system automatically rearranges the third plurality of application icons from the first arrangement (e.g., a single row, 1x4 sub-grid, 1x6 sub-grid, etc.) to the second arrangement (e.g., into a 2x2 sub-grid, a 2x3 sub-grid, etc.) in accordance with a size (e.g., 2x2, 2x3, etc.) of the first user interface object containing application content. Rearranging the third plurality of application icons from the first arrangement into a second arrangement that is different from the first arrangement without the first user interface object being moved to a third set of placement locations of the third plurality of application icons in the first arrangement, in response to detecting the first user input and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object has been moved to a second page of the home screen user interface including a third plurality of application icons in a first arrangement that — meets third criteria, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, 402
[00701] [00701] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input (13028): in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object has been moved (or is in — the process of being moved, as in the widget is still being dragged) to the second page of the home screen user interface, and that the second page of the home screen user interface includes the third plurality of application icons in the first arrangement that meets third criteria (e.g., the first arrangement of application icons is in a single row of grid locations, the first arrangement of application icons occupy a sub-grid that is half the height and twice the — width of the size of the first user interface object containing application content, etc.), the computer system shifts the third plurality of application icons in the second arrangement on the second page to make room for the first user interface object containing application content on the second page (e.g., in response to movement of the first user interface object to a fourth set of placement locations of the third plurality of application icons in the second arrangement). For example, in some embodiments, as soon as the first user interface object containing application content appears on the second page of the home screen user interface, overlaying an unoccupied area of the second page of the home screen user interface, the computer system automatically rearranges the third plurality of application icons from the first arrangement (e.g., a single row, 1x4 sub-grid, 1x6 sub-grid, etc.) to the second arrangement (e.g., into a 2x2 sub-grid, a 2x3 sub-grid, etc.) in accordance with a size (e.g., 2x2, 2x3, etc.) of the first user interface object containing application content. After that, when the first user interface object is hovered at a position in front of or over the third plurality of application icons in the second arrangement, the third plurality of application icons in the second arrangement move out of the way (e.g., shift rightward) as a group to — make room for the first user interface object. Shifting the third plurality of application icons in the second arrangement on the second page to make room for the first user interface object containing application content on the second page, in response to detecting the first user input 403
[00702] [00702] In some embodiments, in the first arrangement, a subset of the application icons are (13030) arranged in a single row, and, in the second arrangement, the subset of the application icons are arranged in a multi-row array that corresponds to a size of the first user interface object. For example, in some embodiments, a row of application icons (e.g., three or four application icons in a single row) on a page are automatically arranged into a 2x2 sub- grid, when a 2x2 widget is dragged onto the page (e.g., without the 2x2 widget being dragged over to the locations of the row of application icons). Arranging the subset of the application icons in a single row or multi-row array, depending on whether they are in the first arrangement or the second arrangement, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SH33-5H35 for example, where application icons reflow to form a 2x2 sub-grid. Application icons 1-4 are initially arranged in a single row as widget 5022¢ is moved into user-arranged home screen 5212” in accordance with movement of contact 6630 404
[00703] [00703] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input (13032): in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object has been moved to a third page of the home screen user interface, and that the third page of the home screen user interface includes a fourth plurality of application icons in the third arrangement at a fourth set of placement locations that meets fourth criteria (e.g., the third arrangement of application icons is in a single row of grid locations, the first arrangement of application icons occupy a sub-grid that is half the height of the first user interface object containing application content, etc.), shifting the fourth plurality of application icons in the third arrangement on the third page to make room for the first user interface object containing application content without the first user interface object being moved to location corresponding to the fourth set of placement locations of the fourth plurality of application icons in the third arrangement (and, optionally, without rearranging the fourth plurality of application icons relative to each — other). For example, in some embodiments, when a 2x4 or 4x4 widget is moved to a page that includes a single row of application icons or an odd number of rows of application icons, a whole row of application icons (e.g., the top row, the bottom row, etc.) shifts downward automatically to make room for the 2x4 or 4x4 widget above the whole row of application icons, as soon as the 2x4 or 4x4 widget is moved to the page, before the first user interface object is dragged over to the original location of the row of application icons that are moved. Shifting the fourth plurality of application icons in the third arrangement on the third page to make room for the first user interface object, in response to detecting the first user input and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object has been moved to a third page, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring — further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SH27-5H29 for example, where a first user-arranged home screen 5210”, including a plurality of application icons 5008 and one or more widgets 5022 organized in a grid and a second user-arranged home screen 5212” including a single row of application icons (e.g., between one and four application icons) is displayed. In response to detecting drag input by contact 405
[00704] [00704] In some embodiments, the fourth plurality of application icons are (13034) located near a top of the third page, and after shifting the fourth plurality of application icons in the third arrangement on the third page, a region near the top of the third page remains unoccupied until the first user interface object is moved to the fourth set of placement — locations of the fourth plurality of application icons at the top of the third page. For example, when a 2x4 or 4x4 widget is moved to a page that includes a single row of application icons or an odd number of rows of application icons, a whole top row or rows of application icons (e.g., the top one row, the top two rows, etc.) shift downward automatically to make room for the 2x4 or 4x4 widget above the whole row(s) of application icons, as soon as the 2x4 or 4x4 widget is moved to the page, before the first user interface object is dragged over to the original location of the row(s) of application icons that are moved. Making the region near the top of the third page unoccupied until the first user interface object is moved to the fourth set of placement locations of the fourth plurality of application icons at the top of the third page provides improved visual feedback to the user. Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SH29-5H30 for example. As widget 5022h is moved into the second user-arranged home screen, the single row of application icons 1-4 are automatically moved downwards to vacate a potential placement location for widget 5022h (Figure SH29). When contact 6626 ends, widget 5022h is automatically placed at the top of the grid of the second user-arranged home screen 5212” (Figure SH30).
[00705] [00705] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input (13036): in accordance with a determination that fifth criteria are met (e.g., there are consecutive application icons on the respective page that occupy a sub-grid that is at least as wide as, and/or as tall as the first user interface object that is being dragged), the computer system moves a first group of application icons and a second group of application icons on the 406
[00706] [00706] In some embodiments, the computer system receives (13038) a request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page (e.g., the first user interface object is dragged to another page in response to a user input). In response to receiving the request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page, the computer system rearranges application icons on the respective page, including changing an — arrangement of the first and second groups of application icons by reflowing the first and second groups of application icons while maintaining the arrangement of the application icons within the first and second groups of application icons (e.g., sequential order of the application icons in a respective group remain unchanged before and after the first user interface object is moved out of the respective page). For example, in some embodiments, when a 2x2 widget is dragged out of its placement location on the respective page, the application icons on the respective page are grouped into 2x2 blocks, and at least some of the 2x2 blocks of application icons are moved as individual groups (e.g., reflowed, following the dragged widget, etc.) on the respective page in accordance with the movement of the dragged widget; and when the 2x2 widget is dragged to another page, application icons below and/or to the right of the original placement location of the 2x2 widget that remain on the respective page reflow in 2x2 blocks to fill the 2x2 slot vacated by the 2x2 widgets. Changing an arrangement of the first and second groups of application icons by reflowing the first and second groups of application icons while maintaining the arrangement of the application icons within the first and second groups of application icons, in response to receiving the request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SH50-5HS51 for example, where widget 5022g is dragged from user-arranged home screen 5214” in accordance with movement of contact 6638. Application icons 5-6, 8, and 11-16 are organized into 2x2 sub- 408
[00707] [00707] In some embodiments, the computer system receives (13040) a request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page (e.g., the first user interface object is dragged to another page in response to a user input). In response to receiving the request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page, the computer system rearranges application icons on the respective page, including changing an arrangement of the first and second groups of application icons by reflowing the application icons including changing the arrangement of the application icons within at least one respective group of application icons relative to other application icons within the respective group application icons (e.g., application icons are no longer treated as belonging to a respective group after the first user interface object is moved out of the respective page). For example, in some embodiments, when a 2x2 widget is dragged out of its placement location on the respective page, the application icons on the respective page are grouped into 2x2 blocks, and at least some of the 2x2 blocks of application icons are moved as individual groups (e.g., reflowed, following the dragged widget, etc.) on the respective page in accordance with the movement of the dragged widget; and when the 2x2 widget is dragged to another page, application icons below and/or to the right of the original placement location of the 2x2 widget that remain on the respective page reflow as one by one individual application — icons to fill the 2x2 slot vacated by the 2x2 widgets. Changing an arrangement of the first and second groups of application icons by reflowing the application icons including changing the arrangement of the application icons within at least one respective group of application icons relative to other application icons within the respective group application icons, in response to receiving the request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures SH18-5H19 for — example. In the first user-arranged home screen 5022g, including a sub-block of application icons 5008e, 5008g, and 5008h-50081 and at least one 2x2 widget such as widget 5022g, a request to remove widget 5022g from the first user-arranged home screen 5210” is received 409
[00708] [00708] In some embodiments, while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface, including displaying the first user interface object at the first placement location and displaying a first set of one or more application icons in one or more placement locations for application icons (immediately) preceding the first placement location (and, optionally, a second set of one or more application icons in one or more placement locations for application icons succeeding the first placement location), the computer system detects (13042) a user input that corresponds to a request to delete an application icon in the first set of one or more application icons. In response to the user input that corresponds to the request to delete the application icon in the first set of one or more application icons: in accordance with a determination that a size (e.g., an aggregated size after reflowing, or a block size without reflowing, etc.) of vacant placement locations for application icons preceding the first placement location (e.g., in a predetermined order of application icons and widgets for the home screen page) does not correspond to a size of the first user interface object (e.g., aggregated size of vacant placement locations after reflowing, or a vacant block size without reflowing, etc. is smaller than the size of the first user interface object), the computer system maintains the first user interface object at the first placement location. For example, in some embodiments, when the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a full row of four application icons followed by a full or partially filled row of application icons (e.g., 1 to 4 application icons), followed by a 2x4 widget in the third and fourth rows, deletion of an application icon from the top two rows does not cause the 2x4 widget to move up, because there isn't sufficient room to accommodate the 2x4 widget in the top two rows. In some embodiments, in response to the user input that corresponds to the request to delete the application icon in the first set of one or more application icons: in accordance with a determination that the size (e.g., an aggregated size after reflowing, or a block size without reflowing, etc.) of vacant placement locations for application icons preceding the first placement location (e.g., in the predetermined order of application icons and widgets for the — home screen page) correspond to the size of the first user interface object (e.g., aggregated size of vacant placement locations after reflowing, or a vacant block size without reflowing, etc. is equal to or is greater than the size of the first user interface object), the computer 410
[00710] [00710] In some embodiments, while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface, including displaying the first user interface object at the first placement location and displaying a third set of one or more application icons in placement locations for application icons preceding the first placement location (e.g., in a predetermined order of — application icons and widgets for the home screen page), the computer system detects (13046) a user input that corresponds to a request to insert an additional application icon not present in the respective page into the respective page (e.g., wherein the request selects a placement location for the additional application icon by dropping the additional icon while the additional application icon is over the placement location, or wherein the request does not — select a placement location for the additional application icon in the respective page by dropping the application icon while the additional application icon is over an unoccupied area of the respective page, etc.). In response to the user input that corresponds to the request to insert the additional application icon into the respective page: in accordance with a determination that there is at least one vacant placement location for application icon preceding the first placement location (e.g., in a predetermined order of application icons and widgets for the home screen page), the computer system inserts the additional application icon into a first vacant placement location for application icon preceding the first placement 413
[00711] [00711] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input (13048): in accordance with a determination that sixth criteria are met, wherein the sixth criteria are met when the first user interface object is dragged away from the respective page of the home screen user interface onto a second respective page of the home screen user interface that has an arrangement of application icons that cannot be divided into groups that have a size corresponding to the first user interface object with no more than one group having fewer than a respective number of application icons that form an arrangement in the size corresponding to the first user interface object: the computer system moves a set of application icons on the second respective page to change an original arrangement of the set of one or more application icons on the second respective page of the home screen user interface to an arrangement of application icons that can be divided into groups that have the size corresponding to the first user interface object with no more than one group having fewer than a respective number of application icons that form an arrangement in the size corresponding to the first user interface object. In some embodiments, the set of one or more application icons on the second respective page are organized into the arrangement with the — size corresponding to the size of the first user interface object before the first user interface object is moved to a location of the set of one or more application icons and before the first user interface object is dropped into the second respective page. In other words, the computer system organizes the application icons in the second respective page in anticipation of the need to reflow the application icons to accommodate the dragged widget when the widget is — dragged around the second respective page and when the widget is dropped onto the second respective page. For example, when a 2x2 sized widget is dragged onto a page, the application icons on the page are grouped into 2x2 blocks, such that there are no blocks with 415
[00712] [00712] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input (13050): in accordance with a determination that seven criteria are met after the sixth criteria are met, wherein the seventh criteria are met when the first user interface object is dragged away from the second respective page of the home screen user interface (or inserted into a placement location without displacing an existing user interface object occupying the placement location): the computer system restores the original arrangement of the set of one or more application icons on the second respective page of the home screen user interface (e.g., in 416
[00713] [00713] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input (13052): in accordance with a determination that seventh criteria are met, wherein the seventh criteria are met when the first user interface object is dragged away from the respective page of the home screen user interface onto a second respective page of the home screen user interface that is different from the respective page of the home screen user interface: the computer system moves existing application icons on the second respective page in one or more groups, where 417
[00714] [00714] In some embodiments, after the first user interface object has been moved away from the first placement location (e.g., still over the respective page, or onto a different page) in accordance with the first user input and before a termination of the first user input is detected, the computer system detects (13054) a second user input that is directed to a third user interface object containing application content. In response to detecting the second user input that is directed to the third user interface object containing application content, in accordance with a determination that the second user input meets seventh criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a tap input on a widget or otherwise selecting the widget, etc.): the computer system moves the third user interface object containing application content and the first user interface object containing application content as a group in accordance with the first user input (e.g., after or in conjunction with moving the third user interface object containing application content to a current location of the first user interface object containing application content). In some embodiments, upon termination of the first user input, the first user interface object and the third user interface object are dropped onto the currently displayed page together (e.g., into adjacent placement locations) at the time of the termination of the first user input, irrespective of the relative spatial locations of the first user interface object and the third user interface object before the first user input was detected (e.g., on the respective page, or on different pages). Moving the third user interface object containing application content and the first user interface object containing application content as a group in accordance with the first user input, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 5H56-5H60 for example, where multiple widgets flock together. Widget 5022g is moved in accordance with drag input by contact 6646. While contact 6646 is maintained on widget 5022g, additional contacts are detected on application — icon 10 and widget 5022i (Figure 5H56). In accordance with movement of contact 6646, widget 5022g and application icon 10 and widget 5022i flock together (Figures 5H57-5H60).
[00715] [00715] In some embodiments, after the first user interface object has been moved away from the first placement location (e.g., still over the respective page, or onto a different page) in accordance with the first user input and before a termination of the first user input is detected, the computer system detects (13056) one or more third user inputs that are directed to one or more application icons (e.g., application icons on the respective page, or on one or more different pages of the home screen user interface). In response to detecting the one or more third user inputs that are directed to the one or more application icons, in accordance with a determination that the one or more third user inputs meet eighth criteria (e.g., criteria for detecting a tap input on an application icon or otherwise selecting the application icon): — the computer system moves the one or more application icons and the first user interface object containing application content as a group in accordance with the first user input (e.g., after moving the one or more application icons to a current location of the first user interface object containing application content). In some embodiments, upon termination of the first user input, the first user interface object and the one or more application icons are dropped onto the currently displayed page together (e.g., into adjacent placement locations) at the time of the termination of the first user input, irrespective of the relative spatial locations of the first user interface object and the one or more application icons before the first user input was detected (e.g., on the respective page, or on different pages). Moving the one or more application icons and the first user interface object containing application content as a group in accordance with the first user input, in response to detecting the one or more third user inputs that are directed to the one or more application icons and in accordance with a determination that the one or more third user inputs meet certain criteria, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input, Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure SH47-5H51 for example, where a plurality of application icons flock with widget 5022g as widget 5022g is moved. Widget 5022g is moved in accordance with drag input by contact 6638. While contact 6638 is maintained on widget 5022g, additional contacts are detected on individual application icons 9, 10, and 7 (Figures 5H47-5H48), causing application icons 7, 9, and 10 to flock with widget 5022g. In accordance with movement of contact 6638, widget 5022g and application icons 9, 10, and 7 move together (Figures SH48-5HS51). 420
[00716] [00716] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that at least one object is being moved with the first user interface object as a group in accordance with the first user input, the computer system displays (13058) an indicator of a count of the at least one object (e.g., showing a count of the number of widgets and application icons that are being moved with the first selected widget as a group in accordance with the first user input, as a result of having been selected by user inputs during the first user input). In some embodiments, the indicator displays a count of the objects that has been moved to the current location of the first user interface object. In some embodiments, the indicator displays a total count of objects that are being moved together as a group, including the first user interface object. In some embodiments, the count includes a count of the multiple widgets being moved. In some embodiments, the count includes a count of one or more application icons and one or more widgets. In some embodiments, when a widget stack that includes a plurality of user interface objects containing application content (e.g., widgets) associated with the same placement location is being moved with the first user interface object as a group, the count is incremented by the number of plurality of user interface objects containing application content (e.g., widgets) in the widget stack. Displaying an indicator of a count of the at least one object provides improved visual feedback to the user and in accordance with a determination that at least one object is being moved with the first user interface object as a group in accordance with the first user input. Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5H48-5H49 for example, where the number of widgets and application icons flocking together is indicated. For example, when application icons 9 and 10 are flocking with widget 5022g, indicator icon 5024 indicates that there are 3 user interface objects in the flock (Figure 5H48). When application icon 7 flocks with widget 5022g and application icons 9 and 10, indicator icon 5024 indicates that there are 4 user interface objects in the flock (Figure 5H49).
[00717] [00717] In some embodiments, after the first user interface has been moved away from the first placement location (e.g., still over the respective page, or onto a different page) in accordance with the first user input and before a termination of the first user input is detected, the computer system detects (13060) that the first user interface object is moved to a placement location of a fourth user interface object containing application content. In 421
[00718] [00718] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 13A-13H have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 11000, 12000, and 14000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 13000 described above with respect to Figures 13A-13H. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method — 13000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- 423
[00719] [00719] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.
[00720] [00720] The operations described above with reference to Figures 13A-13H are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B. For example, detection operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a — user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.
[00721] [00721] Figures 14A-14G are flow diagrams illustrating a method for configuring user interface objects containing application content (e.g., widgets, mini application objects, etc.) and adding the same to another user interface (e.g., a page of a home screen), in accordance with some embodiments.
[00722] [00722] This method 14000 relates to providing a widget selection user interface in which a preconfigured widget and/or widget stack can be configured and from which the preconfigured widget and/or widget stack can be added to another user interface. As disclosed herein the widget selection user interface serves the function of a mini library of preconfigured widgets and/or widget stacks, but also allows access to widget-specific configuration options for preconfigured widgets and/or widget stacks. The widget selection user interface and the widget-specific configuration user interface optionally display the widgets with the currently selected configuration options, and real-time data from the widget(s) corresponding application(s). The widget selection user interface that serves the combined functions of allowing the user to view preconfigured widgets and providing access to configuration options for the widgets, as well as allowing the user to select and insert/move one or more widgets from the widget selection user interface or widget-specific configuration user interface to another user-selected location improves enhances the operability of the device (e.g., by making it easier to discover widgets and adding widgets to another location) and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to achieve an intended outcome with required inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device), which improves battery life of the device (e.g., by helping the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently).
[00723] [00723] The method 140000 is performed at a computer system (e.g., a computer, an electronic device, a handheld electronic device, a portable electronic device, a tablet device, a mobile phone, etc.) in communication with a display generation component (e.g., a touch- sensitive display, a display, a projector, a head mounted display (HMD), etc.). In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more processors and memory that are enclosed in the same housing, while the display generation component is enclosed in a — different housing from the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system including one or more processors and memory is enclosed in the same housing as the display generation component. In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with one or more input devices (e.g., touch sensitive surfaces, touch-screen display, cameras, joysticks, motion detectors, etc.). In some embodiments, at least some of the one or more input devices are integrated with the display generation component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface is integrated with a display in a touch-screen display, a camera is integrated with a display in a head-mounted display, etc.). In some embodiments, at least some of the input 425
[00724] [00724] In the method 14000, the computer system displays (14002), via the display generation component, a first user interface (e.g., a widget configuration user interface that includes a plurality of preconfigured widgets for user selection) for selecting user interface objects for placement on a home screen user interface of the computer system (e.g., preconfigured widgets for different applications), wherein the first user interface includes a first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to a first application (e.g., a first widget for a first application). While displaying the first user interface, the computer system detects (14004) a first user input that is directed to a respective location in the first user interface. In response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface (14006): in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application (e.g., the first widget) and is preconfigured with one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object (e.g., a first widget size, and a first widget type, etc.), and that the first user input is a first type of input (e.g., a tap input, etc.), the computer system displays (14008) (e.g., in a widget-specific configuration user interface for the first widget) one or more first controls for changing one or more configuration options for the first user interface object to configuration options that are different from the one or more predetermined configuration options (e.g., without placing the first user interface object on a respective user interface (e.g., home screen, widget screen, etc.) of the computer system). In some embodiments, to detect the first type of input, the computer system detects a contact on a touch-sensitive surface and detects lift-off of the contact within a threshold amount of time of — the initial detection the contact. In some embodiments, the first type of input is an in-air tap input that is detected in conjunction with a gaze input and that includes a quick downward movement of an index finger that last less than a threshold amount of time. In some embodiments, the first type of input is a tap input on a surface that is detected using a camera. In response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface (14006): in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application, and that the first user input is a second type of input 426
[00725] [00725] In some embodiments, the first user interface includes (14012) a second user interface object, different from the first user interface object, that includes application content corresponding to a second application. In response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the second user 427
[00726] [00726] In some embodiments, while displaying (e.g., in a widget-specific configuration user interface for the first widget) the one or more first controls, the computer system detects (14014) one or more configuration inputs that are directed to the one or more — first controls. In response to detecting the one or more configuration inputs, the computer system changes at least one of the one or more configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object to configuration options that are different from the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding the first user interface object. After changing the at least one of the one or more configuration options corresponding to the first — user interface object, the computer system detects a second user input that corresponds to a request to add the first user interface object to the respective user interface (e.g., the second input selects and drags the first widget, or taps an “add” affordance that is displayed concurrently with the first widget in the widget-specific configuration user interface of the first widget, etc.). In response to detecting the second user input, the computer system — displays the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application in the respective user interface with the at least one of the one or more configuration options of the first user interface object being different from the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object. Changing at least one of the one or more configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object and displaying the first user interface object with the at least one of the one or more configuration options of the first user interface object reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., changing the configuration options of the first user interface object and displaying the first user interface object in the respective user interface). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 5111-5116 for example, 429
[00727] [00727] In some embodiments, the first user interface includes (14016) a — representation of a plurality of user interface objects containing application content corresponding to different applications, wherein the plurality of user interface objects are associated with the same placement location (e.g., a preconfigured widget stack including multiple widgets corresponding different applications, having a first size, and a first set of predetermined stack configuration options, etc.). In response to detecting the first user input — thatis directed to the respective location in the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the representation of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content that are associated with the same placement location, and that the first user input corresponds to a request to add the plurality of user interface objects containing application content to the respective user interface (e.g., the first user input taps on the representation of the widget stack, selects and drags the representation of the widget stack, or taps an “add” affordance that is displayed concurrently with the representation of the widget stack, etc.): the computer system displays one of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content at a respective placement location in the respective user interface (e.g., a page of a home screen user interface, a widget screen, etc.), wherein the respective placement location is selected in accordance with the first user input. For example, in some embodiments, the respective placement location is a default location on a default page (e.g., the last displayed page of the home screen, a first page of the home screen, etc.) if the first user input is an input that taps the “add button” on the widget selection user interface; and the respective placement location is a user-selected location on a user-selected page when the first user input is a drag and drop input that started on the preconfigured widget stack in the widget selection user interface and ended over a placement location that already included other widgets or application icons; and 430
[00728] [00728] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface (14018): in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the representation of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content, and that the first user input is the first type of input (e.g., a tap input, etc.), the computer system displays (e.g., in a stack-specific configuration user interface for the widget stack) one or more third controls for — changing constituent user interface objects of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the same placement location. In some embodiments, when a tap input is detected at a location of the preconfigured widget stack in the widget selection user interface, the computer system displays configuration options corresponding to the preconfigured widget stack, where the configuration options include one or more selectable options for selecting one or more additional widgets for inclusion in the preconfigured widget stack, and one or more selectable options for removing one or more existing widgets from the preconfigured widget stack. In some embodiments, when a tap input is detected at a location of a preconfigured widget in the widget selection user interface, the computer system displays configuration options corresponding to the preconfigured widget that is tapped, where the configuration — options include a selectable option for including the preconfigured widget in the preconfigured widget stack, or deleting the preconfigured widget from the preconfigured widget stack if the preconfigured widget is already part of the preconfigured widget stack. Displaying one or more third controls for changing constituent user interface objects of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the same placement location, in response to detecting the first user input and in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the representation of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content, performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input controls enhances the operability of the device, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 512 and 517 for example, where a configuration option “Add widget to 432
[00729] [00729] In some embodiments, the one or more first controls includes (14020) a respective control for changing a size of the first user interface object from a first (e.g., current or preconfigured/automatically selected) size to a second size that is different from the first size of the first user interface object. In some embodiments, the widget-specific configuration user interface of a preconfigured widget includes a size selector that provides one or more additional selectable sizes that are different from the preconfigured size of the preconfigured widget shown in the widget selection user interface. Including a respective control for changing a size of the first user interface object from a first size to a second size that is different from the first size of the first user interface object in the one or more first controls reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., a narrower example). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 517 for example, where widget size options 5274a, 5274b, and 5274c permit changing the size of widget 5022n.
[00731] [00731] In some embodiments, the one or more first controls include (14024) a respective control for changing a type of the first user interface object from a first (e.g., current or preconfigured/automatically selected) type to a second type that is different from the first type of the first user interface object. In some embodiments, the widget-specific configuration user interface of a widget includes a type selector that provides one or more additional selectable types that are different from the preconfigured type of the widget shown in the widget selection user interface. In some embodiments, different types of the widget include different types of application content (e.g., selected news topics vs. latest news, up- next event, events of the day, etc.) from the corresponding application of the widget. In some embodiments, different types of widgets include different application functions from the application of the widget. Including in the one or more first controls a respective control for changing a type of the first user interface object from a first type to a second type that is different from the first type of the first user interface object reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation. Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated 434
[00732] [00732] In some embodiments, the one or more first controls are (14026) displayed concurrently with an affordance that, when activated, causes the first user interface object to be added to an automatically selected placement location (e.g, a first available placement location in a currently selected page of a home screen user interface (e.g., the last display page of the home screen user interface, a first page of the home screen user interface, etc.)). Including an affordance that, when activated, causes the first user interface object to be added to an automatically selected placement location, reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation. Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 512, 517, and 5117 for example. While displaying widget 5022n in the widget selection user interface 5250, tap input by contact 6808 on widget selection indicator 53120 (Figure 512) adds widget 5022n to the default placement location in the user-arranged home screen user interface 5230” (Figure 5117). Similarly, while displaying widget 5022n in the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270, tap input by contact 6814 on “Add widget” button 5098 (Figure 517) adds widget 5022n to the default placement location in the user- arranged home screen user interface 5230” (Figure 5117).
[00733] [00733] In some embodiments, the first user interface object, as displayed in the first user interface, includes (14028) current application data (e.g., news, weather, calendar events, device location, etc.) from the first application. While displaying the first user interface object in the first user interface, in accordance with a determination that application data included in — the first user interface object is updated in the first application, the computer system updates the first user interface object in the first user interface to show updated application data from the first application (e.g., without navigating away from the first user interface). Updating the first user interface object in the first user interface to show updated application data from the first application while displaying the first user interface object, in accordance with a determination that application data included in the first user interface object is updated in the first application performs an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met 435
[00734] [00734] In some embodiments, the first user interface object, as displayed in the first user interface, includes (14030) user-specific application data from the first application (e.g., pictures, contacts, calendar events, messages, reminders, etc. associated with a user of the computer system). Including user-specific application data from the first application in the first user interface object reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., manually causing the computer system to the display user-specific application data). Reducing the number of inputs needed to perform an operation enhances the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 512 for example, where — the calendar widget in widget stack 50241 includes user-specific calendar events and the weather widget 5022p includes user-specific live weather information.
[00735] [00735] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface (14032): in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application (e.g., the first widget) (e.g., the first user interface object is preconfigured with the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object (e.g., a first widget size, and a first widget type, etc.)), and that the first user input is the first type of input (e.g., a tap input, etc.), the computer system displays (e.g., in a widget-specific configuration user interface for the first widget) the first user interface object containing application content from the first application concurrently with the one or more first controls. Displaying the first user interface object containing application content from the first application concurrently with the one or more first controls, in response to the first user input and in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the — location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application, reduces the number of inputs needed to perform an operation (e.g., activating controls for the first user interface object). Reducing the number of inputs needed 436
[00736] [00736] In some embodiments, while concurrently displaying the one or more first controls and the first user interface object containing application content, the computer system detects (14034) one or more user inputs activating at least one of the one or more first controls. In response to detecting the one or more user inputs activating the at least one of the one or more first controls: the computer system displays a placeholder object in place of the first user interface object while application data corresponding to the first user interface object is being loaded; and the computer system displays the first user interface object in place of the placeholder object after the application data corresponding to the first user interface object has been loaded. For example, when the widget size and/or widget type of the first user interface object is changed by the controls in the widget-specific configuration user interface, the placeholder object having the selected widget size and/or type is displayed in place of the first user interface object while the new application data corresponding to the selected widget size/or type is loading, and the first user interface object is displayed with the selected widget size/or type once the new application data has finished loading into the first user interface object. Displaying a placeholder object in place of the first user interface object while application data corresponding to the first user interface object is being loaded, in response to detecting the one or more user inputs activating the at least one of the one or more first controls, provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., indicating where the first user interface object would be placed). Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 517-518 for example, wherein widget 5022n is displayed in the widget-specific configuration — user interface 5270. A drag input by contact 6816 is detected directed to the displayed preview of widget 5022n (Figure 517). In response to the drag input by contact 6816, the 437
[00737] [00737] In some embodiments, the first user interface object, as concurrently displayed with the one or more controls, is (14036) animated so that it moves (e.g., back and forth or up and down in a simulated z direction relative to the user interface) separately from a background of the user interface. Moving the first user interface object separately from a background of the user interface provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., visually emphasizing the user interface object on the user interface). Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more — efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figures 5I7-5T8 for example, where the first widget 5022n can be scrolled (e.g., in response to drag input by contact 6816) separately from the background of the widget- specific configuration user interface 5270.
[00738] [00738] In some embodiments, the first user interface object, as concurrently displayed with the one or more first controls, is (14038) animated to tilt in a simulated z direction relative to the background of the user interface. Tilting the first user interface object in a simulated z direction relative to the background of the user interface provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., visually emphasizing the user interface object on the user interface). Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 5T7 for example, where the first widget 5022n is visually distinguished within the widget-specific configuration user interface 5270 and appears to have a shadow.
[00739] [00739] In some embodiments, while concurrently displaying the one or more controls and the first user interface object, the computer system detects (14040) an initial portion of a user input that corresponds to a request to drag the first user interface object to a user-selected placement location for the first user interface object. In response to detecting the initial — portion of the user input that corresponds to the request to drag the first user interface object to the user-selected placement location for the first user interface object, the computer system changes an appearance of the first user interface object (e.g., enlarging the first user interface 438
[00740] [00740] In some embodiments, the first user interface (e.g., the platter that supports the user interface elements of the widget selection user interface, the platter and some or all of the user interface elements of the widget selection user interface, etc.) is (14042) overlaid on a first portion of a page of a home screen user interface, and a second portion of the page of — the home screen user interface is concurrently visible with the first user interface (e.g., the platter that supports the user interface elements of the widget selection user interface, the platter and the user interface elements of the widget selection user interface, etc.). Overlaying the first user interface on a first portion of a page of a home screen user interface and Making the second portion of the page of the home screen user interface concurrently — visible with the first user interface provides improved visual feedback to the user (e.g., allowing the user to view both the first user interface and the home screen user interface concurrently). Providing improved visual feedback enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. These features are illustrated in Figure 517 for example, where the widget- specific configuration user interface 5270 is displayed overlaid on the user-arranged home screen 5230”, leaving a portion of the user-arranged home screen visible.
[00741] [00741] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (14044), within the first user interface (e.g., a widget configuration user interface that includes a plurality of preconfigured widgets for user selection) a first preconfigured user interface object group (e.g., a first preconfigured widget stack that includes a first collection of system-selected widgets, a recommended widget stack, a smart widget stack, etc.) that includes a first plurality of user interface objects containing application content corresponding to different applications, wherein the first preconfigured user interface object group, when placed on a respective user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface, or a widget screen user interface, etc.) displays (e.g., in response to manual switching inputs or automatic switching condition being met by changed context, etc.) different subset of the first plurality of user interface objects containing application content included in the first preconfigured user interface object group at different times at a placement location of the preconfigured user interface object group. In some embodiments, the first user interface includes multiple preconfigured user interface object groups (e.g., preconfigured widget stacks) that have different sizes (e.g., a — respective user interface object group (e.g., each user interface object group, each of multiple user interface object groups, etc.) includes a respective collection of system-selected widgets of a different size (e.g., 2x2, 2x4, 4x4, etc.)). In some embodiments, a size selector is included for the first preconfigured user interface object group, and the size selector includes selectable options corresponding to different sizes for the first preconfigured user interface object group. When a selectable option corresponding to a different size of the first preconfigured user interface object group is selected, the first preconfigured user interface object group is changed to a different size corresponding to the newly selected size. In some embodiments, when a selectable option for a different size is selected, the computer system displays a new preconfigured user interface object group with the newly selected size in the widget selection and configuration user interface. In some embodiments, while the first preconfigured user interface object group is displayed in the first user interface (e.g., a widget configuration user interface that includes a plurality of preconfigured widgets for user selection), the computer system detects a user input that is directed to the first preconfigured user interface object group, and that the user input (e.g., an upward swipe input, a vertical swipe input, etc.) corresponds to a request to switch the currently displayed user interface object containing application content in the first preconfigured user interface object group. In response to detecting the input that corresponds a request to switch the currently displayed user interface object containing application content in the first preconfigured user interface 440
[00742] [00742] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 14A-14G have been described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 11000, 12000, and 13000) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 14000 — described above with respect to Figures 14A-14G. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described above with reference to method 14000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, home screens, home screen user interfaces, application icons, widgets, user interface objects containing application content, page navigation elements, folders, user- arranged pages, system-arranged pages, groupings, application libraries, widget selection and configuration user interfaces, directional conditions, control panels, controls, position thresholds, directional conditions, navigation criteria, movement parameters, thresholds, determinations, focus selectors, and/or animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 11000, 12000, and — 13000). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.
[00743] [00743] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information 442
[00744] [00744] The operations described above with reference to Figures 14A-14G are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B. For example, detection — operation and drag operation are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.
[00745] [00745] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its — practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best use the invention and various described embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.
[00746] [00746] Exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure are set out in the following items:
1. A method, comprising: 443
DK 2020 70636 A1 at a computer system in communication with a display generation component: displaying, via the display generation component, a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications that are associated with the computer system, wherein activation of a respective application icon of the plurality of application icons in accordance with first criteria causes display of an application corresponding to the respective application icon to replace display of a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface on which the respective application icon is displayed;
while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a first input that meets second criteria different from the first criteria, the second criteria including a requirement that the first input indicates navigation in a first direction through the multipage home screen user interface;
in response to detecting the first input that meets the second criteria:
in accordance with a determination that the first input corresponds to a request to navigate to a second page of the multipage home screen user interface , replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface, wherein the second page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a second subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons corresponding to the plurality of applications, the second subset of application icons are different from the first subset of application icons;
while displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a second input that meets third criteria the third criteria including the requirement that the second input indicates navigation in the first direction through the multipage home screen user interface;
in response to detecting the second input that meets the third criteria: replacing display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of a respective user interface that includes representations of a plurality of automatically-generated groupings of the plurality of applications, and wherein activation of arespective representation of a respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings in accordance with the first criteria causes display of a third subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons, wherein the third subset of application icons correspond to at least a subset of the plurality of applications
444
DK 2020 70636 A1 that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings.
2. The method of item 1, wherein the plurality of automatically-generated groupings included on the respective user interface include one or more groupings that are generated based on respective categories for applications as defined by a source of the applications.
The method of any of items 1-2, wherein the plurality of automatically-generated groupings included on the respective user interface include a grouping that includes applications that are installed within a preset time window. The method of any of items 1-3, wherein the plurality of automatically-generated groupings included on the respective user interface include at least a first representation of a first grouping for a first subset of applications that are installed on the computer system, a second representation of a second grouping for a second subset of applications that are installed on the computer system, wherein the first subset of applications and the second subset of applications include at least one application in common.
5. The method of any of items 1-4, wherein the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping includes a first sub-portion and a second sub- portion, wherein the first sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping includes a respective representation of a first application that belongs to the respective automatically-generated grouping, the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping does not include respective representations of applications that belong to the respective automatically generated grouping, wherein activation of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping in accordance with the first criteria includes activating the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping.
6. The method of item 5, including: while displaying the respective representation of the respective automatically- generated grouping including the first sub-portion and the second sub-portion of the respective representation, detecting an input directed to the first sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping; and in response to detecting the input directed to the first sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping and in accordance with a 445
DK 2020 70636 A1 determination that the input directed to the first sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping meets preset criteria, replacing display of the respective user interface with display of the first application that belongs to the respective automatically-generated grouping.
7. The method of any of items 5-6, wherein the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping includes reduced-scale versions of application icons for at least some of the third set of application icons.
8. The method of any of items 5-7, wherein the first sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping includes respective representations of one or more applications, including the first application, that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping, wherein the respective representations of the one or more applications are select for inclusion in the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping in accordance with a measure of frequency of use associated with the applications belonging to the respective automatically-generated grouping.
9. The method of any of items 5-8, wherein the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping includes an affordance separate from the respective representation of the first application that belongs to the respective automatically-generated grouping, and wherein the method includes: while displaying the respective representation of the respective automatically- generated grouping including the first sub-portion and the second sub-portion of the respective representation, detecting an input directed to the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated group; and in response to detecting the input directed to the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated group and in accordance with a determination that the input directed to the second sub-portion of the respective representation of the automatically-generated group meets preset criteria, displaying respective application icons for the subset of applications that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping.
10. The method of any of items 1-9, including: 446
DK 2020 70636 A1 detecting that a new application is installed on the computer system; and in response to detecting that the new application is installed on the computer system, automatically including an application icon for the new application in one or more automatically-generated groupings on the respective user interface based on an association between one or more characteristics of the new application and the one or more automatically-generated groupings.
11. The method of any of items 1-10, wherein: replacing display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of the respective user interface includes displaying a first portion of the respective — user interface that includes representations of a first subset of the plurality of automatically- generated groupings for the plurality of applications, and the method includes: while displaying the first portion of the respective user interface, detecting an input that meets scrolling criteria; and in response to detecting the input that meets the scrolling criteria, scrolling the — respective user interface to reveal a second portion, different from the first portion, of the respective user interface that includes representations of a second subset, different from the first subset, of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings for the plurality of applications.
12. The method of any of items 1-10, wherein: replacing display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of the respective user interface includes displaying a first portion of the respective user interface that includes representations of a first subset of the plurality of automatically- generated groupings for the plurality of applications, and the method includes: while displaying the first portion of the respective user interface, detecting a third input that meets the fourth criteria , wherein the fourth criteria includes a requirement that the third input indicates navigation in a second direction different from (e.g., opposite of) the first direction through the multipage home screen user interface; and in response to detecting the third input that meets the fourth criteria, replacing display of the first portion of the respective user interface with display of another page of the 447
DK 2020 70636 A1 multipage home screen user interface that includes representations of a fourth subset of the plurality of applications.
13. The method of any of items 1-12, wherein displaying the respective user interface includes displaying, in a first preset portion of the respective user interface, respective application icons for a selected subset of the plurality of applications that are automatically identified by the computer system based on one or more characteristics of the selected subset of the plurality of applications that correspond a currently detected context.
14. The method of any of items 1-13, wherein displaying the respective user interface includes displaying a search input area in a second preset portion of the respective user — interface, wherein a search performed in the search input area returns search results that are application icons for a subset of applications from the plurality of applications that correspond to the search criteria entered using the search input area without returning search results that include other types of information.
15. The method of item 14, including: displaying one or more filters for search results concurrently with displaying the search input area in the preset portion of the last page of the multipage home screen user interface, wherein: a request to apply a first filter of the one or more filters causes application icons for a first subset of applications that include notifications that meet predefined criteria; and a request to not apply the first filter causes application icons for a second subset of applications from the subset of applications that correspond to the search criteria using the search input area to be displayed as the search results, the second subset of applications includes the first subset of applications that include the active notifications and — one or more applications that do not have the notifications that meet the predefined criteria.
16. The method of any of items 14-15, including: detecting input of one or more search criteria in the search input area displayed at the preset portion of the respective user interface; in response to detecting the input of the one or more search criteria, displaying, via the display generation component, search results corresponding to the one or more search 448
DK 2020 70636 A1 criteria in a search result display area, including displaying at least a first application icon corresponding to a first application that is responsive to the search criteria at a first location within the search result display area; while displaying the first application icon corresponding to the first application that is responsive to the search criteria, detecting an input that drags the first application icon from the first location to a second location different from the first location; in response to detecting the input that that drags the first application icon from the first location to the second location: ceasing display of the search result display area including the search results; and displaying a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the respective user interface; while displaying the first application icon over the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a termination of the input that had dragged the first application icon from the first location to the second location; and in response to detecting the termination of the input that had dragged the first application icon from the first location to the second location: moving the first application icon from an original location of the first application icon on the multipage home screen user interface to a new location on the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, the new location being selected in accordance with a final location of the first application icon at termination of the input that had dragged the first application icon from the first location to the second location.
17. The method of any of items 14-16, including: while displaying a second application icon corresponding to a second application that — isresponsive to search criteria provided using the search input area displayed at the preset portion of the respective user interface, detecting an input that meets preset criteria for triggering deletion of the second application icon from the search result display area; and in response to detecting the input that meets the preset criteria for triggering deletion of the second application icon from the search result display area: ceasing to display the second application icon among the search results responsive to the search criteria provided using the search input area. 449
DK 2020 70636 A1
18. The method of any of items 1-17, including: while displaying the third subset of application icons in response to activation of the respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping in accordance with the first criteria, including displaying at least a first application icon corresponding to a first application that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping at a first location, detecting an input that drags the first application icon from the first location to a second location different from the first location; in response to detecting the input that that drags the first application icon from the first location to the second location: ceasing display of the respective user interface; and displaying a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the respective user interface; while displaying the first application icon over the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a termination of the input that had dragged the first — application icon from the first location to the second location; and in response to detecting the termination of the input that had dragged the first application icon from the first location to the second location: moving the first application icon from an original location of the first application icon on the multipage home screen user interface to a new location on the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, the new location being selected in accordance with a final location of the first application icon at termination of the input that had dragged the first application icon from the first location to the second location.
19. The method of any of items 1-18, including: while displaying the third subset of application icons in response to activation of the — respective representation of the respective automatically-generated grouping in accordance with the first criteria, including displaying at least a second application icon corresponding to a second application that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping at a third location, detecting an input that meets preset criteria for triggering deletion of the second application icon from the respective user interface; and in response to detecting the input that meets the preset criteria for triggering deletion of the second application icon from the respective user interface, ceasing to display the second application icon on the respective user interface. 450
DK 2020 70636 A1
20. The method of any of items 1-17, wherein the plurality of automatically-generated groupings include a first automatically-generated grouping, the first automatically-generated grouping includes respective application icons for a subset of applications corresponding to a category associated with the first grouping, and one or more user interface objects containing application content from the subset of applications corresponding to the category associated with the first grouping.
21. The method of any of items 1-20, including: displaying a first user interface object that includes a plurality of portions, wherein each portion of the plurality of portions corresponds to a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, and wherein display of the user interface object is maintained during navigation through the multipage home screen user interface; while displaying the first user interface object, detecting a movement input that corresponds to movement from a first portion of the first user interface object, through a second portion of the first user interface object, to a third portion of the first user interface object, wherein the first portion of the first user interface object, the second portion of the first user interface object, and the third portion of the first user interface object, respectively correspond to three consecutive pages of the multipage home screen user interface; and in response to detecting the movement input: in accordance with a determination that a current location of the movement — input corresponds to the first portion of the first user interface object, displaying a first page of the three consecutive pages that corresponds to the first portion of the first user interface object; in accordance with a determination that the current location of the movement input corresponds to the second portion of the first user interface object, replacing display of — the first page of the three consecutive pages with display of a second page of the three consecutive pages that corresponds to the second portion of the first user interface object; and in accordance with a determination that the current location of the movement input corresponds to the third portion of the first user interface object, replacing display of the second page of the three consecutive pages with display of a third page of the three consecutive pages that corresponds to the third portion of the first user interface object.
22. The method of any of items 1-21, including: 451
DK 2020 70636 A1 displaying a first user interface object that is persistently at a respective location during navigation through the multipage home screen user interface; while displaying the first user interface object, detecting a movement input that corresponds to movement along the first user interface object; and in response to detecting the movement input: in accordance with a determination that a movement input meets first movement criteria, wherein the first movement criteria require the movement input to meet a first value of a movement metric in order for the first movement criteria to be met, displaying a first page of the multipage home screen user interface that corresponds to the first value of — the movement metric; and in accordance with a determination that a movement input meets second movement criteria, wherein the second movement criteria require the movement input to meet a second value of the movement metric in order for the second movement criteria to be met, displaying a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that corresponds to the second value of the movement metric, wherein the second value of the movement metric is different from the first value of the movement metric, and the second page is different from the first page.
23. The method of any of items 1-21, wherein the respective user interface is the last page of the multipage home screen user interface.
24. The method of any of items 1-21, wherein the respective user interface is overlaid on the last page of the multipage home screen user interface.
25. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the display, a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of 452
DK 2020 70636 A1 applications that are associated with the computer system, wherein activation of a respective application icon of the plurality of application icons in accordance with first criteria causes display of an application corresponding to the respective application icon to replace display of a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface on which the respective application icon is displayed; while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a first input that meets second criteria different from the first criteria, the second criteria including a requirement that the first input indicates navigation in a first direction through the multipage home screen user interface; in response to detecting the first input that meets the second criteria: in accordance with a determination that the first input corresponds to a request to navigate to a second page of the multipage home screen user interface , replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface, wherein the second page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a second subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons corresponding to the plurality of applications, the second subset of application icons are different from the first subset of application icons; while displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a second input that meets third criteria the third criteria including the requirement that the second input indicates navigation in the first direction through the multipage home screen user interface; in response to detecting the second input that meets the third criteria: replacing display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of a respective user interface that includes representations of a plurality of automatically-generated groupings of the plurality of applications, and wherein activation of a respective representation of a respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings in accordance with the first criteria causes display of a third subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons, wherein the third subset of application icons correspond to at least a subset of the plurality of applications that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings. 453
DK 2020 70636 A1
26. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to: display, via the display, a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications that are associated with the computer system, wherein activation of a respective application icon of the plurality of application icons in accordance with first criteria causes display of an application corresponding to the respective application icon to replace display of arespective page of the multipage home screen user interface on which the respective application icon is displayed; while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, detect a first input that meets second criteria different from the first criteria, the second criteria including a requirement that the first input indicates navigation in a first direction — through the multipage home screen user interface; in response to detecting the first input that meets the second criteria: in accordance with a determination that the first input corresponds to a request to navigate to a second page of the multipage home screen user interface , replace display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of the — second page of the multipage home screen user interface, wherein the second page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a second subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons corresponding to the plurality of applications, the second subset of application icons are different from the first subset of application icons; while displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface, detect a second input that meets third criteria the third criteria including the requirement that the second input indicates navigation in the first direction through the multipage home screen user interface; in response to detecting the second input that meets the third criteria: replace display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of a respective user interface that includes representations of a plurality of automatically-generated groupings of the plurality of applications, and wherein activation of a respective representation of a respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings in accordance with the first criteria causes 454
DK 2020 70636 A1 display of a third subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons, wherein the third subset of application icons correspond to at least a subset of the plurality of applications that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings.
27. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; means for displaying, on the display, a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications that are associated with the computer system, wherein activation of a respective application icon of the plurality of application icons in accordance with first criteria causes display of an application corresponding to the respective application icon to replace display of a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface on which the respective application icon is displayed; means, enabled while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, for detecting a first input that meets second criteria different from the first criteria, the second criteria including a requirement that the first input indicates navigation in a first direction through the multipage home screen user interface; means, enabled in response to detecting the first input that meets the second criteria: means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the first input corresponds to a request to navigate to a second page of the multipage home screen user interface, for replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface, wherein the second page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a second subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons corresponding to the plurality of applications, the second subset of application icons are different from the first subset of application icons; means, enabled while displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface, for detecting a second input that meets third criteria the third criteria including the requirement that the second input indicates navigation in the first direction through the multipage home screen user interface; 455
DK 2020 70636 A1 means, enabled in response to detecting the second input that meets the third criteria: means for replacing display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface with display of a respective user interface that includes representations of a plurality of automatically-generated groupings of the plurality of applications, and wherein activation of a respective representation of a respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings in accordance with the first criteria causes display of a third subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons, wherein the third subset of application icons correspond to at least a subset of the plurality of applications that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings.
28. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means for displaying, on the display, a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications that are associated with the computer system, wherein activation of a respective application icon of the plurality of application icons in accordance with first criteria causes display of an application corresponding to the respective application icon to replace display of arespective page of the multipage home screen user interface on which the respective application icon is displayed; means, enabled while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, for detecting a first input that meets second criteria different from the first criteria, the second criteria including a requirement that the first input indicates navigation in a first — direction through the multipage home screen user interface; means, enabled in response to detecting the first input that meets the second criteria: means, enabled in accordance with a determination that the first input corresponds to a request to navigate to a second page of the multipage home screen user interface, for replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface — with display of the second page of the multipage home screen user interface, wherein the second page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a second subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons corresponding to the plurality of 456
DK 2020 70636 A1 applications, the second subset of application icons are different from the first subset of application icons; means, enabled while displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface, for detecting a second input that meets third criteria the third criteria including the requirement that the second input indicates navigation in the first direction through the multipage home screen user interface; means, enabled in response to detecting the second input that meets the third criteria: means for replacing display of the second page of the multipage home screen — user interface with display of a respective user interface that includes representations of a plurality of automatically-generated groupings of the plurality of applications, and wherein activation of a respective representation of a respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings in accordance with the first criteria causes display of a third subset of application icons of the plurality of application icons, wherein the third subset of application icons correspond to at least a subset of the plurality of applications that belong to the respective automatically-generated grouping of the plurality of automatically-generated groupings.
29. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 1-24.
30. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 1-24.
31. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, an input element, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, 457
DK 2020 70636 A1 the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 1-24.
32. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; and means for performing any of the methods of items 1-24.
33. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means for performing any of the methods of items 1-24.
458
DK 2020 70636 A1
34. A method, comprising: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component: displaying a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications; while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a first input that meets first criteria ; in response to detecting the first input that meets the first criteria: displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, wherein locations of application icons in the first subset of application icons are adjustable in response to user inputs detected during the first reconfiguration mode; and while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a second input that meets second criteria; and in response to detecting the second input, activating the second reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, including: concurrently displaying, in a first user interface, representations of a plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces, including a first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface.
35. The method of item 34, including: displaying, while the first page of the multipage home screen user interface is — displayed in the first reconfiguration mode, a first user interface object for activating a second reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, wherein the second input that meets the second criteria activates the first user interface object in a first manner.
36. The method of item 34-35, including: 459
DK 2020 70636 A1 while displaying the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces in first user interface, detecting a third input that meets third criteria; and in response to detecting the third input that meets the third criteria: reordering the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces in accordance with the third input.
37. The method of item 36, including: while displaying the first user interface including the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a fourth input that meets fourth criteria and corresponds to a request to exit the second reconfiguration mode; and in response to detecting the fourth input that corresponds to the request to exit the second reconfiguration mode: in accordance with a determination that the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface are arranged in accordance with a first — order in the first user interface at a time when the fourth input is received, displaying the multipage home screen user interface with the pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces arranged in accordance with the first order; and in accordance with a determination that the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface are arranged in accordance with a second order different from the first order in the first user interface, displaying the multipage home screen user interface with the pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces arranged in accordance with the second order.
38. The method of any of items 36-37, including: while displaying the first user interface including the representations of the plurality — of pages of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a fourth input that meets fourth criteria and corresponds to a request to exit the second reconfiguration mode; and in response to detecting the fourth input that corresponds to the request to exit the second reconfiguration mode: ceasing displaying of the first user interface including the representations of — the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface; and 460
DK 2020 70636 A1 displaying a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode.
39. The method of any of items 34-38, wherein, in the second reconfiguration mode, the representations of the plurality of pages are displayed with a preset holding area for displaying reduced representations of hidden pages that are not currently included in the multipage home screen user interface.
40. The method of any of items 34-38, wherein, in the second reconfiguration mode, the representations of the plurality of pages are displayed, in an ordered sequence, with representations of one or more hidden pages that are not currently included in the multipage home screen user interface, wherein the representations of the one or more hidden pages are visually distinguished from the representations of the plurality of pages.
41. The method of any of items 34-39, including: while displaying the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces in the second reconfiguration mode, detecting a fifth input that meets fifth criteria; and in response to detecting the fifth input that meets the fifth criteria: in accordance with a determination that the fifth input is directed to the first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface, ceasing to display the first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interfaces, and in accordance with a determination that the fifth input is directed to the second representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface, ceasing to display the second representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interfaces.
42. The method of item 41, including: in response to detecting the fifth input that meets the fifth criteria: in accordance with a determination that the fifth input is directed to the first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface, displaying a reduced 461
DK 2020 70636 A1 representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface in a preset holding area in the first user interface, and in accordance with a determination that the fifth input is directed to the second representation of the first page of the multipage home screen interface, displaying a reduced representation of the second page of the multipage home screen interface in the preset holding area in the first user interface.
43. The method of any of items 41-42, including: after ceasing to display the first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface or the second representation of the second page of the multipage home — screen user interface as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a sixth input that meets sixth criteria and corresponds to a request to exit the second reconfiguration mode; and in response to detecting the sixth input that meets the sixth criteria and corresponds to the request to exit the second reconfiguration mode: in accordance with a determination that the first representation of the first page was no longer displayed as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface when the sixth input was detected, displaying the multipage home screen user interface without including the first page among the plurality of pages that are in the multipage home screen user interface; and in accordance with a determination that the second representation of the second page was no longer displayed as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface when the sixth input was detected, displaying the multipage home screen user interface without including the second page of the plurality of pages that are in the multipage home screen user interface.
44. The method of any of items 34-43, including: while displaying the multipage home screen user interface without including a respective page that were previously displayed in the multipage home screen user interface , detecting a request to enter the second reconfiguration mode; and in response to detecting the request to enter the second reconfiguration mode while displaying the multipage home screen user interface without including the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface, displaying, in the second reconfiguration mode a 462
DK 2020 70636 A1 reduced representation of the respective page of the multipage home screen interface in the second reconfiguration mode.
45. The method of item 44, including: while displaying the reduced representation of the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, detecting an eighth input that meets eighth criteria; and in response to detecting the eighth input that meets the eighth criteria, displaying the representation of the respective page as one of the representations of the plurality of pages that will be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface.
46. The method of any of items 34-45, including: displaying, in the second reconfiguration mode, one or more reduced representations of pages that are will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface, each reduced representation of the pages corresponds to a respective page of the home screen user interface that has been previously excluded from being displayed in the multipage home screen user interface while the second reconfiguration mode was active; and while displaying, in the second reconfiguration mode, the one or more reduced representations of pages that will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface, detecting an ninth input that meets ninth criteria; and in response to detecting the ninth input that meets the ninth criteria, ceasing display of — the one or more reduced representations of pages that will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface.
47. The method of item 46, wherein the one or more reduced representations of pages that will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface include multiple reduced representations corresponding to multiple pages that will not be displayed in the multipage home screen user interface, and the multiple reduced representations are deleted from the second reconfiguration mode by a single input that meets the eighth criteria.
48. The method of any of items 34-47, wherein the multipage home screen user interface includes one or more user-arranged pages and one or more system-arranged pages, and wherein the representations of the plurality of pages concurrently displayed in the second 463
DK 2020 70636 A1 reconfiguration mode does not include representations of the one or more system-arranged pages.
49. The method of any of items 34-48, wherein the multipage home screen user interface displayed in the first reconfiguration mode includes a first predefined user interface object for activating the second reconfiguration mode, and the second input that meets the second criteria includes an input that activates the first predefined user interface object.
50. The method of item 49, wherein the first predefined user interface object is displayed at a location corresponding to a plurality of page indicators corresponding to the plurality of pages that are currently included for display in the multipage home screen user interface.
51. The method of item 49-50, wherein the first predefined user interface object is displayed on each page of the plurality of pages that are currently included in the multipage home screen user interface and includes a plurality of page indicators for the plurality of pages with a changed appearance.
52. The method of any of items 34-51, including: in response to detecting the first input that meets the first criteria: displaying a second predefined user interface object on the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, wherein activation of the second predefined user interface object in accordance with preset criteria, causes display of an object-editing user interface for selecting and configuring user interface objects that — include application content for inclusion into one or more pages of the multipage home screen user interface.
53. The method of any of items 34-49, including: while concurrently displaying, in the first user interface, the representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces, detecting a tenth input that — meets tenth criteria; and in response to detecting the tenth input that meets the tenth criteria: terminating the second reconfiguration mode, including ceasing to display the first user interface; and redisplaying a respective page of the multipage home screen user interface. 464
DK 2020 70636 A1
54. The method of item 53, wherein redisplaying the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface includes redisplaying the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode.
55. The method of item 54, including: while the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface is displayed in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting an eleventh input that meets the tenth criteria; and in response to detecting the eleventh input that meets the tenth criteria, terminating the first reconfiguration mode, and redisplaying the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface.
56. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications; while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, detecting a first input that meets first criteria; in response to detecting the first input that meets the first criteria: displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, wherein locations of application icons in the first subset of application icons are adjustable in response to user inputs detected during the first reconfiguration mode; and while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a second input that meets second criteria; and in response to detecting the second input, activating the second reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, including: 465
DK 2020 70636 A1 concurrently displaying, in a first user interface, representations of a plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces, including a first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface.
57. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to: display a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications; while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, detect a first input that meets first criteria; in response to detecting the first input that meets the first criteria: display the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, wherein locations of application icons in the first subset of application icons are adjustable in response to user inputs detected during the first reconfiguration mode; and while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detect a second input that meets second criteria; and in response to detecting the second input, activate the second reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, including: concurrently display, in a first user interface, representations of a plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces, including a first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface.
58. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; 466
DK 2020 70636 A1 means for displaying a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications; means, enabled while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, for detecting a first input that meets first criteria ; means, enabled in response to detecting the first input that meets the first criteria: means for displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user — interface in a first reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, wherein locations of application icons in the first subset of application icons are adjustable in response to user inputs detected during the first reconfiguration mode; and means for while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a second input that meets second criteria; and means, enabled in response to detecting the second input, activating the second reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, including: means for concurrently displaying, in a first user interface, representations of a plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces, including a first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface.
59. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means for displaying a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, wherein the first page of the multipage home screen user interface includes a first subset of application icons of a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications; means, enabled while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, for detecting a first input that meets first criteria ; 467
DK 2020 70636 A1 means, enabled in response to detecting the first input that meets the first criteria: means for displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, wherein locations of application icons in the first subset of application icons are adjustable in response to user inputs detected during the first reconfiguration mode; and means for while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a second input that meets second criteria; and means, enabled in response to detecting the second input, activating the second reconfiguration mode associated with the multipage home screen user interface, including: means for concurrently displaying, in a first user interface, representations of a plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interfaces, including a first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface.
60. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 34-55.
61. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 34-55.
62. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, an input element, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, 468
DK 2020 70636 A1 the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 34-55.
63. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; and means for performing any of the methods of items 34-55.
64. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means for performing any of the methods of items 34-55.
469
DK 2020 70636 A1
65. A method, comprising: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component: displaying a first user interface, including displaying a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface; while displaying the first user interface including the plurality of application icons in accordance with the first layout, detecting a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first — user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a first location corresponding to a first set of application icons on the first user interface: moving the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location; and displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location.
66. The method of item 65, including: in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a second location corresponding to a second set of application icons on the first user interface, the second location being different from the first location and the second set of application icons being different from the first set of application icons: moving the second set of application icons from the second location to the respective location where the second set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the second location; and displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the second location. 470
DK 2020 70636 A1
67. The method of any of items 65-66, wherein the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface includes an input that drags the first user interface object across the first user interface, and the first user interface object is inserted into the first user interface upon termination of the first input.
68. The method of item 67, including: after the termination of the first input is detected, while the first user interface object that includes application content is displayed at the first location after the first set of application icons have been moved from the first location to the respective location, detecting a second input that drags the first user interface object from the first location to the second location and drops the first user interface object at the second location; and in response to detecting the second input that drags the first user interface object from the first location to the second location and drops the first user interface object at the second location: shifting a third set of application icons, including the second set of application icons, on the first user interface such that the first location is occupied by one or more of the third set of application icons, the second set of application icons remain displayed on the first user interface, and the second location is vacated by the second set of application icons; and displaying the first user interface object at the second location.
69. The method of any of items 65-68, wherein the first set of application icons are moved into a folder, and the method includes: in response to detecting the first input and prior to detecting a termination of the first input: displaying a first animated sequence illustrating movement of the first set of application icons into the folder when the first user interface object containing application content is dragged over the first location; and displaying a second animated sequence illustrating movement of the second set of application icons into the folder when the first user interface object containing application content is dragged over the second location.
70. The method of any of items 65-69, wherein the respective location is newly created in response to the first input.
471
DK 2020 70636 A1
71. The method of any of items 65-69, wherein the respective location is an existing location.
72. The method of any of items 65-71, wherein the first set of application icons are moved into a folder, and the method includes: while displaying the first user interface including the folder that includes the first set of application icons after detecting the termination of the first input, detecting a third input that is directed to the folder; and in response to detecting the third input that is directed to the folder: displaying at least a portion of content of the folder; and displaying a prompt including one or more selectable options for performing respective operations with respect to the content of the folder.
73. The method of item 72, wherein the one or more selectable options include a first option to delete the first set of application icons.
74. The method of any of items 72-73, wherein the one or more selectable options include asecond option to create a new page that includes the first set of application icons, and wherein the new page is to be included with the first user interface as separate pages in a multipage home screen user interface.
75. The method of any of items 72 74, wherein the one or more selectable options include a third option to rename the folder.
76. The method of any of items 65-75, including: while displaying the first user interface including the first user interface object, detecting a fourth input corresponding to a request to insert a second user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the fourth input corresponding to the request to insert the second user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the input is directed to a fourth location corresponding to a fourth set of application icons on the first user interface: moving the fourth set of application icons from the fourth location to the respective location where the fourth set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location; and 472
DK 2020 70636 A1 displaying the second user interface object that includes application content at the fourth location.
77. The method of any of items 65-76, including: prior to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: displaying the first user interface in a first reconfiguration mode, wherein positions of application icons in the first user interface are adjustable in response to user inputs during the first reconfiguration mode, and wherein the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode includes an affordance that, when activated, causes display of an object-editing user interface that includes a plurality of user interface objects respectively containing application content corresponding to different applications installed on the computer system.
78. The method of item 77, wherein the object-editing user interface includes a set of one or more preconfigured user interface objects containing application content corresponding to — different applications of at least a subset of all applications installed on the computer system.
79. The method of any of item 77-78, wherein the object-editing user interface includes respective representations of a plurality of applications installed on the computer system, and activation of the representation of a respective application in the object-editing user interface in accordance with preset activation criteria causes display of a plurality of configuration — options associated with a respective user interface object that includes application content of the respective application.
80. The method of item 79, wherein the plurality of configuration options include a set of one or more object sizes for the respective user interface object that includes application content of the respective application.
81. The method of any of items 79-80, including: displaying a preview of a currently selected user interface object containing application content of the respective application in accordance with user-selected values for the plurality of configuration options. 473
DK 2020 70636 A1
82. The method of any of items 77-81, wherein the object-editing user interface includes a plurality of recommended user interface objects respectively containing application content corresponding to different applications of at least a subset of applications installed on the computer system.
83. The method of any of items 77-82, including: while the object-editing user interface is displayed, detecting a fifth input selecting the first user interface object containing application content for inserting into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the fifth input selecting the user interface object containing — application content for inserting into the first user interface: ceasing to display the object- editing user interface; and concurrently displaying the first user interface object and the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode.
84. The method of any of items 65-83, wherein: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object including application content corresponds to a first application and has a first size, the first set of application icons include a first number of application icons; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object including application content corresponds to a second application and has a second size different from the first size, the first set of application icons include a second number of application icons that is different from the first number of application icons, wherein the first number of application icons and the second number of application icons are respectively based on the first size and the second size of the first user interface object containing application content.
85. The method of any of items 77-85, including: while displaying the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode after the first user interface object containing application content has been inserted at the first location following the termination of the first input, detecting a sixth input directed to the first user interface object containing application content: in accordance with a determination that the sixth input meets preset criteria, displaying a first object-specific object-editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content, wherein the first object-specific object-editing 474 user interface displays a plurality of options for configuring the first user interface object containing application content.
86. The method of item 85, wherein displaying the first object-specific object-editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content includes rotating the first user interface object containing application content to reveal a reverse side of the first user interface object containing application content, and displaying the plurality of options for configuring the first user interface object containing application content on the reverse side of the first user interface object containing application content.
87. The method of item 86, wherein displaying the first object-specific object-editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content includes visually deemphasizing regions of the first user interface outside of the first object- specific object-editing user interface.
88. The method of any of items 65-87, wherein the first user interface includes multiple user interface objects containing application content that correspond to a first application, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object, where the second user interface object includes different information than the first user interface object.
89. The method of any of items 65-88, wherein the first user interface includes multiple user interface objects containing application content, the multiple user interface objects respectively containing application content from different applications.
90. The method of any of items 65-89, wherein the first user interface object contains first application content from the application corresponding to the first user interface object at a first time, and the first user interface object contains second application content from the application corresponding to the first user interface object that is different from the first application content at a second time different from the first time.
91. The method of any of items 65-90, wherein the first user interface object containing application content includes a visual indication of the application from which application content contained in the first user interface object is obtained.
92. The method of any of items 65-91, wherein the first user interface is a respective page of a multipage home screen user interface, and the method includes: 475
DK 2020 70636 A1 while displaying the first user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more page navigation inputs that causes navigation from the first user interface to a second user interface; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more page navigation inputs, displaying the second user interface, including displaying a plurality of user interface objects containing application content, each of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content displays application content from a respective application.
93. The method of any of items 65-92, including: after displaying the first user interface object containing application content at the first — location in response to detecting termination of the first input: while the first user interface remains in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a seventh input removing the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface; and in response to detecting the seventh input removing the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface, restoring the first set of application icons from the respective location onto the first user interface.
94. The method of item 93, wherein the first set of application icons are redisplayed at the first location following removal of the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface.
95. The method of item 94, wherein the respective location is folder that was created to store the first set of application icons when the first set of application icons were removed from the first location, and the new folder is deleted following removal of the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface and restoration of the first set of application icons back to the first location.
96. The method of item 94, wherein the respective location is a new page of a multipage home screen user interface that was created to store the first set of application icons when the first set of application icons were removed from the first location, and the new page is deleted following removal of the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface and restoration of the first set of application icons back to the first location.
476
DK 2020 70636 A1
97. The method of any of items 65-95, wherein: the first set of application icons or the second set of application icons are moved to the respective location in accordance with a determination that there is insufficient space on the first user interface to accommodate insertion of the first user interface object containing application content; and the method further includes: before termination of the first input, displaying a second user interface different from the first user interface, including displaying a second plurality of application icons in accordance with a second layout in the second user interface, wherein there is — sufficient space on the second user interface object to accommodate the second plurality of application icons and the first user interface object containing application content; while displaying the second user interface including the second plurality of application icons in accordance with the second layout: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a fifth location corresponding to a fifth set of application icons on the second user interface, shifting one or more of the second plurality of application icons, including the fifth set of application icons, on the second user interface, to create space for inserting the first user interface object containing application content at the fifth location on the second user interface.
98. The method of any of items 65-97, wherein the respective location is a folder that is located at a predefined location on the first user interface.
99. The method of any of items 65-98, including: while displaying the first user interface including the first user interface object containing application content at the first location and a third user interface object that includes application content at a sixth location different from the first location, detecting a seventh input that corresponds to a request to drag the third user interface object containing application content from the sixth location to the first location and in response to detecting the seventh input corresponding to the request to move the third user interface object that includes application content to the first location: in accordance with a determination that a size of the third user interface object containing application content is greater than a size of the first user interface object 477
DK 2020 70636 A1 containing application content, moving the first user interface object away from the first location to create space for the third user interface object containing application content at the first location; and in accordance with a determination that the size of the third user interface containing application content is equal to the size of the first user interface object containing application content, forgoing moving the first user interface object away from the first location; and displaying the third user interface object containing application content at the first location, wherein the first user interface object and the third user interface object are alternatively displayed at the first location at different times.
100. The method of any of items 65-98, including: while displaying the first user interface including the first user interface object containing application content at the first location, detecting an eighth input that corresponds to a request to drag and drop a fourth user interface object containing application content to the first location; and in response to detecting the eighth input corresponding to the request to drag and drop the fourth user interface object containing application content to the first location: displaying the fourth user interface object at the first location; and switching to displaying the first user interface object at the first location at a later time.
101. The method of any of items 65-100, including: while displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location on the first user interface, detecting a user input that corresponds to a request to display, on the first user interface, a plurality of selectable options corresponding to the first user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input that corresponds to the request to display on the first user interface the plurality of selectable options corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content, displaying the plurality of selectable options corresponding to the first user interface object on the first user interface, wherein the plurality of selectable options include one or more selectable controls for changing a size of the first — user interface object containing application content from a first size to a second size of one or more available sizes that are different from the first size. 478
DK 2020 70636 A1
102. The method of item 101, including: while displaying the plurality of selectable options corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content, detecting a user input that selects the second size of the one or more available sizes that are different from the first size using the set of selectable controls; and in response to detecting the user input that selects the second size using the set of selectable controls: changing the size of the first user interface object containing application content from the first size to the second size.
103. The method of item 102, including: in response to detecting the user input that selects the second size using the set of selectable controls: moving one or more application icons on the first user interface relative to the first location.
104. The method of items any of items 102-103, wherein the second size of the first user interface object containing application content is greater than the first size of the first user interface object containing application content, and wherein the method includes: in response to detecting the user input that selects the second size using the set of selectable controls: in accordance with a determination that a size of vacant placement locations on the first user interface does not correspond to a difference between the second size and the first size, moving a set of one or more application icons existing on the first user interface to a predetermined location.
105. The method of any of items 65-104, including: in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in conjunction with displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location, displaying a visual feedback that includes an animated visual effect that propagates from the first location in different directions across the first user interface.
479
DK 2020 70636 A1
106. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying a first user interface, including displaying a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface; while displaying the first user interface including the plurality of application icons in accordance with the first layout, detecting a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a first location corresponding to a first set of application icons on the first user interface: moving the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location; and displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location.
107. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to: display a first user interface, including displaying a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface; while displaying the first user interface including the plurality of application icons in accordance with the first layout, detect a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first — user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: 480
DK 2020 70636 A1 in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a first location corresponding to a first set of application icons on the first user interface: move the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location; and display the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location.
108. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; means for displaying a first user interface, including displaying a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface; means enabled, while displaying the first user interface including the plurality of application icons in accordance with the first layout, for detecting a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and means enabled in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: means enabled in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a first location corresponding to a first set of application icons on the first user interface: means for moving the first set of application icons from the first — location to a respective location where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location; and means for displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location. 481
DK 2020 70636 A1
109. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means for displaying a first user interface, including displaying a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface; means enabled, while displaying the first user interface including the plurality of application icons in accordance with the first layout, for detecting a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and means enabled in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to — insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: means enabled in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a first location corresponding to a first set of application icons on the first user interface: means for moving the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location; and means for displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location.
110. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 65-105.
111. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic 482
DK 2020 70636 A1 device with a display and an input element, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 65-105.
112. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, an input element, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 65-105.
113. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; and means for performing any of the methods of items 65-105.
114. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means for performing any of the methods of items 65-105.
483
DK 2020 70636 A1
115. A method, comprising: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component:: at a first time, displaying a first user interface, wherein: the first user interface includes a placement location that is configured — to spatially accommodate a respective user interface object of a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications that are associated with the placement location; the plurality of user interface objects includes a first user interface object corresponding to a first application, and a second user interface object corresponding to a second application different from the first application; and at the first time the first user interface object is displayed at the placement location; at a second time, after the first time, displaying the first user interface with the second user interface object displayed at the placement location, wherein the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on a current context of the device at the second time; and while the second user interface object is displayed at the placement location, detecting a gesture directed to the placement location; and in response to detecting the gesture directed to the placement location, in — accordance with a determination that the gesture is a first type of gesture, replacing display of the second user interface object with a different user interface object from the plurality of user interface objects that are associated with the placement location.
116. The method of item 115, wherein the different user interface object is the first user interface object.
117. The method of item 115, wherein the different user interface object is a user interface object that is different from the first user interface object and the second user interface object.
118. The method of item 115, wherein the second user interface object is displayed at the placement location on the first user interface in response to detecting a context change at the computer system, while the first user interface is displayed with the first user interface object at the placement location. 484
DK 2020 70636 A1
119. The method of item 115, the second user interface object is displayed at the placement location on the first user interface in response to detecting a request to redisplay the first user interface after the computer system has ceased to display the first user interface with the first user interface object at the placement location.
120. The method of any of items 115-119, wherein the placement location is further associated with a third user interface object that displays application icons for a set of contextually selected applications, wherein activation of a respective application icon for a respective application of the set of contextually selected applications causes display of the respective application corresponding to the activated application icon, and wherein, at a third — time different from the first time and the second time, the third user interface object is displayed at the placement location in the first user interface, and the third user interface object is automatically selected for display at the placement location based on a current context of the computer system proximate to the third time, and the set of contextually selected applications are selected based on the current context of the computer system proximate to the third time.
121. The method of any of items 115-120, including: at a fourth time, concurrently displaying respective user interface objects for a first number of applications at the placement location based on a first value for a preset metric of the current context; and at a fifth time, concurrently displaying respective user interface objects for a second number of applications at the placement location based on a second value for the preset metric of the current context, the first value being different from the second value, and the first number being different from the second number.
122. The method of item 121, wherein respective sizes of the respective user interface — objects displayed at the placement location are adjusted based on a total number of the respective user interface objects concurrently displayed at the placement location.
123. The method of any of items 115-122, wherein the plurality of user interface objects corresponding to the different applications that are associated with the placement location are selected in accordance with previously received user configuration inputs.
124. The method of any of items 115-123, wherein the placement location is further associated with a placeholder user interface object that is automatically substituted by a 485
DK 2020 70636 A1 system-selected user interface object containing application content from a system-selected application, wherein the system-selected user interface object containing application content is dynamically selected from a group of available user interface objects outside of the plurality of user interface objects that are associated with the placement location.
125. The method of item 124, wherein the computer system dynamically selects the system-selected user interface object containing application content to replace the placeholder user interface object in the placement location based on the current context.
126. The method of any of items 115-125, wherein the plurality of user interface objects corresponding to the different applications that are associated with the placement location are arranged in a stack, and the method includes: detecting a sequence of one or more first inputs that is directed to the placement location and includes one or more first movement inputs in a first direction; and in response to detecting a respective one of the sequence of one or more first inputs, switching to displaying a next user interface object in the stack at the placement location.
127. The method of any of items 115-126, including: while displaying, at the placement location, a respective user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects corresponding to the different applications that are associated with the placement location, detecting a tap input directed to the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location; and in response to detecting the tap input directed to the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location, ceasing to display the first user interface and displaying a user interface of the application correspond to the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location.
128. The method of item 127, wherein: the first user interface is a first page of a multipage home screen user interface, and the multipage home screen user interface further includes a second page adjacent to the first page, and the method includes: while displaying, at the placement location, a respective user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects corresponding to the different applications that are 486
DK 2020 70636 A1 associated with the placement location, detecting a swipe input directed to the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location; and in response to detecting the swipe input directed to the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location, in accordance with a determination that the swipe input is in a second direction, ceasing to display the first user interface and displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface without displaying the user interface of the application corresponding to the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location.
129. The method of any of items 115-128, wherein the plurality user interface objects corresponding to different applications that are associated with the placement location are arranged in a stack in accordance with an estimated priority based on the current context.
130. The method of any of items 115-129, including: displaying an indication at a location proximate to the placement location in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object displayed at the placement location has been automatically changed in accordance with a changed context.
131. The method of any of items 115-130, wherein the first user interface includes multiple placement locations, each placement location of the multiple placement locations is associated a respective set of user interface objects each containing application content from different applications, and wherein the user interface object currently displayed at a first placement location of the multiple placement locations is updated independently from the user interface object currently displayed at a second placement location of the multiple placement locations.
132. The method of any of items 115-131, wherein the computer system automatically selects, from the plurality of user interface objects associated with the placement location, a respective user interface object for display at the placement location in accordance with closing of an application on the computer system prior to displaying the first user interface.
133. The method of any of items 115-132, wherein the computer system automatically selects, from the plurality of user interface objects associated with the placement location, a respective user interface object for display at the placement location in response to navigating from a screen lock user interface to the first user interface.
487
DK 2020 70636 A1
134. The method of any of items 115-133, wherein the first user interface includes multiple placement locations, each placement location of the multiple placement locations is associated a respective set of user interface objects each containing application content from different applications, and wherein computer system takes into account of which user interface object is currently displayed at a first placement location of the multiple placement locations when updating a user interface object currently displayed at a second placement location of the multiple placement locations or switching to a different user interface object for display at the second placement location.
135. The method of any of items 115-134, including: while displaying a respective user interface object of the plurality of user interface object at the placement location on the first user interface, detecting an input that corresponds to a request to display a plurality of selectable options associated with the placement location; and in response to detecting the input that corresponds to the request to display the plurality of selectable options associated with the placement location, displaying the plurality of selectable options associated with the placement location, including a first selectable option that, when activated, enables automatic switching display of user interface objects through the plurality of user interface objects at the placement location.
136. The method of item 135, wherein displaying the plurality of selectable options includes displaying a second selectable option that, when activated, enables a placeholder user interface object at the placement location, wherein the placeholder user interface object is automatically substituted by a system-selected user interface object containing application content from a system-selected application when the placeholder user interface object is selected for display at the placement location, wherein the system-selected user interface — object containing application content is dynamically selected from a group of available user interface objects outside of the plurality of user interface objects that are associated with the placement location.
137. The method of any of items 115-136, including: while displaying a respective user interface object of the plurality of user interface object at the placement location on the first user interface, detecting an input that is directed to the placement location and that meets preset criteria; and 488
DK 2020 70636 A1 in response to detecting the input that is directed to the placement location and that meets the preset criteria, displaying a first set of one or more selectable options associated with the placement location and a second set of one or more selectable options associated with the respective user interface object.
138. The method of any of items 115-137, wherein displaying the first user interface with the second user interface object displayed at the placement location includes: concurrently displaying, within the second user interface object, first application content from the second application and second application content from the second application; and in accordance with a determination that the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on correspondence between the first application content and the current context of the computer system at the second time, visually emphasizing the first application content relative to the second application content in the second user interface object.
139. The method of item 138, wherein visually emphasizing the first application content relative to the second application content includes applying .visual marking to the first application content in the second user interface object without applying the visual marking to the second application content in the second user interface object.
140. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: at a first time, displaying a first user interface, wherein: the first user interface includes a placement location that is configured to spatially accommodate a respective user interface object of a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications that are associated with the placement location; 489
DK 2020 70636 A1 the plurality of user interface objects includes a first user interface object corresponding to a first application, and a second user interface object corresponding to a second application different from the first application; and at the first time the first user interface object is displayed at the placement location; at a second time, after the first time, displaying the first user interface with the second user interface object displayed at the placement location, wherein the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on a current context of the device at the second time; and while the second user interface object is displayed at the placement location, detecting a gesture directed to the placement location; and in response to detecting the gesture directed to the placement location, in accordance with a determination that the gesture is a first type of gesture, replacing display of the second user interface object with a different user interface object from the plurality of user interface objects that are associated with the placement location.
141. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to: at a first time, display a first user interface, wherein: the first user interface includes a placement location that is configured to spatially accommodate a respective user interface object of a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications that are associated with the placement location; the plurality of user interface objects includes a first user interface — object corresponding to a first application, and a second user interface object corresponding to a second application different from the first application; and at the first time the first user interface object is displayed at the placement location; at a second time, after the first time, display the first user interface with the — second user interface object displayed at the placement location, wherein the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on a current context of the device at the second time; and 490
DK 2020 70636 A1 while the second user interface object is displayed at the placement location, detect a gesture directed to the placement location; and in response to detecting the gesture directed to the placement location, in accordance with a determination that the gesture is a first type of gesture, replace display of the second user interface object with a different user interface object from the plurality of user interface objects that are associated with the placement location.
142. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; means enabled at a first time, for displaying a first user interface, wherein: the first user interface includes a placement location that is configured to spatially accommodate a respective user interface object of a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications that are associated with the placement location; the plurality of user interface objects includes a first user interface object corresponding to a first application, and a second user interface object corresponding to a second application different from the first application; and at the first time the first user interface object is displayed at the placement location; means enabled, at a second time, after the first time, for displaying the first user interface with the second user interface object displayed at the placement location, wherein the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on a current context of the device at the second time; and means enabled, while the second user interface object is displayed at the placement location, for detecting a gesture directed to the placement location; and means enabled, in response to detecting the gesture directed to the placement location, in accordance with a determination that the gesture is a first type of gesture, for replacing display of the second user interface object with a different user interface object from the plurality of user interface objects that are associated with the placement location.
143. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: 491
DK 2020 70636 A1 means enabled at a first time, for displaying a first user interface, wherein: the first user interface includes a placement location that is configured to spatially accommodate a respective user interface object of a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications that are associated with the placement location; the plurality of user interface objects includes a first user interface object corresponding to a first application, and a second user interface object corresponding to a second application different from the first application; and at the first time the first user interface object is displayed at the placement — location; means enabled, at a second time, after the first time, for displaying the first user interface with the second user interface object displayed at the placement location, wherein the second user interface object was automatically selected for display at the placement location based on a current context of the device at the second time; and means enabled, while the second user interface object is displayed at the placement location, for detecting a gesture directed to the placement location; and means enabled, in response to detecting the gesture directed to the placement location, in accordance with a determination that the gesture is a first type of gesture, for replacing display of the second user interface object with a different user interface object from the plurality of user interface objects that are associated with the placement location.
144. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 115-139.
145. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic — device with a display and an input element, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 115-139. 492
DK 2020 70636 A1
146. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, an input element, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 115-139.
147. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; and means for performing any of the methods of items 115-139.
148. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display — and an input element, comprising: means for performing any of the methods of items 115-139. 493
DK 2020 70636 A1
149. A method, including: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component: displaying a first user interface that includes a first placement location that is associated with a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications, wherein the plurality of user interface objects include: a first user interface object that includes information from a first application; a second user interface object that includes information from a second application that is different from the first application; and a third user interface object that includes information from a third application that is different from the first application and the second application; after displaying the first user interface object corresponding to the first application at the first placement location in the first user interface, detecting occurrence of a respective condition; in response to detecting the occurrence of the respective condition, displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface; after displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface, displaying a configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, wherein: displaying the configuration user interface includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of a first representation of the first user interface object and at least a portion of a second representation the second user interface object; while displaying the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, detecting a first user input that is directed to a respective portion of the configuration user interface; and in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets selection criteria when directed to the first representation of the first user interface object of — the plurality of user interface objects shown in configuration user interface and that the first user input includes movement that meets first movement criteria, ceasing display of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying the first user interface object at a second placement location in a second user interface in 494
DK 2020 70636 A1 accordance with the movement of the first user input, wherein the second user interface is different from the configuration user interface, and the second placement location is different from the first placement location.
150. The method of item 149, including: after detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying the first user interface object at the second placement location in the second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input, redisplaying the configuration user interface, including displaying at least a portion of the second representation of the second — user interface object without concurrently displaying at least a portion of the first representation of the first user interface object.
151. The method of item 149, including: in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets the selection criteria when directed to the second representation of the second user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects shown in configuration user interface and that the first user input includes movement that meets the first movement criteria, the method includes ceasing to display the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying the second user interface object at the second placement location on the second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input.
152. The method of item 151, including: after detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying the second user interface object at the second placement location on the second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input, redisplaying the configuration user interface, including displaying at least a portion of the first representation of the first user interface object without concurrently displaying at least a portion of the second representation of the second user interface object.
153. The method of any of items 149-152, including: 495
DK 2020 70636 A1 after detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying a respective user interface object of the first user interface object and the second user interface object at the second placement location on the second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input, redisplaying the first user interface that includes the first placement location; detecting the occurrence of a condition corresponding switching which user interface object is to be displayed in the first placement location; and in response to detecting the condition, switching from displaying a current user — interface object in the first placement location to displaying an updated user interface object in the first placement location, wherein the updated user interface object is selected from a subset of the plurality of user interface objects that does not include the respective user interface object of the first user interface object and the second user interface object that was displayed at the second placement location on the second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input, a user interface object for display at the first placement location on the first user interface.
154. The method of any of items 151-153, including: after displaying the first user interface object corresponding to the first application at the first placement location in the first user interface, detecting occurrence of a second respective condition; in response to detecting the occurrence of the second respective condition, displaying the third user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface, wherein: the configuration user interface is displayed after displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location and displaying the third user interface object in the first user interface, and displaying the configuration user interface includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of a third representation of the first user interface object; and in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets the selection criteria when directed to the third representation of the third user interface object of the 496
DK 2020 70636 A1 plurality of user interface objects shown in configuration user interface and that the first user input includes movement that meets the first movement criteria, ceasing display of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying the third user interface object at the second placement location on the second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input.
155. The method of any of items 149-154, wherein displaying the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location includes: before detecting a scrolling input directed to the configuration user interface, concurrently displaying at least portions of respective representations of a first subset of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location; and after detecting the scrolling input directed to the configuration user interface, concurrently displaying at least portions of respective representations of a second subset of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location, the second subset being different from the first subset.
156. The method of any of items 149-155, including: in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets first criteria when directed to the first representation of the first user interface object, displaying a first plurality of selectable options corresponding to configuration options associated with the first user interface object; and in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets the first criteria when directed to the second representation of the second user interface object, displaying a second plurality of selectable options corresponding to configuration options associated with the second user interface object.
157. The method of any of items 149-156, wherein the first representation of the first user interface object in the configuration user interface is a reduced scale representation of the first user interface object, and the second representation of the second user interface object in the configuration user interface is a reduced scale representation of the second user interface object. 497
DK 2020 70636 A1
158. The method of any of items 149-157, wherein displaying the first representation of the first user interface object in the configuration user interface includes: at a first time, displaying first information from the first application in the first representation of the first user interface object while the first representation of the first user interface is displayed in the configuration user interface; and at a second time later than the first time, displaying second information from the first application in the first representation of the first user interface object while the first representation of the first user interface is displayed in the configuration user interface, wherein the second information is different from the first information.
159. The method of any of items 149-158, including: in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets the selection criteria when directed to the first representation of the first user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects shown in the configuration user interface and that the first user input includes movement that meets second movement criteria different from the first movement criteria: changing, in the configuration user interface, a sequential order of the first representation of the first user interface object among respective representations of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location in accordance with the movement of the first user input.
160. The method of any of items 149-159, including: while displaying the first user interface, including displaying a respective one of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location at the placement location, detecting a second user input that is directed to the first placement location; in response to detecting the second user input that is directed to the first placement location: in accordance with a determination that the second user input meets second criteria, replacing display of the respective one of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location with display of another user interface object of 498
DK 2020 70636 A1 the plurality of user interface object different from the respective one of the plurality of user interface objects.
161. The method of item 160, including: in response to detecting the second user input that is directed to the first placement location: in accordance with a determination that the second user input meets the second criteria, concurrently displaying the respective one of the plurality of user interface objects and indication of said another user interface object at the first placement location before replacing display of the respective one of the plurality of user interface object with display of — said another user interface object at the first placement location.
162. The method of any of items 149-161, wherein displaying the second user interface object in response to detecting the occurrence of the respective condition includes: displaying, within the second user interface object, first application content from the second application and second application content from the second application, wherein the first application content is displayed with a visual indication that the first application content contributed to selection of the second user interface object for display at the first placement location in response to the occurrence of the respective condition.
163. The method of item 162, wherein the visual indication highlights the first application content relative to the second application content in the second user interface object.
164. The method of any of items 149-163, including: in accordance with satisfaction of a first predetermined condition, displaying an indicator object that indicates an ordinal position of a currently displayed user interface object at the first placement location among the plurality of user interface objects associated with the first placement location; and in accordance with a determination that a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since display of the indicator object, ceasing to display the indicator object while maintaining display of the currently displayed user interface object at the first placement location.
165. The method of item 164, wherein the first predetermined condition is satisfied in accordance with a determination that the first user interface is displayed in a first — configuration mode. 499
DK 2020 70636 A1
166. The method of any of items 164-165, wherein the first predetermined condition is satisfied in accordance with a determination that a currently displayed user interface object at the first placement location is automatically updated by the computer system.
167. The method of any of items 164-166, wherein the first predetermined condition is satisfied in accordance with a determination that the first user interface is displayed in response to navigation from another user interface different from the first user interface.
168. The method of any of items 149-167, wherein the indicator object serves as a widget navigation element and the method includes: while displaying the indicator object, detecting a swipe input from a first position to a second position along the indicator object; and in response to detecting the swipe input, navigating, within the first placement location, from a currently displayed user interface object to another user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects in accordance with the swipe input.
169. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying a first user interface that includes a first placement location that is associated with a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications, wherein the plurality of user interface objects include: a first user interface object that includes information from a first application; a second user interface object that includes information from a second application that is different from the first application; and a third user interface object that includes information from a third application that is different from the first application and the second application; 500
DK 2020 70636 A1 after displaying the first user interface object corresponding to the first application at the first placement location in the first user interface, detecting occurrence of a respective condition; in response to detecting the occurrence of the respective condition, displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface; after displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface, displaying a configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, wherein: displaying the configuration user interface includes concurrently — displaying at least a portion of a first representation of the first user interface object and at least a portion of a second representation the second user interface object; while displaying the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, detecting a first user input that is directed to a respective portion of the configuration user interface; and in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets selection criteria when directed to the first representation of the first user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects shown in configuration user interface and that the first user input includes movement that meets first movement criteria, ceasing display of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying the first user interface object at a second placement location in a second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input, wherein the second user interface is different from the configuration user interface, and the second placement location is different from the first placement location.
170. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to: display a first user interface that includes a first placement location that is associated with a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications, wherein the plurality of user interface objects include: 501
DK 2020 70636 A1 a first user interface object that includes information from a first application; a second user interface object that includes information from a second application that is different from the first application; and a third user interface object that includes information from a third application that is different from the first application and the second application; after displaying the first user interface object corresponding to the first application at the first placement location in the first user interface, detect occurrence of a respective condition; in response to detecting the occurrence of the respective condition, display the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface; after displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface, display a configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, wherein: display the configuration user interface includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of a first representation of the first user interface object and at least a portion of a second representation the second user interface object; while displaying the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, detect a first user input that is directed to a respective portion of the — configuration user interface; and in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets selection criteria when directed to the first representation of the first user interface object of — the plurality of user interface objects shown in configuration user interface and that the first user input includes movement that meets first movement criteria, cease display of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and display the first user interface object at a second placement location in a second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input, wherein the second user interface is different from the configuration user interface, and the second placement location is different from the first placement location.
171. — An electronic device, comprising: 502
DK 2020 70636 A1 a display; an input element; means enabled for displaying a first user interface that includes a first placement location that is associated with a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications, wherein the plurality of user interface objects include: a first user interface object that includes information from a first application; a second user interface object that includes information from a second application that is different from the first application; and a third user interface object that includes information from a third application that is different from the first application and the second application; means enabled after displaying the first user interface object corresponding to the first application at the first placement location in the first user interface, for detecting occurrence of a respective condition;
means enabled in response to detecting the occurrence of the respective condition, for displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface;
means enabled after displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface, for displaying a configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, wherein:
displaying the configuration user interface includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of a first representation of the first user interface object and at least a portion of a second representation the second user interface object; means enabled, while displaying the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, for detecting a first user input that is directed to a respective portion of the configuration user interface; and means enabled in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface: means enabled in accordance with a determination that the first user input
— meets selection criteria when directed to the first representation of the first user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects shown in configuration user interface and that the first user input includes movement that meets first movement criteria, for ceasing display of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and
503
DK 2020 70636 A1 displaying the first user interface object at a second placement location in a second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input, wherein the second user interface is different from the configuration user interface, and the second placement location is different from the first placement location.
172. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means enabled for displaying a first user interface that includes a first placement location that is associated with a plurality of user interface objects corresponding to different applications, wherein the plurality of user interface objects include: a first user interface object that includes information from a first application; a second user interface object that includes information from a second application that is different from the first application; and a third user interface object that includes information from a third — application that is different from the first application and the second application; means enabled after displaying the first user interface object corresponding to the first application at the first placement location in the first user interface, for detecting occurrence of a respective condition; means enabled in response to detecting the occurrence of the respective condition, for displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface; means enabled after displaying the second user interface object at the first placement location in the first user interface, for displaying a configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, wherein: displaying the configuration user interface includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of a first representation of the first user interface object and at least a portion of a second representation the second user interface object; means enabled, while displaying the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location, for detecting a first user input that is directed to a respective portion of the configuration user interface; and means enabled in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective portion of the configuration user interface: 504
DK 2020 70636 A1 means enabled in accordance with a determination that the first user input meets selection criteria when directed to the first representation of the first user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects shown in configuration user interface and that the first user input includes movement that meets first movement criteria, for ceasing display of the configuration user interface corresponding to the first placement location and displaying the first user interface object at a second placement location in a second user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user input, wherein the second user interface is different from the configuration user interface, and the second placement location is different from the first placement location.
173. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 149-168.
174. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to perform any of the methods of — items 149-168.
175. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, an input element, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 149-168.
176. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; and means for performing any of the methods of items 149-168.
177. — An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: 505
DK 2020 70636 A1 means for performing any of the methods of items 149-168. 506
DK 2020 70636 A1
178. A method, including: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component: displaying a first page of a multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a first plurality of application icons in the first page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode; while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a first input that corresponds to a request to enter a second reconfiguration mode from the first reconfiguration mode, wherein the availability of one or more pages in the multipage home screen user interface can be changed in accordance with user inputs in the second reconfiguration mode; in response to detecting the first input, replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of — respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, including at least a first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface; while displaying the respective representations of the at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, including the first representation of the first page and the second representation of the second page, detecting a second input; and in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input is directed to the second representation of the second page that is displayed in the second reconfiguration mode, and that the second input meets first criteria, displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a second plurality of application icons in the second page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance — with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode.
179. The method of item 178, wherein the respective representations of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface are displayed in accordance with a first 507
DK 2020 70636 A1 sequential order that corresponds to a sequential order of the plurality of pages in the multipage home screen user interface displayed outside of the second reconfiguration mode, and the method includes: in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input is directed to the second representation of the second page that is displayed in the second reconfiguration mode, and that the second input meets second criteria different from the first criteria, adjusting a respective position of the second representation of the second page among the respective representations of the plurality of pages in accordance with the second input, wherein the sequential order of the plurality of pages in the multipage home — screen user interface displayed outside of the second reconfiguration mode is adjusted in accordance with the adjustment of the respective position of the second representation of the second page made in response to the second input.
180. The method of any of items 178-179, including: in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the — second input meets third criteria that are different from the first criteria, redisplaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode.
181. The method of item 180, including: while redisplaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a third input that meets the third criteria; and in response to detecting the third input that meets the third criteria, replacing display of the first page in the first reconfiguration mode with display of the first page in a normal mode, wherein a respective application icon of the plurality of application icons in the first page displayed in the normal mode, when activated by an input that meets the first criteria, causes display of a respective application corresponding to the respective application icon.
182. The method of any of items 178-181, wherein replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of the respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode includes: displaying an animated transition showing the first page of the multipage home screen — user interface shrinking down and moving toward a location occupied by the first representation of the first page in the second reconfiguration mode, and representations of 508
DK 2020 70636 A1 one or more pages adjacent to the first page in the multipage home screen user interface coming into view adjacent to the first representation of the first page.
183. The method of any of items 178-182, wherein replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of the respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode includes: in accordance with a determination that the multipage home screen user interface includes a first number of pages, displaying the respective representations of the first number of pages with a first size in the second reconfiguration mode; and in accordance with a determination that the multipage home screen user interface includes a second number of pages that is different from the first number of pages, displaying the respective representations of the second number of pages with a second size that is different from the first size.
184. The method of any of items 178-183, wherein replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of the respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode includes: in accordance with a determination that the multipage home screen user interface includes a third number of pages, displaying the respective representations of the third number of pages in accordance with a first arrangement in the second reconfiguration mode; and in accordance with a determination that the multipage home screen user interface includes a fourth number of pages that is different from the third number of pages, displaying the respective representations of the fourth number of pages with a second arrangement that is different from the first arrangement.
185. The method of any of items 178-184, including: in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input corresponds to a request to hide the first page, visually distinguishing the first representation of the first page from the second representation of the second page that is — displayed in the second reconfiguration mode; 509
DK 2020 70636 A1 while displaying the first representation of the first page that is visually marked relative to the second representation of the second page in the second reconfiguration mode, detecting a respective input; and in response to detecting the respective input: in accordance with a determination that the respective input corresponds to the request to exit the second reconfiguration mode, displaying a respective page of the plurality of pages that is different from the first page of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface.
186. The method of item 185, including: in response to detecting the respective input: in accordance with a determination that the respective input corresponds to a request to cease hiding the first page, ceasing to visually distinguish the first representation of the first page from the second representation of the second page.
187. The method of any of item 185-186, including: in response to detecting the respective input: in accordance with a determination that the respective input is directed to the first representation of the first page that is visually distinguished from the second representation of the second page, and that the respective input meets the first criteria, forgoing displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode.
188. The method of any of items 178-187, including: in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input meets fifth criteria and that a total number of pages in the multipage home screen user interface exceeds a preset threshold number, scrolling the respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode to reveal respective representations of at least one additional page of the plurality of pages that was not initially displayed in the second reconfiguration mode.
189. An electronic device, comprising: a display; 510
DK 2020 70636 A1 an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying a first page of a multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a first plurality of application icons in the first page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode; while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a first input that corresponds to a request to enter a second reconfiguration mode from the first reconfiguration mode, wherein the availability of one or more pages in the multipage home screen user interface can be changed in accordance with user inputs in the second reconfiguration mode; in response to detecting the first input, replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, including at least a first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface; while displaying the respective representations of the at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, including the first representation of the first page and the second representation of the second page, detecting a second input; and in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input is directed to the second representation of the second page that is displayed in the second reconfiguration mode, and that the second input meets first criteria, displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a second plurality of application icons in the second page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode.
511
DK 2020 70636 A1
190. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to: display a first page of a multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a first plurality of application icons in the first page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode; while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detect a first input that corresponds to a request to enter a second reconfiguration mode from the first reconfiguration mode, wherein the availability of one or more pages in the multipage home screen user interface can be changed in accordance with user inputs in the second reconfiguration mode; in response to detecting the first input, replace display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of — respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, including at least a first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface; while displaying the respective representations of the at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, including the first representation of the first page and the second representation of the second page, detect a second input; and in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input is directed to the second representation of the second page that is displayed in the second reconfiguration mode, and that the second input meets first criteria, display the second page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a second plurality of application icons in the second page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance — with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode.
191. — An electronic device, comprising: a display; 512
DK 2020 70636 A1 an input element; means enabled for displaying a first page of a multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a first plurality of application icons in the first page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode; means enabled, while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, for detecting a first input that corresponds to a request to enter a second reconfiguration mode from the first reconfiguration mode, wherein the availability of one or more pages in the multipage home screen user interface can be changed in accordance with user inputs in the second reconfiguration mode; means enabled, in response to detecting the first input, for replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with display of respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, including at least a first — representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface; means enabled, while displaying the respective representations of the at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, for including the first representation of the first page and the second representation of the second page, detecting a second input; and means enabled, in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input is directed to the second representation of the second page that is displayed in the second reconfiguration mode, and that the second input meets — first criteria, for displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a second plurality of application icons in the second page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode.
192. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means enabled for displaying a first page of a multipage home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a first plurality of application 513
DK 2020 70636 A1 icons in the first page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode; means enabled, while displaying the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, for detecting a first input that corresponds to a request to enter a second reconfiguration mode from the first reconfiguration mode, wherein the availability of one or more pages in the multipage home screen user interface can be changed in accordance with user inputs in the second reconfiguration mode; means enabled, in response to detecting the first input, for replacing display of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode with — display of respective representations of at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, including at least a first representation of the first page of the multipage home screen user interface, and a second representation of a second page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the first page of the multipage home screen user interface; means enabled, while displaying the respective representations of the at least two of the plurality of pages of the multipage home screen user interface in the second reconfiguration mode, including the first representation of the first page and the second representation of the second page, for detecting a second input; and means enabled, in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input is directed to the second representation of the second page that is displayed in the second reconfiguration mode, and that the second input meets first criteria, for displaying the second page of the multipage home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, wherein respective positions of a second plurality of application icons in the second page of the multipage home screen user interface are adjustable in accordance with user inputs in the first reconfiguration mode.
193. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 178-188.
514
DK 2020 70636 A1
194. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 178-188.
195. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, an input element, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 178-188.
196. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; and means for performing any of the methods of items 178-188.
197. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means for performing any of the methods of items 178-188. 515
DK 2020 70636 A1
198. A method, including: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component: displaying a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons in a first predefined arrangement; detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to insert, into the respective page of the home screen user interface, a first user interface object containing a plurality of application icons for a plurality of applications that are automatically selected by the computer system; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, concurrently displaying on the respective page of the home screen user interface: two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement; and a second plurality of application icons, different from the first plurality of — application icons, wherein: the second plurality of application icons are automatically placed on the respective page of the home screen in locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface; and the second plurality of application icons are automatically selected by the computer system for inclusion on the respective page of the home screen user interface.
199. The method of item 198, wherein the respective page of the home screen user interface is displayed in a first reconfiguration mode when the second plurality of application icons are displayed on the respective page of the home screen user interface in response to the sequence of one or more inputs.
200. The method of any of items 198-199, wherein the second plurality of application icons are displayed in a container object corresponding to the first user interface object while the respective page of the home screen user interface is displayed in a first reconfiguration mode.
201. The method of item 200, including: 516
DK 2020 70636 A1 while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, including displaying the container object containing the second plurality of application icons, detecting a second user input that corresponds to a request to exit the first reconfiguration mode; and in response to detecting the second user input that corresponds to the request to exit the first reconfiguration mode: displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface in a normal mode, including displaying the two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement and the second plurality of application icons in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement; and reducing a visual emphasis of the container object relative to the second plurality of application icons on the respective page while displaying the second plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement.
202. The method of any of items 198-201, wherein: the second plurality of application icons are displayed with a first size when the respective page of the home screen user interface is displayed in a first reconfiguration mode; and the second plurality of application icons are displayed with a second size different from the first size when the respective page of the home screen user interface is displayed outside of the first reconfiguration mode.
203. The method of any of items 198-202, wherein: the second plurality of application icons are displayed on the respective page of the home screen user interface in locations that are not aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons when the respective page of the home screen user interface is in a first reconfiguration mode; and the second plurality of application icons are displayed on the respective page of the home screen user interface in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons when the respective page of the home — screen user interface is not in the first reconfiguration mode.
204. The method of any of items 198-203, including: 517
DK 2020 70636 A1 while concurrently displaying the two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement and the second plurality of application icons in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface: displaying respective textual identifiers of the two or more of the first plurality of application icons with a first set of display properties; and displaying respective textual identifiers of the second plurality of application icons with a second set of display properties, the second set of display properties being different from the first set of display properties.
205. The method of any of items 198-204, including: while displaying the second plurality of application icons in the locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface, detecting a third user input that is directed to a respective application icon displayed on the respective page of the home screen user interface; in response to detecting the third user input, displaying a set of selectable options corresponding to the third user input, wherein: in accordance with a determination that the third user input is directed to an area occupied by the second plurality of application icons, and that the third user input meets first criteria, displaying the set of selectable options includes displaying a first plurality of selectable options associated with the first user interface object; and in accordance with a determination that the third user input is directed to a respective one of the two or more of the first plurality of application icons that is displayed concurrently with the second plurality of application icons, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, displaying the set of selectable options includes displaying a second plurality of selectable options associated with an application corresponding to the respective one of the two or more of the first plurality of application icons.
206. The method of item 205, wherein the first plurality of selectable options associated with the first user interface object includes a first selectable option that, when activated, — causes the computer system to perform a first operation with respect to the first user interface object as a whole. 518
DK 2020 70636 A1
207. The method of any of items 205-206, wherein the first plurality of selectable options associated with the first user interface object includes a second selectable option that, when activated, causes the computer system to perform a second operation with respect to a respective application represented by one of the second plurality of application icons.
208. The method of item 207, wherein displaying the set of selectable options includes: in accordance with the determination that the third user input is directed to a first application icon of the second plurality of application icons, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, displaying the second selectable option includes an option that, when activated, causes the computer system to perform a first application-specific operation corresponding to a first application represented by the first application icon; and in accordance with the determination that the third user input is directed to a second application icon of the second plurality of application icons that is different from the first application icon, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, displaying the second selectable option includes an option that, when activated, causes the computer system to perform a second application-specific operation corresponding to a second application represented by the second application icon, wherein the first application-specific operation is different from the second application-specific operation.
209. The method of item 208, wherein: performing the first application-specific operation corresponding to the first — application represented by the first application icon includes ceasing display of the first application icon and displaying a third application icon of a third automatically selected application that is not currently included among the second plurality of application icons; and performing the second application-specific operation corresponding to the second application represented by the second application icon includes ceasing display of the second application icon and displaying a fourth application icon of a fourth automatically selected application that is not currently included among the second plurality of application icons.
210. The method of any of items 208-209, wherein: performing the first application-specific operation corresponding to the first application represented by the first application icon does not prevent the first application icon from being automatically selected by the computer system for display among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page at a later time; and 519
DK 2020 70636 A1 performing the second application-specific operation corresponding to the second application represented by the second application icon does not prevent the second application icon from being automatically selected by the computer system for display among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page at a later time.
211. The method of any of items 208-209, wherein: performing the first application-specific operation corresponding to the first application represented by the first application icon prevents the first application icon from being automatically selected by the computer system for display among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page at a later time; and performing the second application-specific operation corresponding to the second application represented by the second application icon prevents the second application icon from being automatically selected by the computer system for display among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page at a later time.
212. The method of any of items 205-209, including: in response to detecting the third user input: in accordance with a determination that that the third user input is directed to a first application icon of the second plurality of application icons, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, visually distinguishing the first application icon from other application icons of the second plurality of application icons; and in accordance with a determination that that the third user input is directed to a second application icon of the second plurality of application icons that is different from the first application icon, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, visually distinguishing the second application icon from other application icons of the second plurality of application icons.
213. The method of any of items 198-212, including: in response to detecting the third user input: in accordance with a determination that the third user input is directed to the area occupied by the second plurality of application icons, and that the third user input meets the first criteria, changing two or more of the second plurality of application icons from respective first appearances to respective second appearances different from the respective 520
DK 2020 70636 A1 first appearances, while displaying the first plurality of selectable options associated with the first user interface object.
214. The method of any of items 198-213, including: while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface in a first reconfiguration mode, including concurrently displaying the second plurality of application icons concurrently with the two or more of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a fourth user input; and in response to detecting the fourth user input: in accordance with a determination that the fourth user input is directed to a first application icon of the second plurality of application icons, and that the fourth input meets second criteria, displaying the first application icon at a new location outside of an area occupied by the second plurality of application icons, wherein the new location is selected in accordance with the fourth user input.
215. The method of item 214, including: in response to detecting the fourth user input: in accordance with a determination that the fourth user input is directed to the first application icon of the second plurality of application icons, and that the fourth input meets the second criteria, ceasing display of the first application icon among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface.
216. The method of item 214, wherein displaying the first application icon at the new location outside of the area occupied by the second plurality of application icons includes: in accordance with a determination that the new location is on the respective page of the home screen user interface, ceasing display of the first application icon from among the second plurality of application icons and displaying an new application icon that is automatically selected by the computer system among the second plurality of application icons; and in accordance with a determination that the new location is not on the respective page of the home screen user interface, maintaining the first application icon at the — location among the second plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface when the respective page is displayed.
521
DK 2020 70636 A1
217. The method of any of items 198-215, wherein the computer system automatically excludes, from the second plurality of application icons, the two or more of the first plurality of application icons that are to be concurrently displayed with the second plurality of application icons.
218. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons in a first predefined arrangement; detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to insert, into the respective page of the home screen user interface, a first user interface object containing a plurality of application icons for a plurality of applications that are automatically selected by the computer system; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, concurrently displaying on the respective page of the home screen user interface: two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement; and a second plurality of application icons, different from the first plurality of application icons, wherein: the second plurality of application icons are automatically placed on the respective page of the home screen in locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface; and the second plurality of application icons are automatically selected by the computer system for inclusion on the respective page of the home screen user interface.
522
DK 2020 70636 A1
219. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to: display a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons in a first predefined arrangement; detect a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to insert, into the respective page of the home screen user interface, a first user interface object containing a plurality of application icons for a plurality of applications that are automatically selected by — the computer system; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, concurrently display on the respective page of the home screen user interface: two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement; and a second plurality of application icons, different from the first plurality of application icons, wherein: the second plurality of application icons are automatically placed on the respective page of the home screen in locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface; and the second plurality of application icons are automatically selected by the computer system for inclusion on the respective page of the home screen user interface.
220. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; means enabled for displaying a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons in a first predefined arrangement; means enabled for detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a — request to insert, into the respective page of the home screen user interface, a first user interface object containing a plurality of application icons for a plurality of applications that are automatically selected by the computer system; and 523
DK 2020 70636 A1 means enabled, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, for concurrently displaying on the respective page of the home screen user interface: two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement; and a second plurality of application icons, different from the first plurality of application icons, wherein: the second plurality of application icons are automatically placed on the respective page of the home screen in locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home — screen user interface; and the second plurality of application icons are automatically selected by the computer system for inclusion on the respective page of the home screen user interface.
221. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means enabled for displaying a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons in a first predefined arrangement; means enabled for detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to insert, into the respective page of the home screen user interface, a first user interface object containing a plurality of application icons for a plurality of applications that are automatically selected by the computer system; and means enabled, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs, for concurrently displaying on the respective page of the home screen user interface: two or more of the first plurality of application icons in the first predefined arrangement; and a second plurality of application icons, different from the first plurality of application icons, wherein: the second plurality of application icons are automatically placed on the respective page of the home screen in locations that are aligned with the first predefined arrangement of the first plurality of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface; and 524 the second plurality of application icons are automatically selected by the computer system for inclusion on the respective page of the home screen user interface.
222. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 198-217.
223. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 198-217.
224. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, an input element, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 198-217.
225. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; and means for performing any of the methods of items 198-217.
226. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means for performing any of the methods of items 198-217.
525
DK 2020 70636 A1
227. A method, including: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein: the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons and a first user interface object containing application content corresponding to a respective application displayed at a first placement location; while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface, detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first user interface object containing — application content away from the first placement location; in response to detecting the first user input: moving the first user interface object relative to the first placement location in the respective page in accordance with the first user input; and in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met, moving a first plurality of application icons that are located in a first set of placement locations relative to the first placement location of the first user interface object containing application content to follow a direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content.
228. The method of item 227, including: in response to detecting the first user input: in accordance with a determination that the first criteria are met, moving a second plurality of application icons that are located in a second set of placement locations relative to the first placement location of the first user interface object containing application content in an opposite direction of the movement of the first user interface object containing application content.
229. The method of any of items 227-228, including: in response to detecting the first user input: in accordance with a determination that the second criteria are met, the second criteria being different from the first criteria, maintaining the first plurality of application — icons at the first set of placement locations after the first user interface object containing application content is moved away from the first placement location. 526
DK 2020 70636 A1
230. The method of item 229, wherein: the first criteria includes a first requirement that is met when the first user input corresponds to a request to move the first user interface object containing application content to a second placement location on the respective page that is different from the first placement location, and the second criteria includes a second requirement that is met when the first user input corresponds to a request to move the first user interface object containing application content to a third placement location on another page of the multipage home screen user interface that is different from the respective page of the multipage home screen user interface.
231. The method of any of items 229-230, wherein: the first criteria include a third requirement that is met when the respective page includes a second user interface object containing application content at a second placement location different from the first placement location; and the second criteria include a fourth requirement that is met when the first user interface object containing application icon is not displayed concurrently with other user interface objects containing application content on the respective page.
232. The method of any of items 229-231, wherein: the first criteria include a fifth requirement that is met when the respective page includes a third user interface object containing application content and that the third user interface object containing application content is larger than a respective size; and the second criteria include a sixth requirement that is met when the respective page does not include a user interface object containing application content that is larger than the respective size.
233. The method of any of items 227-232, wherein the first set of placement locations corresponds to a cluster of adjacent placement locations, and the first plurality of application icons are moved as a group to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content.
234. The method of item 233, wherein moving the first plurality of application icons to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application — content includes maintaining a relative position of the first plurality of application icons to 527
DK 2020 70636 A1 each other when moving the first plurality of application icons to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content.
235. The method of any of items 227-234, wherein moving the first plurality of application icons to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content includes moving respective ones of the first plurality of application icons with different values for one or more movement characteristics.
236. The method of any of items 227-235, wherein moving the first plurality of application icons to follow the direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content includes moving at least one of the first plurality of application icons with — adifferent value for one or more respective movement characteristics from that of the first user interface object containing application content.
237. The method of item 236, including: in response to detecting the first user input: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object has been moved to the second page of the home screen user interface, and that the second page of the home screen user interface includes the third plurality of application icons in the first arrangement that meets third criteria, shifting the third plurality of application icons in the second arrangement on the second page to make room for the first user interface object containing application content on the second page.
238. The method of any of items 236-237, wherein, in the first arrangement, a subset of the application icons are arranged in a single row, and, in the second arrangement, the subset of the application icons are arranged in a multi-row array that corresponds to a size of the first user interface object.
239. The method of any of items 227-238, including: in response to detecting the first user input: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object has been moved to a third page of the home screen user interface, and that the third page of the home screen user interface includes a fourth plurality of application icons in the third arrangement at a fourth set of placement locations that meets fourth criteria, shifting the fourth plurality of application icons in the third arrangement on the third page to make room for the first user 528
DK 2020 70636 A1 interface object containing application content without the first user interface object being moved to location corresponding to the fourth set of placement locations of the fourth plurality of application icons in the third arrangement.
240. The method of item 239, wherein the fourth plurality of application icons are located near a top of the third page, and after shifting the fourth plurality of application icons in the third arrangement on the third page, a region near the top of the third page remains unoccupied until the first user interface object is moved to the fourth set of placement locations of the fourth plurality of application icons at the top of the third page.
241. The method of any of items 227-240, including: in response to detecting the first user input: in accordance with a determination that fifth criteria are met, moving a first group of application icons and a second group of application icons on the respective page of the home screen user interface in accordance with the movement of the first user interface object on the respective page, wherein: an arrangement of application icons relative to each other in the first group is maintained while the first group is moved on the respective page; an arrangement of application icons relative to each other in the second group is maintained while the second group is moved on the respective page; and a size of the first group of application icons and a size of the second group of — application icons are selected based on a size of the first user interface object containing application content.
242. The method of item 241, including: receiving a request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page; and in response to receiving the request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page, rearranging application icons on the respective page, including changing an arrangement of the first and second groups of application icons by reflowing the first and second groups of application icons while maintaining the arrangement of the application icons within the first and second groups of application icons.
243. The method of item 241, including: 529
DK 2020 70636 A1 receiving a request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page; and in response to receiving the request to remove the first user interface object from the respective page, rearranging application icons on the respective page, including changing an arrangement of the first and second groups of application icons by reflowing the application icons including changing the arrangement of the application icons within at least one respective group of application icons relative to other application icons within the respective group application icons.
244. The method of any of items 227-243, including: while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface, including displaying the first user interface object at the first placement location and displaying a first set of one or more application icons in one or more placement locations for application icons preceding the first placement location, detecting a user input that corresponds to a request to delete an application icon in the first set of one or more application icons; and in response to the user input that corresponds to the request to delete the application icon in the first set of one or more application icons: in accordance with a determination that a size of vacant placement locations for application icons preceding the first placement location does not correspond to a size of the first user interface object, maintaining the first user interface object at the first placement location.
245. The method of item 244, including: in response to the user input that corresponds to the request to delete the application icon in the first set of one or more application icons in placement locations for application icons preceding the first placement location: in accordance with a determination that a size of vacant placement locations for application icons preceding the placement location does not correspond to the size of the first user interface object and that the respective page includes a second set of one or more application icons in placement locations for application icons following the first placement location, moving an application icon from the second set of one or more application icons to — aplacement location for application icon that precedes the first placement location.
246. The method of any of items 227-245, including: 530
DK 2020 70636 A1 while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface, including displaying the first user interface object at the first placement location and displaying a third set of one or more application icons in placement locations for application icons preceding the first placement location, detecting a user input that corresponds to a request to insert an additional application icon not present in the respective page into the respective page; and in response to the user input that corresponds to the request to insert the additional application icon into the respective page: in accordance with a determination that there is at least one vacant placement location for application icon preceding the first placement location, inserting the additional — application icon into a first vacant placement location for application icon preceding the first placement location; and in accordance with a determination that there are no vacant placement locations for application icon preceding the first placement location, inserting the additional application icon into a second vacant placement location for application icon following the first placement location.
247. The method of any of items 227-246, including: in response to detecting the first user input: in accordance with a determination that sixth criteria are met, wherein the sixth criteria are met when the first user interface object is dragged away from the respective — page of the home screen user interface onto a second respective page of the home screen user interface that has an arrangement of application icons that cannot be divided into groups that have a size corresponding to the first user interface object with no more than one group having fewer than a respective number of application icons that form an arrangement in the size corresponding to the first user interface object: moving a set of application icons on the second respective page to change an original arrangement of the set of one or more application icons on the second respective page of the home screen user interface to an arrangement of application icons that can be divided into groups that have the size corresponding to the first user interface object with no more than one group having fewer than a respective number of application icons that form an arrangement in the size corresponding to the first user interface object.
248. The method of item 247, including: 531
DK 2020 70636 A1 in response to detecting the first user input: in accordance with a determination that seven criteria are met after the sixth criteria are met, wherein the seventh criteria are met when the first user interface object is dragged away from the second respective page of the home screen user interface: restoring the original arrangement of the set of one or more application icons on the second respective page of the home screen user interface.
249. The method of any of items 227-248, including: in response to detecting the first user input: in accordance with a determination that seventh criteria are met, wherein the seventh criteria are met when the first user interface object is dragged away from the respective page of the home screen user interface onto a second respective page of the home screen user interface that is different from the respective page of the home screen user interface: moving existing application icons on the second respective page in one or more groups, where each group includes an original arrangement of adjacent application icons on the second respective page that has a size corresponding to a size of the first user interface object.
250. The method of any of items 227-249, including: after the first user interface has been moved away from the first placement location in accordance with the first user input and before a termination of the first user input is detected, detecting a second user input that is directed to a third user interface object containing application content; in response to detecting the second user input that is directed to the third user interface object containing application content, in accordance with a determination that the second user input meets seventh criteria: moving the third user interface object containing application content and the first user interface object containing application content as a group in accordance with the first user input.
251. The method of any of items 227-250, including: 532
DK 2020 70636 A1 after the first user interface has been moved away from the first placement location in accordance with the first user input and before a termination of the first user input is detected, detecting one or more third user inputs that are directed to one or more application icons; in response to detecting the one or more third user inputs that are directed to the one or more application icons, in accordance with a determination that the one or more third user inputs meet eighth criteria: moving the one or more application icons and the first user interface object containing application content as a group in accordance with the first user input.
252. The method of any of items 244-251, including: in accordance with a determination that at least one object is being moved with the first user interface object as a group in accordance with the first user input, displaying an indicator of a count of the at least one object.
253. The method of any of items 227-252, including: after the first user interface has been moved away from the first placement location in accordance with the first user input and before a termination of the first user input is detected, detecting that the first user interface object is moved to a placement location of a fourth user interface object containing application content; and in response to detecting that the first user interface object is moved to the placement location of the fourth user interface object containing application content: in accordance with a determination that merging criteria are met, displaying visual feedback to indicate that the first user interface object will be grouped with the fourth user interface object.
254. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the display generation component, a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein: 533
DK 2020 70636 A1 the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons and a first user interface object containing application content corresponding to a respective application displayed at a first placement location; while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface, detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first user interface object containing application content away from the first placement location; in response to detecting the first user input: moving the first user interface object relative to the first placement location in the respective page in accordance with the first user input; and in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met, moving a first plurality of application icons that are located in a first set of placement locations relative to the first placement location of the first user interface object containing application content to follow a direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content.
255. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to: display, via the display generation component, a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein: the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons and a first user interface object containing application content corresponding to a respective application displayed at a first placement location; while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface, detect a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first user interface object containing application content away from the first placement location; in response to detecting the first user input: move the first user interface object relative to the first placement location in the respective page in accordance with the first user input; and in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met, move a first plurality of application icons that are located in a first set of placement locations relative to the first placement location of the first user interface object containing application content 534
DK 2020 70636 A1 to follow a direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content.
256. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; means enabled for displaying, via the display generation component, a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein: the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons and a first user interface object containing application content corresponding to a respective application displayed at a first placement location; means enabled, while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface, for detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first user interface object containing application content away from the first placement location; means enabled, in response to detecting the first user input: for moving the first user interface object relative to the first placement location in the respective page in accordance with the first user input; and in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met, for moving a first plurality of application icons that are located in a first set of placement locations relative to the first placement location of the first user interface object containing application content to follow a direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content.
257. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means enabled for displaying, via the display generation component, a respective page of a home screen user interface, wherein: the respective page of the home screen user interface includes a first plurality of application icons and a first user interface object containing application content corresponding to a respective application displayed at a first placement location; means enabled, while displaying the respective page of the home screen user interface, for detecting a first user input that corresponds to a request to move the first user interface object containing application content away from the first placement location; 535
DK 2020 70636 A1 means enabled, in response to detecting the first user input: means enabled for moving the first user interface object relative to the first placement location in the respective page in accordance with the first user input; and means enabled, in accordance with a determination that first criteria are met, for moving a first plurality of application icons that are located in a first set of placement locations relative to the first placement location of the first user interface object containing application content to follow a direction of movement of the first user interface object containing application content.
258. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 227-253.
259. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 227-253.
260. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, an input element, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 227-253.
261. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; and means for performing any of the methods of items 227-253.
262. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means for performing any of the methods of items 227-253. 536
DK 2020 70636 A1
263. A method, including: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component: displaying, via the display generation component, a first user interface for selecting user interface objects for placement on a home screen user interface of the computer system, wherein the first user interface includes a first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to a first application; while displaying the first user interface, detecting a first user input that is directed to a respective location in the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application and is preconfigured with one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object, and that the first user input is a first — type of input, displaying one or more first controls for changing one or more configuration options for the first user interface object to configuration options that are different from the one or more predetermined configuration options; and in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding — to the first application, and that the first user input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, displaying, in a respective user interface different from the first user interface, the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application with the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object.
264. The method of item 263, wherein the first user interface includes a second user interface object, different from the first user interface object, that includes application content corresponding to a second application, and the method includes: in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the second user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the second application and is preconfigured with one or more predetermined 537
DK 2020 70636 A1 configuration options corresponding to the second user interface object, and that the first user input is the first type of input, displaying one or more second controls for changing one or more configuration options for the second user interface object to configuration options that are different from the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the second user interface object; and in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the location of the second user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the second application, and that the first user input is the second type of input different from the first type of input, displaying, in the respective user interface — different from the first user interface, the second user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the second application with the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the second user interface object.
265. The method of any of items 263-264, including: while displaying the one or more first controls, detecting one or more configuration — inputs that are directed to the one or more first controls; and in response to detecting the one or more configuration inputs, changing at least one of the one or more configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object to configuration options that are different from the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding the first user interface object; after changing the at least one of the one or more configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object, detecting a second user input that corresponds to a request to add the first user interface object to the respective user interface; and in response to detecting the second user input, displaying the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application in the respective user interface with the at least one of the one or more configuration options of the first user interface object being different from the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object.
266. The method of any of items 263-265, wherein the first user interface includes a representation of a plurality of user interface objects containing application content corresponding to different applications, wherein the plurality of user interface objects are associated with the same placement location, and the method includes: 538
DK 2020 70636 A1 in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the representation of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content that are associated with the same placement location, and that the first user input corresponds to a request to add the plurality of user interface objects containing application content to the respective user interface: displaying one of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content at a respective placement location in the respective user interface, wherein the respective placement location is selected in accordance with the first user input; and associating the plurality of user interface objects containing application content with the respective placement location, such that different user interface objects of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content are displayed at the respective placement location at different times.
267. The method of item 266, including: in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to alocation of the representation of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content, and that the first user input is the first type of input, displaying one or more third controls for changing constituent user interface objects of the plurality of user interface objects associated with the same placement location.
268. The method of any of items 263-267, wherein the one or more first controls includes a respective control for changing a size of the first user interface object from a first size to a second size that is different from the first size of the first user interface object.
269. The method of item 268, including: while displaying the one or more first controls, detecting a fourth user input that activates the respective control for changing the size of the first user interface object to the — second size that is different from the first size of the first user interface object; and 539
DK 2020 70636 A1 in response to detecting the fourth user input that activates the respective control of the one or more first controls, changing the size of the first user interface object to the second size that is different from the first size of the first user interface object; and after changing the size of the first user interface object to the second size, detecting a fifth user input that meets preset criteria for adding the first user interface object with the second size to the respective user interface; and in response to detecting the fifth user input, displaying the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application in the respective user interface with the second size that is different from the first size of the first user interface object.
270. The method of any of items 263-269, wherein the one or more first controls include a respective control for changing a type of the first user interface object from a first type to a second type that is different from the first type of the first user interface object.
271. The method of any of items 263-270, wherein the one or more first controls are displayed concurrently with an affordance that, when activated, causes the first user interface object to be added to an automatically selected placement location.
272. The method of any of items 263-271, wherein the first user interface object, as displayed in the first user interface, includes current application data from the first application, and the method includes: while displaying the first user interface object in the first user interface, in accordance with a determination that application data included in the first user interface object is updated in the first application, updating the first user interface object in the first user interface to show updated application data from the first application.
273. The method of any of items 263-272, wherein the first user interface object, as displayed in the first user interface, includes user-specific application data from the first application.
274. The method of any of items 263-273, including: in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface: 540
DK 2020 70636 A1 in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application, and that the first user input is the first type of input, displaying the first user interface object containing application content from the first application concurrently with the one or more first controls.
275. The method of item 274, including: while concurrently displaying the one or more first controls and the first user interface object containing application content, detecting one or more user inputs activating at least one of the one or more first controls; and in response to detecting the one or more user inputs activating the at least one of the one or more first controls: displaying a placeholder object in place of the first user interface object while application data corresponding to the first user interface object is being loaded; and displaying the first user interface object in place of the placeholder object after the application data corresponding to the first user interface object has been loaded.
276. The method of any of items 274-275, wherein the first user interface object, as concurrently displayed with the one or more controls, is animated so that it moves separately from a background of the user interface.
277. The method of item 276, wherein the first user interface object, as concurrently — displayed with the one or more first controls, is animated to tilt in a simulated z direction relative to the background of the user interface.
278. The method of any of items 263-277, including: while concurrently displaying the one or more controls and the first user interface object, detecting an initial portion of a user input that corresponds to a request to drag the first — user interface object to a user-selected placement location for the first user interface object; and in response to detecting the initial portion of the user input that corresponds to the request to drag the first user interface object to the user-selected placement location for the first user interface object, changing an appearance of the first user interface object to indicate that the first user interface object is movable with continuation of the user input. 541
DK 2020 70636 A1
279. The method of any of items 263-278, wherein the first user interface is overlaid on a first portion of a page of a home screen user interface, and a second portion of the page of the home screen user interface is concurrently visible with the first user interface.
280. The method of any of items 263-279, including: displaying, within the first user interface a first preconfigured user interface object group that includes a first plurality of user interface objects containing application content corresponding to different applications, wherein the first preconfigured user interface object group, when placed on a respective user interface displays different subset of the first plurality of user interface objects containing application content included in the first preconfigured user interface object group at different times at a placement location of the preconfigured user interface object group.
281. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, via the display generation component, a first user interface for selecting user interface objects for placement on a home screen user interface of the computer system, wherein the first user interface includes a first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to a first application; while displaying the first user interface, detecting a first user input that is directed to a respective location in the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application and is preconfigured with one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object, and that the first user input is a first type of input, displaying one or more first controls for changing one or more 542
DK 2020 70636 A1 configuration options for the first user interface object to configuration options that are different from the one or more predetermined configuration options; and in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application, and that the first user input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, displaying, in a respective user interface different from the first user interface, the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application with the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object.
282. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to: display, via the display generation component, a first user interface for selecting user interface objects for placement on a home screen user interface of the computer system, wherein the first user interface includes a first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to a first application; while displaying the first user interface, detect a first user input that is directed to a respective location in the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective — location in the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application and is preconfigured with one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object, and that the first user input is a first type of input, display one or more first controls for changing one or more configuration options for the first user interface object to configuration options that are different from the one or more predetermined configuration options; and in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the location of the first user interface object that includes application content — corresponding to the first application, and that the first user input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, display, in a respective user interface different from the first user interface, the first user interface object that includes application content 543
DK 2020 70636 A1 corresponding to the first application with the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object.
283. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; means enabled for displaying, via the display generation component, a first user interface for selecting user interface objects for placement on a home screen user interface of the computer system, wherein the first user interface includes a first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to a first application; means enabled, while displaying the first user interface, for detecting a first user input that is directed to a respective location in the first user interface; and means enabled, in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface: means enabled in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application and is preconfigured with one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object, and that the first user input is a first type of input, for displaying one or more first controls for changing one or more configuration options for the first user interface object to configuration options that are different from the one or more predetermined configuration options; and means enabled in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application, and that the first user input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, for displaying, in a respective user interface different — from the first user interface, the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application with the one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object.
284. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and an input element, comprising: means enabled for displaying, via the display generation component, a first user interface for selecting user interface objects for placement on a home screen user 544
DK 2020 70636 A1 interface of the computer system, wherein the first user interface includes a first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to a first application; means enabled, while displaying the first user interface, for detecting a first user input that is directed to a respective location in the first user interface; and means enabled, in response to detecting the first user input that is directed to the respective location in the first user interface: means enabled in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application and is preconfigured with one or more predetermined configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object, and that the first user input is a first type of input, for displaying one or more first controls for changing one or more configuration options for the first user interface object to configuration options that are different from the one or more predetermined configuration options; and means enabled in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the location of the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application, and that the first user input is a second type of input different from the first type of input, for displaying, in a respective user interface different from the first user interface, the first user interface object that includes application content corresponding to the first application with the one or more predetermined — configuration options corresponding to the first user interface object.
285. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of items 263-280.
286. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the device to perform any of the methods of items 263-280. 545
DK 2020 70636 A1
287. A graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, an input element, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising user interfaces displayed in accordance with any of the methods of items 263-280.
288. An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; and means for performing any of the methods of items 263-280.
289. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display — and an input element, comprising: means for performing any of the methods of items 263-280. 546

权利要求:
Claims (45)
[1] 1. A method, comprising: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component: displaying a first user interface, including displaying a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface; while displaying the first user interface including the plurality of application icons in accordance with the first layout, detecting a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a first location corresponding to a first set of application icons on the first user interface: moving the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location; and displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location.
[2] 2. The method of claim 1, including: in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a second location corresponding to a second set of application icons on the first user interface, the second location being different from the first location and the second set of application icons being different from the first set of application icons: moving the second set of application icons from the second location to the respective location where the second set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the second location; and 547
DK 2020 70636 A1 displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the second location.
[3] 3. The method of claim 2, wherein: the first set of application icons or the second set of application icons are moved to the respective location in accordance with a determination that there is insufficient space on the first user interface to accommodate insertion of the first user interface object containing application content; and the method further includes: before termination of the first input, displaying a second user interface — different from the first user interface, including displaying a second plurality of application icons in accordance with a second layout in the second user interface, wherein there is sufficient space on the second user interface to accommodate the second plurality of application icons and the first user interface object containing application content; while displaying the second user interface including the second plurality of — application icons in accordance with the second layout: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a fifth location corresponding to a fifth set of application icons on the second user interface, shifting one or more of the second plurality of application icons, including the fifth set of application icons, on the second user interface, to create space for inserting the first user interface object containing application content at the fifth location on the second user interface.
[4] 4. The method of claim 3, wherein the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface includes an input that drags the first user interface object across the first user interface, and — the first user interface object is inserted into the first user interface upon termination of the first input.
[5] 5. The method of claim 4, including: after the termination of the first input is detected, while the first user interface object that includes application content is displayed at the first location after the first set of application icons have been moved from the first location to the respective location, detecting 548
DK 2020 70636 A1 a second input that drags the first user interface object from the first location to the second location and drops the first user interface object at the second location; and in response to detecting the second input that drags the first user interface object from the first location to the second location and drops the first user interface object at the second location: shifting a third set of application icons, including the second set of application icons, on the first user interface such that the first location is occupied by one or more of the third set of application icons, the second set of application icons remain displayed on the first user interface, and the second location is vacated by the second set of application icons; and displaying the first user interface object at the second location.
[6] 6. The method of claim 5, wherein the first set of application icons are moved into a folder, and the method includes: in response to detecting the first input and prior to detecting the termination of the first input: displaying a first animated sequence illustrating movement of the first set of application icons into the folder when the first user interface object containing application content is dragged over the first location; and displaying a second animated sequence illustrating movement of the second set of application icons into the folder when the first user interface object containing application content is dragged over the second location.
[7] 7. The method of claim 6, wherein the method includes: while displaying the first user interface including the folder that includes the first set of application icons after detecting the termination of the first input, detecting a third input that is directed to the folder; and in response to detecting the third input that is directed to the folder: displaying at least a portion of content of the folder; and displaying a prompt including one or more selectable options for performing respective operations with respect to the content of the folder.
[8] 8. The method of claim 7, wherein the one or more selectable options include a first — option to delete the first set of application icons.
549
DK 2020 70636 A1
[9] 9. The method of any of claims 7-8, wherein the one or more selectable options include a second option to create a new page that includes the first set of application icons, and wherein the new page is to be included with the first user interface as separate pages in a multipage home screen user interface.
[10] 10. The method of any of claims 7-9, wherein the one or more selectable options include a third option to rename the folder.
[11] 11. The method of any of claims 3-10, including: prior to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: displaying the first user interface in a first reconfiguration mode, wherein positions of application icons in the first user interface are adjustable in response to user inputs during the first reconfiguration mode, and wherein the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode includes an affordance that, when activated, causes display of an object-editing user interface that includes a plurality of user interface objects respectively containing application content corresponding to different applications installed on the computer system.
[12] 12. The method of claim 11, wherein the object-editing user interface includes a set of one or more preconfigured user interface objects containing application content corresponding to different applications of at least a subset of all applications installed on the — computer system.
[13] 13. The method of any of claim 11-12, wherein the object-editing user interface includes respective representations of a plurality of applications installed on the computer system, and activation of the representation of a respective application in the object-editing user interface in accordance with preset activation criteria causes display of a plurality of configuration options associated with a respective user interface object that includes application content of the respective application.
[14] 14. The method of claim 13, wherein the plurality of configuration options include a set of one or more object sizes for the respective user interface object that includes application content of the respective application.
550
DK 2020 70636 A1
[15] 15. The method of any of claims 13-14, including: displaying a preview of a currently selected user interface object containing application content of the respective application in accordance with user-selected values for the plurality of configuration options.
[16] 16. The method of any of claims 11-15, wherein the object-editing user interface includes a plurality of recommended user interface objects respectively containing application content corresponding to different applications of at least a subset of applications installed on the computer system.
[17] 17. The method of any of claims 11-16, including: while the object-editing user interface is displayed, detecting a fifth input selecting the first user interface object containing application content for inserting into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the fifth input selecting the user interface object containing application content for inserting into the first user interface: ceasing to display the object- editing user interface; and concurrently displaying the first user interface object and the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode.
[18] 18. The method of any of claims 11-17, including: while displaying the first user interface in the first reconfiguration mode after the first — user interface object containing application content has been inserted at the first location following the termination of the first input, detecting a sixth input directed to the first user interface object containing application content: in accordance with a determination that the sixth input meets preset criteria, displaying a first object-specific object-editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content, wherein the first object-specific object-editing user interface displays a plurality of options for configuring the first user interface object containing application content.
[19] 19. The method of claim 18, wherein displaying the first object-specific object-editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content — includes rotating the first user interface object containing application content to reveal a 551
DK 2020 70636 A1 reverse side of the first user interface object containing application content, and displaying the plurality of options for configuring the first user interface object containing application content on the reverse side of the first user interface object containing application content.
[20] 20. The method of claim 19, wherein displaying the first object-specific object-editing user interface corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content includes visually deemphasizing regions of the first user interface outside of the first object- specific object-editing user interface.
[21] 21. The method of any of claims 11-18, including: after displaying the first user interface object containing application content at the first — location in response to detecting termination of the first input: while the first user interface remains in the first reconfiguration mode, detecting a seventh input removing the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface; and in response to detecting the seventh input removing the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface, restoring the first set of application icons from the respective location onto the first user interface.
[22] 22. The method of claim 21, wherein the first set of application icons are redisplayed at the first location following removal of the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface.
[23] 23. The method of claim 22, wherein the respective location is a new folder that was created to store the first set of application icons when the first set of application icons were removed from the first location, and the new folder is deleted following removal of the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface and restoration of the first set of application icons back to the first location.
[24] 24. The method of claim 22, wherein the respective location is a new page of a multipage home screen user interface that was created to store the first set of application icons when the first set of application icons were removed from the first location, and the new page is deleted following removal of the first user interface object containing application content from the first user interface and restoration of the first set of application icons back to the first location.
552
DK 2020 70636 A1
[25] 25. The method of any of claims 1-24, including: while displaying the first user interface including the first user interface object, detecting a fourth input corresponding to a request to insert a second user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the fourth input corresponding to the request to insert the second user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the input is directed to a fourth location corresponding to a fourth set of application icons on the first user interface: moving the fourth set of application icons from the fourth location to the respective location where the fourth set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location; and displaying the second user interface object that includes application content at the fourth location.
[26] 26. The method of any of claims 1-25, wherein the first user interface includes multiple — user interface objects containing application content that correspond to a first application, including a first user interface object and a second user interface object, where the second user interface object includes different information than the first user interface object.
[27] 27. The method of any of claims 1-26, wherein the first user interface includes multiple user interface objects containing application content, the multiple user interface objects respectively containing application content from different applications.
[28] 28. The method of any of claims 1-27, wherein the first user interface object contains first application content from the application corresponding to the first user interface object at a first time, and the first user interface object contains second application content from the application corresponding to the first user interface object that is different from the first application content at a second time different from the first time.
[29] 29. The method of any of claims 1-28, wherein the first user interface object containing application content includes a visual indication of the application from which application content contained in the first user interface object is obtained.
[30] 30. The method of any of claims 1-29, wherein: 553
DK 2020 70636 A1 in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object including application content corresponds to a first application and has a first size, the first set of application icons include a first number of application icons; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object including application content corresponds to a second application and has a second size different from the first size, the first set of application icons include a second number of application icons that is different from the first number of application icons, wherein the first number of application icons and the second number of application icons are respectively based on the first size and the second size of the first user interface object containing application content.
[31] 31. The method of any of claims 1-30, wherein the first user interface is a respective page of a multipage home screen user interface, and the method includes: while displaying the first user interface, detecting a sequence of one or more page navigation inputs that causes navigation from the first user interface to a second user interface; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more page navigation inputs, displaying the second user interface, including displaying a plurality of user interface objects containing application content, each of the plurality of user interface objects containing application content displays application content from a respective application.
[32] 32. The method of any of claims 1-31, wherein the respective location is a folder that is located at a predefined location on the first user interface.
[33] 33. The method of any of claims 1-31, wherein the respective location is newly created in response to the first input.
[34] 34. The method of any of claims 1-31, wherein the respective location is an existing location.
[35] 35. The method of any of claims 1-34, including: while displaying the first user interface including the first user interface object containing application content at the first location and a third user interface object that includes application content at a sixth location different from the first location, detecting a seventh input that corresponds to a request to drag the third user interface object containing application content from the sixth location to the first location and 554
DK 2020 70636 A1 in response to detecting the seventh input corresponding to the request to move the third user interface object that includes application content to the first location: in accordance with a determination that a size of the third user interface object containing application content is greater than a size of the first user interface object containing application content, moving the first user interface object away from the first location to create space for the third user interface object containing application content at the first location; and in accordance with a determination that the size of the third user interface containing application content is equal to the size of the first user interface object containing — application content, forgoing moving the first user interface object away from the first location; and displaying the third user interface object containing application content at the first location, wherein the first user interface object and the third user interface object are alternatively displayed at the first location at different times.
[36] 36. The method of any of claims 1-35, including: while displaying the first user interface including the first user interface object containing application content at the first location, detecting an eighth input that corresponds to a request to drag and drop a fourth user interface object containing application content to the first location; and in response to detecting the eighth input corresponding to the request to drag and drop the fourth user interface object containing application content to the first location: displaying the fourth user interface object at the first location; and switching to displaying the first user interface object at the first location at a later time.
[37] 37. The method of any of claims 1-36, including: while displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location on the first user interface, detecting a user input that corresponds to a request to display, on the first user interface, a plurality of selectable options corresponding to the first user interface object; and in response to detecting the user input that corresponds to the request to display on the first user interface the plurality of selectable options corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content, displaying the plurality of selectable options 555
DK 2020 70636 A1 corresponding to the first user interface object on the first user interface, wherein the plurality of selectable options include one or more selectable controls for changing a size of the first user interface object containing application content from a first size to a second size of one or more available sizes that are different from the first size.
[38] 38 The method of claim 37, including: while displaying the plurality of selectable options corresponding to the first user interface object containing application content, detecting a user input that selects the second size of the one or more available sizes that are different from the first size using the one or more selectable controls; and in response to detecting the user input that selects the second size using the one or more selectable controls: changing the size of the first user interface object containing application content from the first size to the second size.
[39] 39. The method of claim 38, including: in response to detecting the user input that selects the second size using the one or more selectable controls: moving one or more application icons on the first user interface relative to the first location.
[40] 40. The method of any of claims 38-39, wherein the second size of the first user interface object containing application content is greater than the first size of the first user interface object containing application content, and wherein the method includes: in response to detecting the user input that selects the second size using the one or more selectable controls: in accordance with a determination that a size of vacant placement locations — on the first user interface does not correspond to a difference between the second size and the first size, moving a set of one or more application icons existing on the first user interface to a predetermined location.
[41] 41. The method of any of claims 1-40, including: in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first — user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: 556
[42] DK 2020 70636 A1 in conjunction with displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location, displaying a visual feedback that includes an animated visual effect that propagates from the first location in different directions across the first user interface. 42 An electronic device, comprising: a display; an input element; one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying a first user interface, including displaying a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface; while displaying the first user interface including the plurality of application icons in — accordance with the first layout, detecting a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a first — location corresponding to a first set of application icons on the first user interface: moving the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location; and displaying the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location.
[43] 43. The electronic device of claim 42, wherein the one or more programs include instructions for performing the method of any of claims 2-41.
[44] 44. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more — programs comprising instructions, which, when executed by an electronic device with a display and an input element, cause the electronic device to: 557
DK 2020 70636 A1 display a first user interface, including displaying a plurality of application icons in accordance with a first layout in the first user interface; while displaying the first user interface including the plurality of application icons in accordance with the first layout, detect a first input corresponding to a request to insert a first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first input corresponding to the request to insert the first user interface object that includes application content into the first user interface: in accordance with a determination that the first input is directed to a first location corresponding to a first set of application icons on the first user interface: move the first set of application icons from the first location to a respective location where the first set of application icons cannot be directly activated from the first user interface once they have been moved to the respective location to create space for the first user interface object that includes application content at the first location; and display the first user interface object that includes application content — at the first location.
[45] 45. The computer readable storage medium of claim 44, wherein the one or more programs further comprise instructions, which, when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform the method of any of claims 2-41.
558

类似技术:

---

公开号 | 公开日 | 专利标题

---

US11036387B2|2021-06-15|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects

---

DK180317B1|2020-11-09|Systems, methods, and user interfaces for interacting with multiple application windows

---

JP2020123313A|2020-08-13|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects

---

US20140165006A1|2014-06-12|Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Managing Folders with Multiple Pages

---

EP3617863A1|2020-03-04|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects

---

AU2020239731B2|2021-10-28|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with user interface objects corresponding to applications

---

AU2020239732B2|2022-03-10|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with user interface objects corresponding to applications

---

AU2020239725B2|2022-03-17|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with user interface objects corresponding to applications

---

AU2021101401B4|2021-08-26|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with user interface objects corresponding to applications

---

JP7026183B2|2022-02-25|User interface for your application Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with objects.

---

JP7028935B2|2022-03-02|User interface for your application Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with objects.

---

WO2021183690A1|2021-09-16|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with user interface objects corresponding to applications

---

KR102367838B1|2022-02-24|Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing concurrently open software applications

同族专利:

---

公开号 | 公开日

---

US20210286480A1|2021-09-16|

---

KR20210114317A|2021-09-23|

---

DK202070608A1|2021-11-16|

---

DK202070638A1|2021-10-29|

---

DK202070639A1|2021-11-05|

---

JP2021144682A|2021-09-24|

---

KR20210114320A|2021-09-23|

---

JP2021144681A|2021-09-24|

---

KR20210114321A|2021-09-23|

---

KR20210114322A|2021-09-23|

---

JP2021144684A|2021-09-24|

---

US20210286488A1|2021-09-16|

---

AU2020239728B1|2021-09-09|

---

AU2020239732A1|2021-09-30|

---

JP2021144683A|2021-09-24|

---

JP2021144685A|2021-09-24|

---

US20210286487A1|2021-09-16|

---

AU2020239726B1|2021-08-05|

---

AU2020239725A1|2021-09-30|

---

JP2021144680A|2021-09-24|

---

US20210286489A1|2021-09-16|

---

US11188202B2|2021-11-30|

---

KR20210114319A|2021-09-23|

---

US20210286509A1|2021-09-16|

---

AU2020239727B2|2021-12-16|

---

AU2020239731B2|2021-10-28|

---

DK202070640A1|2021-11-12|

---

AU2020239731A1|2021-09-30|

---

US20210286510A1|2021-09-16|

---

AU2020239727A1|2021-05-20|

---

KR20210114318A|2021-09-23|

---

US11137904B1|2021-10-05|

引用文献:

---

公开号 | 申请日 | 公开日 | 申请人 | 专利标题

---

---

US7770125B1|2005-02-16|2010-08-03|Adobe Systems Inc.|Methods and apparatus for automatically grouping graphical constructs|

---

US20070101279A1|2005-10-27|2007-05-03|Chaudhri Imran A|Selection of user interface elements for unified display in a display environment|

---

US7503009B2|2005-12-29|2009-03-10|Sap Ag|Multifunctional icon in icon-driven computer system|

---

US7509588B2|2005-12-30|2009-03-24|Apple Inc.|Portable electronic device with interface reconfiguration mode|

---

EP2434724A2|2006-08-24|2012-03-28|Chumby Industries, Inc.|Configurable personal audiovisual device for use in networked application-sharing system|

---

US9179086B2|2007-05-07|2015-11-03|Yahoo! Inc.|System and method for providing dynamically updating applications in a television display environment|

---

US8745535B2|2007-06-08|2014-06-03|Apple Inc.|Multi-dimensional desktop|

---

US20080307350A1|2007-06-09|2008-12-11|Alessandro Francesco Sabatelli|Method and Apparatus for Improved Desktop Arrangement|

---

US8701037B2|2007-06-27|2014-04-15|Microsoft Corporation|Turbo-scroll mode for rapid data item selection|

---

KR20090105748A|2008-04-03|2009-10-07|삼성전자주식회사|Method and apparatus for processing widget in multi ticker|

---

US9720554B2|2008-07-23|2017-08-01|Robert J. Frohwein|Method and apparatus to operate different widgets from a single widget controller|

---

US8473858B2|2008-10-16|2013-06-25|Bank Of America Corporation|Graph viewer displaying predicted account balances and expenditures|

---

US20100169828A1|2008-12-29|2010-07-01|International Business Machines Corporation|Computer desktop organization via magnet icons|

---

KR101613838B1|2009-05-19|2016-05-02|삼성전자주식회사|Home Screen Display Method And Apparatus For Portable Device|

---

FR2956757B1|2010-02-25|2012-09-21|Somfy Sas|ASSIGNING SCENARIOS TO CONTROL BUTTONS.|

---

KR101677621B1|2010-03-12|2016-11-18|엘지전자 주식회사|Content control apparatus and method thereof|

---

US9170708B2|2010-04-07|2015-10-27|Apple Inc.|Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing folders|

---

US8661369B2|2010-06-17|2014-02-25|Lg Electronics Inc.|Mobile terminal and method of controlling the same|

---

KR101660746B1|2010-08-24|2016-10-10|엘지전자 주식회사|Mobile terminal and Method for setting application indicator thereof|

---

EP2431870B1|2010-09-17|2019-11-27|LG Electronics Inc.|Mobile terminal and control method thereof|

---

KR101760693B1|2010-09-24|2017-08-04|삼성전자 주식회사|Method and apparatus for editing home screen in a touch device|

---

EP2451141B1|2010-11-09|2018-11-07|BlackBerry Limited|Methods and apparatus to display mobile device contents|

---

JP5722642B2|2011-01-24|2015-05-27|京セラ株式会社|Mobile terminal device|

---

US9830642B2|2011-03-09|2017-11-28|Apple Inc.|Intelligent delivery and acquisition of digital assets|

---

US9493130B2|2011-04-22|2016-11-15|Angel A. Penilla|Methods and systems for communicating content to connected vehicle users based detected tone/mood in voice input|

---

US20130036357A1|2011-08-03|2013-02-07|Harris Corporation|Systems and methods for automatically switching on and off a "scroll-on output" mode|

---

KR101861698B1|2011-08-18|2018-05-28|엘지전자 주식회사|Mobile device and control method for the same|

---

US9268481B2|2011-08-29|2016-02-23|Kyocera Corporation|User arrangement of objects on home screen of mobile device, method and storage medium thereof|

---

KR101873744B1|2011-11-29|2018-07-03|엘지전자 주식회사|Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same|

---

US9430120B2|2012-06-08|2016-08-30|Apple Inc.|Identification of recently downloaded content|

---

US20130346840A1|2012-06-26|2013-12-26|Digital Turbine, Inc.|Method and system for presenting and accessing content|

---

CN104823145A|2012-11-29|2015-08-05|爱德拉株式会社|Method for providing different content according to widget to be visually changed on screen of smart device|

---

US20140189593A1|2012-12-27|2014-07-03|Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba|Electronic device and input method|

---

GB201300031D0|2013-01-02|2013-02-13|Canonical Ltd|Ubuntu UX innovations|

---

US20140201681A1|2013-01-16|2014-07-17|Lookout, Inc.|Method and system for managing and displaying activity icons on a mobile device|

---

KR102078753B1|2013-01-30|2020-02-19|삼성전자주식회사|Method for controlling layout and an electronic device thereof|

---

KR102049855B1|2013-01-31|2019-11-28|엘지전자 주식회사|Mobile terminal and controlling method thereof|

---

KR101561827B1|2013-02-21|2015-10-20|주식회사 팬택|Apparatus and method for processing object on screen of terminal|

---

KR102090964B1|2013-02-22|2020-03-19|삼성전자주식회사|Mobile terminal for controlling icon displayed on touch screen and method therefor|

---

US9250761B2|2013-04-30|2016-02-02|Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc|Auto-grouping of application windows|

---

KR20150003560A|2013-07-01|2015-01-09|삼성전자주식회사|The method and apparatus for changing user interface based on user motion information|

---

JP6310076B2|2013-07-30|2018-04-11|Dmg森精機株式会社|Control system for controlling the operation of numerically controlled machine tools, and backend and frontend control devices for use in such a system|

---

US10834546B2|2013-10-14|2020-11-10|Oath Inc.|Systems and methods for providing context-based user interface|

---

CN104932781B|2014-03-18|2019-01-08|腾讯科技（深圳）有限公司|Application icon display methods at the terminal and device|

---

CN103914211B|2014-04-04|2017-08-25|华为终端有限公司|The automatic adjusting method and device of interface element|

---

KR102302233B1|2014-05-26|2021-09-14|삼성전자주식회사|Method and apparatus for providing user interface|

---

US9811250B2|2014-05-31|2017-11-07|Apple Inc.|Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying widgets|

---

EP3882753A1|2014-06-24|2021-09-22|Apple Inc.|Application menu for video system|

---

KR102225945B1|2014-07-16|2021-03-10|엘지전자 주식회사|Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same|

---

CN104156155B|2014-08-29|2017-09-19|广州视源电子科技股份有限公司|A kind of laying method and device of desktop widget|

---

KR20160026480A|2014-09-01|2016-03-09|엘지전자 주식회사|Mobile terminal and method of controlling the same|

---

US10261672B1|2014-09-16|2019-04-16|Amazon Technologies, Inc.|Contextual launch interfaces|

---

KR20160032938A|2014-09-17|2016-03-25|삼성전자주식회사|Apparatus AND method for DISPLAYING application|

---

US20160239191A1|2015-02-13|2016-08-18|Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc|Manipulation of content items|

---

US9954989B2|2015-05-06|2018-04-24|Eyespage Inc.|Lock screen graphical user interface|

---

US10097973B2|2015-05-27|2018-10-09|Apple Inc.|Systems and methods for proactively identifying and surfacing relevant content on a touch-sensitive device|

---

US9874952B2|2015-06-11|2018-01-23|Honda Motor Co., Ltd.|Vehicle user interface management|

---

US9880735B2|2015-08-10|2018-01-30|Apple Inc.|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback|

---

US10365811B2|2015-09-15|2019-07-30|Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc.|Home screen for wearable devices|

---

US10585680B2|2016-03-02|2020-03-10|Cisco Technology, Inc.|Dynamic dashboard with intelligent visualization|

---

US20170277526A1|2016-03-28|2017-09-28|Le Holdings Co., Ltd.|Software categorization method and electronic device|

---

CN109074222A|2016-04-19|2018-12-21|麦克赛尔株式会社|Mobile terminal apparatus|

---

KR20180001985A|2016-06-28|2018-01-05|삼성전자주식회사|Electronic apparatus and operating method thereof|

---

US10394437B2|2016-07-19|2019-08-27|International Business Machines Corporation|Custom widgets based on graphical user interfaces of applications|

---

KR20180031373A|2016-09-20|2018-03-28|삼성전자주식회사|Electronic device and operating method thereof|

---

EP3333688B1|2016-12-08|2020-09-02|LG Electronics Inc.|Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same|

---

WO2018165439A1|2017-03-09|2018-09-13|Google Llc|Presentation hierarchy in a notification user interface|

---

US11036387B2|2017-05-16|2021-06-15|Apple Inc.|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects|

---

DK180127B1|2017-05-16|2020-05-26|Apple Inc.|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for moving user interface objects|

---

CN108701001B|2017-06-30|2021-05-18|华为技术有限公司|Method for displaying graphical user interface and electronic equipment|

---

CN109981878B|2017-12-28|2021-09-14|华为终端有限公司|Icon management method and device|

---

US10740121B2|2018-06-22|2020-08-11|Sap Se|User interface for navigating multiple applications|USD942497S1|2018-12-20|2022-02-01|Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.|Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface|

---

USD944849S1|2018-12-20|2022-03-01|Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.|Display screen or portion thereof with transitional graphical user interface|

---

USD944820S1|2020-03-24|2022-03-01|Beijing Dajia Internet Information Technology Co., Ltd.|Display screen or portion thereof with animated graphical user interface|

法律状态:
2021-10-29| PAT| Application published|Effective date: 20210911 |

优先权:

---

申请号 | 申请日 | 专利标题

---

US202062987870P| true| 2020-03-10|2020-03-10|

---

US202062987871P| true| 2020-03-11|2020-03-11|

---

US202063008656P| true| 2020-04-10|2020-04-10|

---

US202063023237P| true| 2020-05-11|2020-05-11|

---

US202063041993P| true| 2020-06-21|2020-06-21|PCT/US2021/021776| WO2021183690A1|2020-03-10|2021-03-10|Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with user interface objects corresponding to applications|